Home

system setup - Sutron Corporation

1. Solar Panel Connections After you have connected the power source appropriate to your model you may notice the 8200 display turn on then go out after a few minutes This is a normal function designed to conserve battery power and lengthen battery life 8200A If the 8200A comes with an internal battery the battery is already connected To switch the battery ON press the rubber membrane cover on the rear of the 8200A This switch turns on or off battery power to the 8200A each time it is pressed Press it once and the display should light up Press it again and the battery is disconnected This is not to be confused with the E button on the front panel of the 8200 The E button is used solely for turning the front panel display on or off It does not connect disconnect the system power If the 8200A has the label EXT BAT on the far left side of the terminal strip it is wired for an external battery Connect a single 12V battery to the terminal strip observing proper polarity We recommend that you use an 18 gauge wire or less to minimize voltage drops that may occur through the cable Connecting the battery in reverse will blow an internal fuse on the 8200A ExT BAT aia CNT ENC1 ENC2 Connecting the Charging Voltage After you have connected the power source appropriate to your model you may notice the 8200 display turn on then go out after a few minutes This is a normal funct
2. Choose U p D own L eft R ight ENTER N M ore 1 A A A A A A a e e A e Ee eR A A A a a A A a a oa E AF gt Analogl Counter2 WindSpeed2 Deviation DataPack Analog2 Counter3 WindSpeed3 Serial Excitation Analog3 Counter4 WindSpeed4 Battery Ground Analog4 Frequency WindDirl Shaft8500 Reference Pressure Frequencyl WindDir2 Rain Amplifier Encoderl Frequency2 WindDir3 Org100 Optional Encoder2 Frequency3 WindDir4 Org700 Counter Frequency4 WaterLevel Timerl Counterl WindSpeedl Outliers Timer2 To change the name of a sensor from the front panel first enter the ENABLE SENSORS sub menu Then using the up down arrow keys to display the sensor that will be renamed press the gt right arrow key A flashing cursor will appear over the first character Use the up down arrows to change each character value and the left right arrows to move between characters When finished press l to make the change permanent or to cancel the change Note that a cannot be programmed into the name from the front panel For more information on resetting values see Chapter 3 To change the name of a sensor from a keyboard use the arrow keys to move the gt pointer to the desired sensor and press N Then type in the new name for the sensor or use backspace to edit characters in the name Press ENTER to make the change permanent or ESC to cancel the change Note that the default name for the sensor is given at the bottom of
3. The number of sensors transmitted depends on the number of sensors in the self timed group and the number of log records sent depends on the Number of Data Items selected in the 8200 The most recent data is always sent first After all of the sensors and data have been sent on last entry will be transmitted containing the battery voltage lt BATTERY NAME gt will contain the SHEF code assigned to Battery voltage in the 8200 lt OFFSET gt will be the same as for other entries and lt BATTERY gt will contain the 8200 battery voltage as measured just before transmitting EXAMPLE sensors enabled in the selftimed group Here is a message with 2 data items per transmission and with three notice how much longer this message is compared to the earlier binary examples HG 0 15 10 20 10 15 PC O 15 50 49 TA O 15 22 1 22 0 VB 0 12 2 pop VB reading hates Offset time e Ta ia gl de a Sensor Name VB TA 2 TA Interval Offset time Sensor Name TA PC 2 PC Interval Offset time Sensor Name PC HG 2 HG Interval Offset time Sensor Name HG Battery used they might be VB Note the names HG PC TA are the sensor names assigned by the person setting up the 8200 If the default names ar Encoderl
4. 1040 n systat E if n gt 0 then n 3 1045 n p2 1050 systat N spl 1060 systat C p2 1080 x 0 1090 loop for each hour data 1100 gosub 2020 fmttime 1170 if w gt 0 then gosub 1330 format primary 1180 gosub 1780 format ancillary 1190 s s 3600 set time back 1 hour 1195 control 4 buf status 1200 x x 1 1205 if x lt 3 then goto 1090 1210 if w 1 then goto 1300 1215 control 4 buf status 1220 if w gt 0 and status 26 gt 528 then goto 1300 1240 room for atleast one more hour 1245 gosub 2020 format time 1250 if w 0 then 2 gt 1255 if w 1 then 34 print 1260 gosub 1350 format PWL with different ID 1270 s s 3600 1280 x x 1 1290 if x lt 20 then goto 1215 1300 all done 1302 control 2 close 1310 z 1 stop 1320 1330 fmtPWL 1340 if w 0 then 1 1345 if w 1 then 2 1350 m 9999 1360 for t s to s 3599 step 360 1370 if w 0 then n readlog t A0AVG offset aqavg 1380 if w 1 then n readlog t WATERLEVEL 1390 if n lt m then m n 1400 next t 1410 m int m 10004 0 5 250 250 round m down to nearest quarter meter 1420 m 250 p1 send m as quarter meters 1430 for t s to s 3599 step 360 1440 if w 1 then goto 1570 1450 n readlog t AQAVG offset agavg n int n 1000 0 5 m 1465 if null or n gt 4095 or n lt 0 then n 4095 Using MEM 1470 n p2 1475 if x gt 2 then goto 1740 skip following on redundant WL 1740 next t 1750 re
5. SYSTEM SETUP MEASMNT SCHEDULE PwrMode 4 76 PwrMode O Switched Power Options PwrMode has the following options The options are selected by toggling through the list using the l key on the front panel or the O key on the terminal OFF the 12v power remains off at all times ON the 12v power is turned on and left on at all times ADVANCE timing of turn on and turn off are tied to PowerTim and MeasTim pages 4 77 4 76 Power will be turned on at PowerTim remain on through all samples and measurements and be turned off when the last measurement is complete MEASURE the 12v power will be turned on prior to each and every measurement of a sensor and turned off immediately thereafter ALARM the 12v power will normally be turned off If an alarm condition occurs the 12v power will be turned on and will remain on until the alarm condition clears SYSTEM SETUP MEASMNT SCHEDULE PwrTim ALARM the 12v power will normally be on If an alarm condition occurs the 12v power will be turned off and will remain off till the alarm condition clears MODEM the 12v power will be turned on 1 second before the 8200 dials out and turned off after the 8200 hangs up on speech modem equipped units This option is meant to be used to toggle power to a high power cellular phone PwrMode MODEM is functionally the same as PwrMode ALARM this allows switched power to also be turned on at fixed intervals by setting appropriate contr
6. Tiny BASIC 10 17 Command Syntax Description NEW Erases the current program does not effect variables or MEM NEXT var Terminates a FOR NEXT loop OUT Port Num Outputs a byte to a hardware I O port Improper use of this function can cause damage to the operation of the 8200 OPEN Device NOWAIT Selects a device for input output and control functions The optional NOWAIT parameter will cause the OPEN ex open LEDs and display message command to return immediately if the device is not 10 Open DISPLAY available The ERR function will return true when this 20 Control 1 Turn on occurs 30 Print Hello Display msg The following devices are defined by the 8200 40 Sleep 1 Control 2 Close TERM The RS 232 port 50 Open TERM NOWAIT AUX The internal serial port 60 If Err Then Goto 90 MODEM The speech modem 70 Control 1 Print Hello Control 2 VOICE The voice synthesizer 80 Close DISPLAY The alphanumeric LED display 90 Stop NULL The NULL device 10 18 Tiny Basic Command Set Command Syntax PRINT or ex sample print statements Print 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Print 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 The value of A B is A B Hello There X 1 2345678 Print X 2 3 65 Print the letter A Measure Battery POWER OnOff ex pulse the power for sec 10 Power Sleep 1 Power 0 POWER AUX OnOff ex pulse aux power for 1 sec 10 Power Aux 1 20 Sleep 1 30 Power Aux 0 Dis
7. Menu Tree Reference 4 35 INSPECT SYSTEMI M Monitor SSP Communications PC only would tell us that of the 148 transmissions from platform BEEFFOOD there where 5 transmissions with high battery S5 it is currently averaging sample number 31 C31 and there is a basic error 1 K1 at line 50 L50 INSPECT SYSTEMIM Monitor SSP Communications PC only Allows SSP messages to be decoded and various test to be peformed The main display shows a list of options the selected port and its status the unit ID to send messages to and the last mail message received As SSP messages are received or sent status messages will be scrolled on the screen Monitor V Jerbose D isplay Status K ey U nkey M ail P ort Send T o R equest Setup S end Setup B ert Options Radio Port 1 1200 CD Sending Sending To PCBASE Last Mail Did you get this V Jerbose enables additional decoding messages D isplay Status displays the system status and any accumulated radio and BERT statistics Kley keys the radio transmitter U nkey unkeys the radio transmitter Mail sends a mail message to the selected destination P ort switches to other installed radio ports Send T o selects the destination for the M R S and B options R equest Setup requests the setup from the selected destination S end Setup sends the 8210 s setup to the selected destination ESC exit the monitor ENTER redisplay the main displ
8. TempAvg Hourly average temperature TempMin Minimum temperature in the hour TempMax Maximum temperature in the hour RainDay Total rainfall in the day The following sensors should have LOG ON and Interval set to 99 00 00 TempAvg TempMin TempMax RainDay The basic run interval should be set to once a minute and the measurement interval in the measurement schedules menu should be set to one hour Interacting with a User 10 If Q 0 Then Gosub 1000 Q 1 Branch off to initialization code 20 T Measure Temp Measure the temperature 30 If T gt X Then X T Calculate max 40 If T lt N Then N T Calculate min 50 S S T C C 1 Calculate new sum increment count 60 A INT Time Mod 86400 3600 Compute current hour 70 If H A Then Stop If still same hour then all done 100 TempAvg S C Compute hourly average temperature 110 TempMin N Compute hourly min temperature 120 TempMax X Compute hourly max temperature 130 Log Time TempAvg TempAvg Log the hourly average temperature 140 Log Time TempMin TempMin Log the hourly min temperature 150 Log Time TempMax TempMax Log the hourly max temperature 160 If H 23 And A 0 Then Goto 200 Calculate end of day totals 170 Gosub 1010 Initialize just the hourly parameters 180 Stop 200 B Measure Rain R Calculate rain fall in the day 210 If B lt 0 Then B B 32768 Handle roll over 220 RainDay B Store daily rainf
9. When the special character m is entered in a message string the 8200 will provide a pre recorded speech menu which works with the DTMF decoder to allow the user to perform a variety of operations The operations include acknowledgment of alarms enabling alarms list sensor names and numbers listen to live data readings listen to archive data readings list normal not in alarm state sensors list sensors in alarm state change programmable sensor data enable data modem if voice only and hang up the phone connection The exact phrasing of the menu system is provided below After the 8200 has spoken each phrase in the menu it will wait for the user to press a key on his touch tone telephone The selected option will then be executed A dial in message of Welcome to station xxx or Hello Welcome to the Sutron 8200 48 followed by entry into the menu system makes a very simple and usable talking station PHRASES IN THE SPEECH MENU To acknowledge alarms please press 1 To enable alarms please press 2 To list sensor names and numbers please press 3 For live data please press 4 For archive data please press 5 To list normal sensors please press 6 To list sensors in alarm please press 7 To change sensor data please press 8 To enable data mode please press 9 To hang up please press 0 Enter Command MODEM SETUP Dial Out enable 4 50 Dial Out D Dial Out Enable Dial Out Enable OFF When this option is sele
10. Display the buffer length 1090 Print Buffer amp b Display the contents of the buffer Tiny BASIC 10 11 10 12 12 Actual formatting s w will typically read sensor values out of the log using the READLOG function and place the values in the message in specific formats and positions The PRINT command in Tiny Basic has a number of special options to handle the specific formatting needs of a GOES transmission The following example is portions of code that implement a custom transmission format The code was written so that the 8200 would transmit in the same format as another model DCP Note the use of line 60010 to branch to line 1000 of the code The code tests to see if sensors are in the log before trying to format the data from them see lines 1010 1018 1790 1800 Line 1020 shows the use of the offset function used to get from the operating system the offset for a sensor 1000 open BUFFER control 0 600 1002 control l control 4 buf status 1004 2 M 1006 amp u8 1008 w 1 1009 s int time 3600 1 3600 go to previous full hour of data 1010 decide to format AQAVG or WATERLEVEL 1012 n readlog s AQAVG 1014 if not err then w 0 1016 n readlog s WATERLEVEL 1018 if not err then w 1 1020 if w 0 then offset aqavg 1000 0 5 3p 1025 if w 1 then offset Waterlevel 1000 0 5 3p 1027 if w 1 then 1030 O p2 1035 a 0 0009354011 b 0 0002210605 c 0 000000127472
11. SSP hence the name of the menu One field in this setup Ack Delay also is used by the modem software when it communicates in SSP See separate headings under PROTOCOL SETUP for complete information Recording Recording R Recording Status Recording Status can be ON or OFF When OFF the 8200 will not perform any of its scheduled functions or run the BASIC program Automatic Satellite transmissions LOS radio alarm transmissions and telephone alarm transmissions are disabled when recording is OFF It will still be able to communicate with other systems such as a 9000 however the data it sends will not be updated to reflect current measurements When the Recording Status is changed to ON ON amp TX for GOES the 8200 may resize the LOG if any sensors have been added which use the log This may cause all the data in the LOG to be erased A message will be displayed before erasing the log asking approval before it is erased This gives you a chance to abort the change to Recording ON so you can save the data in the log See page 4 69 for more on the LOG With Recording set to ON the 8200 will use the schedule information to measure sensors log data run the basic program and make transmissions If you leave a site without setting Recording ON the site will not collect new data For this reason it is vital that you set Recording to ON as soon as the system has been setup As an added precaution you should also go to the SYSTEM
12. previous versions are not supported As new versions are released they should remain compatible with the above versions If not a change will be made to SETMGR Uploading Downloading Setups Operation SETMGR EXE is a DOS program It is run by typing the command SETMGR at the DOS prompt Optional arguments to the command are used to specify the input file and selected functions The full syntax of the command is as follows Appendix E 8200 Test Set Software SETMGR input file output file version gt output_dest where items in are optional and input file Specifies the file to display or convert The software will prompt for the file name if it is omitted If this file has an extension of TXT then it is assumed to specify an ASCII setup file otherwise it is expected to be the name of a binary setup file with an extension of SET output file Specifes the file to output after conversion If this file has an extension of TXT then ASCII setup information is output otherwise binary setup information is output version Specifies the setup version to output gt output dest A DOS command to redirect the output to the named file or device Itis only valid for a display function output file is not entered Displaying a Setup To display a setup type SETMGR and press ENTER The program will prompt for a file name The contents of the file will be displayed on the screen You can also type SETMGR foll
13. 00 00 00 Enable on SampTim 00 00 00 Measure off PwrTim 00 00 00 Average on Samples Set 180 Log on Measmnt Log 1 Intrvl 00 00 00 BasInt 00 00 00 Slope 0 01 BasTim 00 00 00 Offset 0 00 PwrMode on Elevation 0 Right Digits 2 To average the data over a different interval from the other measurements set a Sampling Time and reduce the number of samples to average The following example will start the sampling one minute before the other measurements are taken and sample for one minute Note that it in this example Sampling Time could be 00 14 00 00 29 00 00 44 00 00 59 00 which are all equivalent because of the 15 minute measurement interval How To 7 1 Setup for a simple weather station MEASUREMENT SCHEDULE MeasInt 00 15 00 SampInt 00 00 05 MeasTim 00 00 00 SampTim 00 14 00 PwrTim 00 00 00 Samples Set 12 Measmnt Log 1 BasInt 00 00 00 BasTim 00 00 00 PwrMode on Setup for a simple weather station The following setup is for a simple automatic weather station Wind speed direction is sampled once a second to compute a vector average of 900 samples The other sensors temperature Analog2 relative humidity Analog3 and precipitation counter are logged along with the wind data every 15 minutes MEASUREMENT SCHEDULE MeasInt 00 15 00 SampiInt 00 00 01 MeasTim 00 00 00 SampTim 00 00 00 PwrTim 00 00 00 Samples Set 900 Measmnt Log 1 BasInt 00 00 00 BasTim 00 00 00 PwrMo
14. 380 Print Min 1 2 Output min reading to 2 decimal points 390 Print 66 84 45 meters were recorded during the last 400 Print Hours 1 0 Output number of hours average is over 410 Print 54 93 94 60 39 hours these water levels are 420 Print 85 81 44 relative to presently adopted chart datum 430 Print 97 58 which is 440 Print Chart 1 2 Output chart datum value 450 Print 66 34 55 19 55 meters above IGLD 19 55 460 Return 500 Subroutine to output the value in French 505 Print Switch to french 510 Print 42 95 Canadian Hydrographic Water level announcing 520 Print 91 60 80 94 58 The level present water is 530 Print S 1 2 Output current stage to 2 decimal points 540 Print 66 meters 550 Print 45 24 54 91 60 65 84 dur last 24 hours the maximum was recorded 560 Print Max 1 2 Output max reading to 2 decimal points 570 Print 66 37 33 68 meters and a minimum 580 Print Min 1 2 Output min reading to 2 decimal points 610 Print 66 93 60 39 these levels are 620 Print 85 91 44 81 relative to the presently adopted chart 630 Print 97 which is 640 Print Chart 1 2 Output chart datum value 650 Print 66 34 55 83 55 meters above IGLD mille neuf cent 655 Print Switch back to English 660 Return 1000 Speak Hello press 1 for English poussez 2 pour Francai
15. 4 al A Ww o Y Op BS OD NE al AJW al Anal Analog 6 Analog 7 O Anal 8 Pressure _ _ Encoder 1 Encoder 2 _ Counter _ _ Counter 1 1 Counter 2 _ _ Counter 3 _ _ Counter 4 _ __ Frequency _ Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Frequency 3 Frequency 4 Wind Speed 1 Wind Speed 2 Wind Speed 3 Wind Speed 4 Wind Direction 1 Wind Direction 2 Wind Direction 3 4 D 5 Excitation Ground Reference Amplifier lt Optional Goesclock _ _ _ pout 1 8 8200 82004 8210 ot for foi 02 oz joz_ 2 21 22 N 00 N 26 03 o4 05 er C pos 09s 10 11 12 A ia p15 iG eee ner pS POs 1 2 A 22 23 24 25 Bo BI 32 B3 34 35 CA NAAA AA AS FOO 1901 109 100 SOD ap S O NM F O Ww c 4 ls 00 59 SS OSOS SANS wlw 097 109 991 199 991199 109 199 N N N NININININININ R RyRy FR ye o ojojo AILAI wINI e IOoOlLe o IA OIia IN RO O 00 N das MN AIO dis DINERO N Opus w N MODEM SETUP Dial In eee Se T lt 9 ad 9 29 add 1 to these numbers for GOES units GOES units have the GOES Clock sensor number 43 for the 8200 47 for the 8200A Menu Tree Reference 4 49 MODEM SETUP Dial Out enable The speech menu
16. 5 volt excitations but before making an analog measurement This time gives the analog section a chance to stabilize as well as allowing the sensor some warm up time The value should not be set to less than 2 20ms because of settling times EEROM SETUP AutoKey AutoKey K Auto Startup Keys The Auto Startup Keys are a string of keys that are automatically executed when the front panel is turned on similar to Autoexec bat files in the DOS environment This makes it possible for the 8200 to automatically go to a particular menu item when the front panel is turned on The startup keys can instruct the 8200 to pause at a specific menu item and even turn the display off thus making the 8200 tamper resistant When using the front panel press the l to enter the set mode then press the 4 arrow key to move into the alpha field Any of the below letter options may then be set The keys are defined as follows U Up arrow moves the display up one level Down arrow moves the display down one level Right arrow moves the display right one level Left arrow moves the display left one level Set key changes options and edits fields 1 second pause pauses the display window for one second Off once enabled the O can only be removed with a test set omary Example Setting the AutoKey string to DDDDDDR would automatically position the 8200 display at power up on the LIVE READINGS menu item Menu Tree Reference 4 15 EERO
17. Battery jumper on the RAM backup battery is in the OFF position RAM Card battery low Check battery The external power connection on the terminal block is fused If the fuse blows then the battery will not recharge Check the fuse Check the power consumption of the 8200 and sensors To change the display brightness press the set key when the display is at the top of the MAIN menu Sutron 8210 xxvv PROBLEM Averages are not computed Pressure transducer gives incorrect or no readings SDI 12 Sensors do not operate 8200 will not communicate with another Sutron device RAM Card missing last day of data System runs for a short time and then resets Live readings OK but nos in log clipped off at multiples of 32767 e g 3 2767 or 32 767 Troubleshooting Guide PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTION Make sure you have not turned on both Measure and Average for the sensor Because of the way the 8200 handles scheduling Measure has precedence over averaging when data are Logged Measure and Average are mutually exclusive If you are using the WindSpeed and WindDir sensors make sure that inputs are wired correctly and that SLOPE and OFFSET are correct for both the speed and direction sensors Make sure jumper J8 is in the correct position 8200A SDI 12 device set to wrong address Use commands to query address or set to new address Incorrect wiring or wiring short Check wiring Fuse blown 8200A Chec
18. Ground 12VDC and D Data On the 8200A the SDI connects to the DB9 connector The pinouts are 1 Data 7 Ground 9 12v The 8210 protects the 12V line with a thermal self resetting fuse For the 8200A we recommend you put a fuse in the line of the 12V to keep you from blowing the internal fuse if there is a short in the 12V line Y ou do need to be careful how you schedule the SDI sensors to be read Many SDI sensors take a second or two to read however there are SDI sensors can take up to 180 seconds to read Keep in mind the performance of the sensor you are connecting to make sure you do not set the 8200 to measure 1t more frequently than it can If you do select a schedule that is too fast for the sensor you could end up with data missing in the Log RS232 sensors Choosing RS232 sensors are those that use the RS232 interfaces The sensor connects to the DB9 used for the PC test set external radio and so forth For this reason it is not possible to have the 8200 work with an RS232 sensor at the same time as one of these external devices The EEROM Serial SENSOR sets the port to work with a sensor When set in this mode you will not be able to connect and use a test set The baud rate for the sensor can be set through the EEROM User Rate When the 8200 measures an RS232 sensor it asserts DTR which can be used to wake up the sensor The sensor must then send the data in ASCII as a floating point number followed by a c
19. I 4 AirTemp BaroPress on on on on OTE off on on 00 00 00 00 00 00 64 37 7 61 99 10 3 49 0 0 2 2 dial on above off 50 00 0 00 off off 0 00 0 00 OTE OET 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 off off 200 201 202 205 Understand Alarms and Alerts Understand Alarms and Alerts 15 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 900 1 00 00 00 00 on 24 WindSpeed on OL on on 00 00 00 1 68 0 00 MEASUREMENT SCHEDULE easInt 00 SamplInt 00 easTim 00 SampTim 00 PwrTime 00 Samples Set Measmnt Log BasInt 00 BasTim 00 PwrMode 9 12 SolarRad RainFall on on on on off off on on 00 00 00 00 00 00 2000 00 0 01 0 00 0 00 0 0 2 2 on on off off 0 00 0 00 Off off 0 00 0 00 off OTE 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 off off 206 152 130 124 28 WindDir on off on on 00 00 00 72 00 0 00 0 1 on off 0 00 off 0 00 off 0 00 0 00 off 209 104 The 8200 can be set up to detect alarms on sensor values and also to notify you when it detects the alarm This section describes alarm detection and notification in detail Anyone using alarms should make sure they understand the concepts presented here The user sets alarm conditions by using the High Alarm Low Alarm and ROC Alarm fields and the associated values HiLev LoLev and ROCLev The 8200 tests for alarms each time data is collected from the sensors If you have High Alarm detection on the 8200 will use its high alarm test on the sensor value T
20. INTRODUCTION 12 1 GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES 12 1 DISPLAY WILL NOT LIGHT 12 1 8200 TURNS ON BUT DOES NOT WORK PROPERLY 12 2 SENSOR PROBLEMS 12 2 SETUP PROBLEMS 12 3 LOS RADIO COMMUNICATIONS PROBLEMS 12 3 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 12 5 SDI 12 INTERFACE STANDARD 12 9 GROUNDING 12 9 CONNECTOR TYPE 12 9 COMMUNICATIONS 12 9 SETUP OF SDI SENSORS 12 9 ISSUING SDI COMMANDS 12 9 USEFUL SDI COMMANDS 12 9 POWER CONSUMPTION 12 10 Appendix A Specifications for the 8200 Appendix D GOES transmission format Using This Manual This manual describes the operation and maintenance of the Sutron 8200 family of data recorders transmitters It is designed to be of use to both beginning and experienced users The manual describes the use of all models of the 8200A and 8210 data recorder transmitters running software versions 4 0 and above both with and without telemetry The manual comes with a diskette that contains programs useful in the setup and operation of 8200s Instructions on using the software is provided in Appendix E In this manual 8200 or 8200s refers to both the 8200A and 8210 When necessary to describe the features or differences of a particular model the specific model number 8210 or 8200A is used Because all models are described you should be aware that some information may not apply to your particular 8200 Do not use this manual as a reference for operating 8200s or 8200As running software versions prior to 4 0
21. Live readings can be viewed whether or not Recording is ON However if Recording is OFF the 8200 may not have turned on the switched power needed by a sensor When using a PC the following menu appears when L Live Data is selected LIVE READINGS Choose U p D own L eft R ight ENTER M ore V iew S croll gt Analog4 Pressure The display lists all enabled sensors Analog4 and Pressure in the example and a menu of available commands U p D own and so forth Use the U D L R or the arrow keys to move the cursor gt to point to each sensor you want displayed and press ENTER The display will show a in front of any sensor that will be displayed Once you have selected the sensors press V to view the data The software will prompt for a time delay and then display live readings for the selected sensors Press ESC to end the display The SDI 12 port shares the same serial port as the test set so when the 8200 is reading an SDI 12 sensor it is not paying any attention to the test set You may need to Menu Tree Reference 4 81 VIEW DATA NEWEST READINGS hold down or press repetitively the ESC key to exit live readings when measuring these sensors VIEW DATA NEWEST READINGS 4 82 NEWEST READINGS N Newest Data NEWEST READINGS can be used to take you into the log positioned at the most recent data To do so press the gt right arrow
22. T until the original value is displayed again The Setup Sheet Now that you know how to navigate the menus of the 8200 and enter values you are ready to learn about the actual method behind an 8200 setup Perhaps the best way to familiarize yourself with this step is by using the setup sheet included on the next page The setup sheet has been prepared for you as a way of specifying the intended setup for an 8200 The setup sheet closely matches the 8200 menus making it simple to use the sheet as a reference when entering a setup The sheet provides spaces for the values that may be entered into various fields in the 8200 to configure it for proper operation The setup information is divided into two different setup sheets The first sheet Sensor Setup contains the configuration data and alarm data for all enabled sensors Each column in this sheet contains the setup information for a single sensor Since there are only six columns on this sheet you will need to use additional copies of the sheet if there are more than six sensors in your setup The second sheet defines the values for the Measurement Schedules EEROM settings and optional GOES and MODEM setup information Note that EEROM SETUP and PROTOCOL SETUP have two columns one listing default values and the other a blank for your selection As an example the setup sheet has been filled out for a simple site measuring precipitation and battery This setup measures data from
23. There are twelve chapters in this manual These twelve chapters introduce you to the 8200 and present the basics to get you started using the 8200 Chapters 1 through 3 should be read by anyone planning to use the 8200 Chapter 4 contains a detailed reference of all the 8200 menus and commands You should not try to read this chapter start to finish it is intended as a reference The remaining chapters teach you how to use the 8200 covering topics such as hooking up sensors common setups installation retrieving data and others These chapters have many practical examples of using the 8200 in the field Of particular note is Chapter 7 which contains many examples on how to use the 8200 in particular situations The chapters are presented in the following order Introduction Unpacking and Initialization Getting to know the 8200A and 8210 Menu Tree Reference Quick Setup Hooking up sensors How To Installation 9 Retrieving Your Data 10 Tiny BASIC 11 Maintenance and Service 12 Troubleshooting A a Specifications for the 8200A and 8210 are contained in Appendix A Appendix B contains blank setup sheets Appendix C contains assembly drawings and bills of materials for the different model 8200s Appendix D contains a description ofthe GOES transmission format Appendix E contains information on the programs provided on the diskette that comes with this manual These programs are useful in the setup and operation of 8200s Appe
24. With SYSTEM SETUP in the display window press gt to move to the MEASMNT SCHEDULE sub menu Press gt again to move into the MEASMNT SCHEDULE sub menu The display window will show MeasInt xx xx xx Press the EJ key and use the procedures described under setting the Time and Date to select the desired interval between measurements For this example set the MeasInt to 00 01 00 one minute The fields in MeasInt are hours minutes and seconds MeasInt is the only setting required in the MEASUREMENT SCHEDULE for this simple application After setting the MeasInt you may use 4 and Y to see some of the other times which should all be set to 00 00 00 Step 3 Enabling sensors Menu Path SYSTEM SETUP ENABLE SENSORS Press to return you to display MEASMNT SCHEDULE Press Y to move to the ENABLE SENSORS sub menu Press gt to move into the sub menu The display will read Analog xx where xx is ON or OFF The ENABLE SENSORS sub menu contains a Master Sensor List of all the ways the 8200 inputs can be configured Press Y until Counter is displayed Press J to toggle the Counter ON Continue pressing Y until Battery is displayed Toggle it ON also Step 4 Configuring sensor inputs Menu Path S YSTEM SETUP CONFIG SENSORS Pressing 4 to return to the main menu The display will be at the ENABLE SENSORS item Press Y to move to the CONFIG SENSORS sub menu Press gt to move into the sub menu The display should show Counte
25. and make sure carrier detect drops at site 2 5 Key the transmitter at site 2 verify that carrier is detected at site 1 6 While the transmitter is keyed send some test characters verify that the characters are received at site 1 7 Unkey the transmitter at site 2 and make sure carrier detect drops at site 1 8 Atsite 1 use the M Monitor Communications Send T o command to set a destination for communications using PC or make sure that the PROTOCOL SETUP Master is set to the name of site 2 which you are talking to 9 Try sending a test mail message from site 1 to site 2 you will receive either the message Mail Delivered if an acknowledgment was received or Mail Failed if an acknowledgment was not received Troubleshooting Guide 10 Try the same test at site 2 if possible 11 At site 1 use the BERT menu to get a detailed view of how well communications are working Again be sure to first use the Send T o command M Monitor Communications menu or PROTOCOL SETUP Master front panel to set the destination 12 First use the R Jemote Clear command to clear the BERT statistics at site 2 Then use the S end Bert from site 1 to send a BERT message to site 2 and all stations in radio range 13 Use the G et Status to get the BERT status from station 2 This status represents how well station 2 is receiving station 1 14 At station 1 use the L ocal Clear to clear the BERT statistics Then use A sk for Bert to hav
26. more information This does not affect the baud rate when dumping to a modem or 4 16 EEROM SETUP Enter Reqd when dumping using a test set Normally the Dump Rate and User Rate are set to the same speed EEROM SETUP Enter Reqd Enter Reqd E Enter Key Required This setting affects use of Test Set software only Enter Reqd may be set to ON or OFF When set to ON the Enter key on the keyboard must be depressed in order to select a menu option When OFF a single keystroke of the appropriate letter is all that is needed to select an option It is useful to have Enter Reqd ON when working with the 8200 over a modem to prevent line noise from accidentally choosing a menu option NOTE this does not affect the operation of the enable config alarm measurements sub menus EEROM SETUP Log Dump LogDump D Log Dump Mode Log Dump is used in conjunction with the Dump Data menu see above page 4 3 to control both the format and amount of dumped data Options include ALLBIN DAYBIN ALLASC and DAYASC The ALLBIN option configures the 8200 to dump all data in the log up to the current time The day option requests that only complete full days are to be dumped up to the end of the previous day The BIN option sets the dumping of data to the binary format typically used by Sutron software such as TS8210 The ASC option selects the ASCII data transfer mode which can be used to dump data to the screen or to a serial capture program The ASC op
27. programmed INSPECT SYSTEM Bert LOS Radio front panel only This option allows BERT bit error rate test ing of one of up to three radios installed in an 8210 an LOS radio modem board installed in slot 1 slot 2 or an external radio modem An external radio connected to the RS 232 port must have the EEROM SETUP Serial option set to PROTOCOL or RADIO otherwise you will receive the message No Radio Use Select Radio to choose which radio you would like to test The menu displays 5 different statuses as follows Line 1 L ggggg bbbbb CD Line 2 L ppp eeeeeeee Line 3 R ggggg bbbbb CD Line 4 R ppp eeeeeeee Line 5 mail message ggggg is the good message count bbbbb is the bad message count CD is visible if carrier is detected ppp is the percent good 100 ggggg gggge bbbbb and eeeeeeee is the error distribution decribed later Lines 1 and 2 contain the L ocal status the status of the 8200 Lines 2 and 3 contain the R emote status the status of the base station or 8200 set by the PROTOCOL SETUP Master option Line 5 contains the last mail message received by your 8200 To clear a local or remote status press 4 To request that the remote status be updated press gt To send a BERT message to the remote press 4 To request that a BERT message be sent from the remote to you press Y To view the next status line press FJ When you are done press E The BERT test as implemented in the 8200 sends or rece
28. specific codes sent in the transmission The binary format as mentioned above cannot be easily read by a person A sample binary format message from the same station shown above could be B1 Gt Sx i Gs Sr il batesi Voltage Temp 2 Precip 2 Stage 2 Temp 1 Precip 1 Stage 1 Delta Time Group ID Block ID The Block ID is always a B for a self timed binary format message The group ID informs you that the data comes from group number 1 in the 8200 In this case the transmission has three sensors in the group and two values are being sent for each sensor The battery voltage is added to the transmission automatically Complete information on the transmission formats is given in Appendix D Chapter 10 Tiny BASIC Tiny BASIC is a programming language built into the 8200 You can use it to add special equations and processing to sensor data do different alarm detection and much more Tiny BASIC makes the 8200 flexible to handle custom applications yet easy to use Tiny Basic Introduction Tiny Basic Introduction Up until this point in the user manual you have learned about some of the simpler operating procedures behind The 8200 One of its more powerful yet more complicated functions remains to be covered This chapter will attempt to explain in some detail the BASIC interpreter that has been added to the 8200 The BASIC interpreter executes user written instructions coded in a subset of the BASIC language B
29. the letters Q and Z must not be used as they are not available on the telephone keypad When you dial the 8200 with a telephone modem the 8200 prompts for the User Name and password Enter the Unit Name of the 8200 for the User Name and the Phone Password for the password Menu Tree Reference 4 51 MODEM SETUP Redial When you dial the 8200 to interact with the speech synthesizer the dial in message must Mit be set up to prompt for the password This is done by entering a p into the dial in message See Special Characters on page 4 47 The standard dial in messages do not include the prompt for the password and must be edited This password is separate from the SYSTEM SETUP Password which controls whether which is the password for the setup MODEM SETUP Redial Redial Delay R Redial Delay This field indicates the Time delay between telephone calls NOTE FCC regulations require that if only one telephone number is called the Redial delay must be at least 10 minutes 4 52 PROTOCOL SETUP PROTOCOL SETUP PROTOCOL SETUP P Protocol Setup Options The Protocol Setup defines important information used when the system communicates using its internal or external radios These communications use Sutron Standard Protocol SSP hence the name of the menu One field in this setup Ack Delay also is used by the modem software when it communicates in SSP See the Protocol Setup Menu for complete details s
30. the random transmission will transmit data starting with the most recent data logged If DatInRR is some multiple of the logged data the transmission will skip over some values In this case the DatTmRR specifies which values get transmitted DatInRR works just like DatInST For examples refer to Dat nST Note if Measmnt Log is gt 1 the 8200 transmits the last measured value and then follows it with data based on DatTmRR and DatInRR GOES RADIO SETUP Random Setup Menu DatTmRR DatTmRR 7 Data Time RR When the 8200 is set up skip over some of the logged data in a random transmission the DatTmRR field lets you select the time of the data to send This situation arises when DatInRR does not match the interval at which the data is logged For example if the log has 15 minute data in it and you want to send hourly data DatTmRR lets you select which of the four 15 minute values gets sent In this example DatTmST 00 00 00 would select the data logged at the top of the hour DatTmRR 00 15 00 would select the data logged 15 minutes into the hour and so forth In situations where you want to send data at the same interval that it is logged DatTmRR has no affect and should be left at 00 00 00 DatTmRR works just like DatTmST Refer to the examples for DatTmST for more information Note if Measmnt Log is gt 1 the 8200 transmits the last measured value and then follows it with data based on DatTmRR and DatInRR GOES RADIO SETUP Random
31. tipping bucket shaft encoder measuring water level some temperature sensors some pressure sensors wind speed wind direction Examples of non linear sensors are most thermistors shaft encoder measuring gate opening stage discharge computations Whenever the 8200 takes a sample or measurement it applies the equation value raw_value slope offset With slope 1 and offset 0 the final value is equal to the raw_value To determine the slope and offset for your sensor you will need to know the sensor output for two different points This information is typically available on the sensor s data or calibration sheet These two points are then used to compute the slope and offset The two points are represented as x1 yl and x2 y2 where x is the voltage or raw reading and y is the corresponding value The slope and offset are then computed from these two points as follows slope y2 y1 x2 x1 offset yl x1 slope as long as the x values are in the same units as the raw_value Consider a wind direction sensor The sensor is a potentiometer excited by 5 volts The output at 0 degrees is 0 volts and the output at 360 degrees is 5 volts x1 y1 0 0 and x2 y2 5 360 The slope would be 360 0 5 0 72 and the offset would be 0 0 72 0 Some further examples will help demonstrate the use of these equations Remember that the x values are the raw values volts hz counts etc and that the y values are th
32. 2 Sensor Not Found 3 Line Number Not Found 4 Sensor Not Logged 5 Max MEM Exceeded Number Error x at line Y Battery Count was below 10 5 volts Detect Count not lock on the channel 29 No Tx Goes No Tx Goes Setup Goes Tx skipped due to a setup problem such Setup Count as Group s not set in Alarm setup menu international channel not in the range 1 33 domestic channel not in the range 1 99 101 199 Transmission too close to previous transmission tx rate too small Goes Clock Error Goes Clock Errors of goes clock errors Count SN ES Started Late Tx Started Late Goes Tx allowed which started late a Low Battery Tx Low Battery Goes Tx allowed with low battery battery below 8 5 volts which indicates an A D problem Tx High Battery Tx High Battery Goes Tx allowed with high battery battery above 14 9 which indicates over charging of the battery or an A D problem The VTERM Sensor Another special sensor is called VTERM short for Virtual TERMinal The Sutron Radio Terminal program part of PC Base 2 sets value 0 in VTERM to send data to the virtual terminal and requests value 1 to read back screen displays VTERM allows an 8200 terminal session to be simulated over an SSP reliable link F 6 Data Items TX RR 4 28 Retries 4 54 TX Alarm RR 4 28 1 4 40 2 4 40 3 4 40 Data Items TX 4 21 Data TX RR 4 28 Data TX ST 4 21 Measmnt Log 4 75 Retri
33. 209 104 Setup for Telephone Alarms If you want alarms from a station with a telephone speech modem start with the basic setup for a telephone speech system Then change the Alarm Setup enabled for to DIAL and set a alarm type and limit This defines the sensor s and value s that will trigger the alarm You will also use the Modem Setup Dialout to define what the 8200 does to anounce the alarm Use the phone numbers to set who the 8200 will call The redial field sets how long the 8200 will wait before trying the next number in its list The DialOut defines what the 8200 will speak to anounce the alarm In the example below an alarm of 50 degrees is set on the temperature When the 8200 sees the temperature reach 50 degrees it will dial the phone number 555 1212 and speak This 174 is 127 This DialOut is the one defined by IdLivMen The 8200 will continue to dial the phone number until the alarm is acknowledged 7 8 S Yowes DEM SETUP ialOut nswerMode umber Rings honePass lalIn ialOut 231is 33 honeNumber honeNumber honeNumber edial off VO amp DA 3 DEMO CAO ie ly 7m 174 127 168 0 AS 5551212 00 03 00 ENABLE CONFIG ALARM SENSORS Sensor Name Enable Measure Average Log Intrvl Slope Offset Elevation Right Digits Alarm Setup Enabled for High Alarm High Level Low Alarm Low Level ROC Alarm ROC Level Deadband Trending P efix Suffix
34. A AA AAA EAS Car a E CO EA per A A EA ZE SE PE SS AAA AN pi AAA AE pr Aa EEE a pop gt AAA UAT SYSTEM SETUP ALARM OPTIONS e A ICI PP CCOO E E IS a a A EDO A IS IS II wim O IR IR II a Roca IR IR IS O IS mwa IO IS O IS IS IR fete IN II IS IS E IR Rote IOMA IA IO IS A IR PEO EL FE General Setup SYSTEM SETUPAMeasurement GOES Radio Setup Schedule Tx Mode EEROM SI Serial UserRate RadioRate ComRate DumpRate SDIRate EnterRegd Log Dump ALLBIN Timelimit PowerDelay PressDelay AnalgDelay_ AutoKey TimeFmt DateFmt _ 4 BasicSize PROTOCOL SETUP CarrierDly ReplyDelay jo Time ST ETUP Channel RR RARate gt TX Alarm RR AlmInRR Data TXRR DatTmRR DatImRR_ MODEM Setup PhonePass 60 5 3 ACK Delay Appendix C Assembly Drawings Appendix D GOES Transmission Format supports 3 di Random Binary Sutron 8200 Goes Transmission Format lf Timed Binary The 8200 1 2 Sel 3 Sel This document Lf Timed SHEF fferent transmission formats they are 6 bit binary code 6 bit binary code Standard Decimal Format similar to SHEF first describes the general transmission format followed by details on each of the formats
35. ENABLE to ON for each sensor you want included in a poll for current data If the sensor ENABLE is set to OFF the data will not be reported If you want to have alarm transmissions you must define the type of alarm by setting High Alarm Low Alarm or ROC Alarm to the appropriate value and entering a value in the High Level Low Level or ROC Level 2 Protocol Setup Set the Master ID to the name of the base station as set in the base station software Set TN Rate if you want the 8200 to make transmissions on a periodic basis even when there are no alarms Set TA Rate to define how often transmissions are made when there is an alarm Also set RetryIn and Retries to define how the alarm is repeated Refer to Appendix F for information on how to use some of the advanced features of SSP Satellite Units Self Timed 1 Alarm Setup You should set the Enable for each of the sensors to ON for all the sensors Then set the GROUPS fields to 0100 This will make it so that all sensors will be transmitted in the self timed group 2 GOES Setup Select the FormatST as SHEF for ASCII messages or BINARY for binary messages SHEF format messages are longer but more readable If you have a computer doing the decoding of the GOES messages you should probably stick with the BINARY format Leave Internatl OFF for US domestic satellites Select Carrier ST to short This will cut the transmission time by 4 seconds Specify the satellite id and Channel ST a
36. GOES ONLY Alarms are enabled for this sensor and the 8200 will automatically include the sensor s readings in a random transmission from its group If this sensor is the group alarm trigger alarm transmissions will be scheduled when this sensor changes alarm state depending on the High Low and ROC Alarms RAD LOS RADIO ONLY Alarms are enabled for this sensor and the 8200 will make transmissions using the internal radio module A amp B Combinations are possible For instance GOES SMDM would cause alerts caused by this sensor to be sent to both the GOES and the Speech modem modules 3 WAY Alarm transmissions are made to both internal cards and the radio connected to the RS232 port Note If Enable is OFF the remaining options will not be saved Be sure to set Enable to a value other than OFF in order to preserve the prefix suffix groups etc SYSTEM SETUPIALARM OPTIONS Groups 4 60 Groups GOES Models Groups is a 4 position field XXXX used to designate what reporting groups a sensor belongs to Place a one 1 in the second position of this field if the sensor is to be included in self timed reports ex 0100 the other positions are used for random reporting groups Groups determine what sensor readings are sent together in messages The 8200 supports up to 9 reporting groups Group 1 is the self timed group Groups 2 through 9 are random reporting groups and 0 means blank or not used Membership in a group is d
37. HG Counter PC Analogl TA SIX BIT BINARY ENCODED FORMAT The six bit binary format is used to encode numbers into displayable ASCII characters Notice that fractional numbers cannot be represented so for instance a battery voltage of 13 04 volts setup with 2 right digits will be sent as 1304 A 1 byte encoded number can range from 32 to 31 A 2 byte encoded number can range from 2048 to 2047 A 3 byte encoded number can range from 131072 to 131071 Binary encoded numbers are always sent most significant bytes first The number itself is broken down into 6 bit digits and each digit is placed in one byte of data The number 64 ASCII is added to each digit to make it fall within the range of displayable ASCII characters The only exception is that 127 ASCII lt DEL gt is sent as 63 ASCII Example 1 Encoding the number 10 in 1 byte Since 10 will fit in 6 bits we only have to add 64 which would yield 74 So the number 10 would appear as ASCII 74 or the letter J T Example 2 Encoding the number 12345 in 3 bytes First we have to convert 12345 into binary in 6 bit pieces 12345 base 10 11 000000 111001 base 2 Now we can convert each piece back to base 10 11 000000 111001 base 2 3 0 57 Finally we add 64 to each piece and convert to ASCII 67 64 121 ASCII Cy Example 3 Encoding the number 12345 in 3 bytes First we have to convert 12345 into two
38. IS IS IS IS IR ECON IN II IO IS O IR Rote ION IA IO IS E IR PEO EU FE Getting To Know The 8200 3 15 The Setup Sheet General Setup SYSTEM SETUPAMeasurement GOES Radio Setup Schedule Sampit Tx Mode DatImsT Random Setup Menu Channel RR RN Rate o RARate J o TX AlamRR EEROM SETUP TimeLimit PowerDelay O MODEM Setup PressDelay EN AlmInRR Data TXRR DatImRR_ AnalgDelay J5 AutoKey Number Rings PhonePass PROTOCOL SETUP ReplyDelay Use RS 485 3 16 Exercise Exercise Now enter the information from the sample sheet into the 8200 The main steps you should follow to set up the 8200 are e Enter Measurement Schedule e Enable Sensors e Configure Sensors You may use either the front panel or test set Try it yourself If you need help refer to the guide that follows Steps using Front Panel Step 1 Moving to SYSTEM SETUP Menu Path SYSTEM SETUP If you have not already done so turn on the 8200 display by pressing E Sutron 8210 xxvv should be displayed If the unit is already on and something other than Sutron 8210 xxvv is displayed press 4 until the message is displayed This is the top of the menu tree To move to the SYSTEM SETUP item in the main menu use Y Use 4 if you go too far Step 2 Setting the measurement schedule Menu Path SYSTEM SETUP MEASUREMENT SCHEDULE
39. If you wanted to transmit 4 hours of redundant data current 4 hours plus previous 4 hours then Data TX ST would be 32 Because Data TX ST applies to each sensor 16 or 32 is correct no matter how many sensors are selected to be in the transmission Some care must be taken in assigning Data TX ST so that messages do not become too long A normal GOES transmission window is only 1 minute wide The data transmission rate is 100 bits second Practically speaking only 40 to 45 seconds of the window may be used because of drift in the transmitter clocks and the fixed header required on each message Thus only 4000 to 4500 bits may be sent each reporting Menu Tree Reference 4 21 GOES RADIO SETUPW Data TX ST 4 22 interval The more conventional method for measuring message length is 8 bit bytes leaving 500 to 560 bytes for each reporting interval The number of bytes in a message is determined by several things The selected message format SHEF or BINARY The interval between self timed transmissions Data TX ST The number of designated parameters Estimating the number of bytes in a BINARY format message Each designated parameter value each number transmitted requires 3 bytes Estimate the required number of bytes by multiplying the number of designated parameters by Data TX ST For example if you have a designated water level air temperature and battery voltage for a transmission and b you have set SDatInt t
40. J key to execute the data dump If there are no problems you will receive a message of the form Complete xxx K where xxx is the number of K bytes transferred If the RAM Card is too small to contain the data you will be prompted to insert an additional RAM Card If you receive an error message refer to page 4 The Complete xxx K message will remain in the display until the 8200 times out or you press an arrow key Retreiving Your Data 9 3 RAM Cards Hooking up the RAM Card Reader Many portable and laptop computers have a built in PCMCIA card slot This slot can be used to read the PCMCIA cards used with the 8210 For PCs without a PCMCIA card slot Sutron can provide a separate card reader The Sutron RAM Card Reader connects to a serial port on a PC It allows rapid transfer of data from the RAM Card to files on the PC Refer to the RAM Card Reader manual for instructions on connecting and operating the reader Sutron can also provide a RAM Card Reader for non PCMCIA cards used with the 8200A See page 9 Error Bookmark not defined for detailed information Using the RAMCARD program for 8210 PCMCIA cards The RAMCARD program is used to read data from an 8210 PCMCIA card into a PC You should have received the RAMCARD program on a diskette with other utilities along with this manual RAMCARD can be executed directly from the diskette or you may load it on a hard disk Following is the screen that is presented when you request RAMCAR
41. Modem Setup Answer Mode is set to BASIC The following is a sample program written by Sutron for a customer with a requirement for bilingual speech capability The program computes min and max stage for the past 24 hour period and will speak the current value to the user in either English or in French depending on a DTMF key the user pressed The program speaks individual phrases from the Speech vocabulary by printing the phrase numbers just like they would appear in a dial in or dial out message The phrase numbers used in this program are specific to the bilingual application the customer had a custom vocabulary created for this application If you try to enter the program yourself you will have to substitute other phrases from the Speech section of the manual because these phrases do not exist in the standard vocabulary see 7 51 through 7 54 for more information Custom Phone Handling Also be sure to take a close look at lines 100 through 210 which contains a good example of how a Basic program can go back in the log and compute min max and average data over the past n hours The custom phone handling is controlled by program lines 60000 to 60004 These lines are jumped to by the operating system when someone dials in or when the 8200 needs to dial out How the operating system responds when the program stops is determined by the variable Z Also please note that either MODEM or VOICE will be opened already when the vectors are execu
42. READINGS 3 19 VIEWING LOGGED DATA MENU PATH VIEW DATA NEWEST READINGS 3 20 SETUPS 3 20 CHAPTER 4 4 1 MENU TREE REFERENCE 4 1 8200 MENU REFERENCE 4 1 ALARM 4 2 APPLICATION MENU PC ONLY 4 2 DATE 4 2 DUMP DATA 4 3 EEROM SETUP 4 3 EXIT PC ONLY 4 3 GOES SETUP GOES MODELS ONLY 4 3 INSPECT SYSTEM 4 4 MODEM SETUP SPEECH MODEM MODELS ONLY 4 4 PROTOCOL SETUP 4 4 RECORDING 4 5 SYSTEM SETUP 4 6 TIME 4 6 UNITID 4 6 VIEW DATA 4 7 DUMP DATA 4 8 DUMP DATA AUTO DUMP 4 8 DUMP DATA ERASE RAM CARD 4 8 DATA RAM CARD 4 9 DUMP DATA READ CARD SETUP 4 9 DUMP DATA SERIAL PORT 4 10 DUMP DATA START 4 11 DUMP DATA WRITE CARD SETUP 4 11 UPLOAD DOWNLOAD DATA PROTOCOL PC ONLY 4 11 UPLOAD DOWNLOAD DATA TRANSFER BASIC PROGRAM PC ONLY UPLOAD DOWNLOAD DATA TRANSFER RAW RAM CARD IMAGE PC ONLY UPLOAD DOWNLOAD DATA TRANSFER SETUP PC ONLY UPLOAD DOWNLOAD DATA VIEW RAM CARD DIRECTORY PC ONLY UPLOAD DOWNLOAD DATA YMODEM RAM CARD FILE S PC ONLY EEROM SETUP EEROM SETUP ANALGDELAY EEROM SETUP AUTOKEY EEROM SETUP BASICSIZE EEROM SETUP1COM RATE EEROM SETUP DATEFMT EEROM SETUP DUMP RATE EEROM SETUP ENTER REQD EEROM SETUP LOG DUMP EEROM SETUP POWERDELAY EEROM SETUP PRESSDELAY EEROM SETUP RADIO RATE EEROM SETUP SDI RATE EEROM SETUP SERIAL EEROM SETUP TIMEFMT EEROM SETUP TIMELIMIT EEROM SETUP USER RATE GOES SETUP GOES MODELS ONLY GOES RADIO SETUP DATA TX ST GOES RADIO SETUP CARRIER ST GOES RADIO SETUP CHANNEL ST GOES RADIO SE
43. Returns the offset of a sensor Tiny BASIC 10 23 24 Function Syntax PEEK Addr READLOG Time Sensor ex print battery readings from the start of the day 10 S Time Time Mod 86400 20 For T S To Time 30 N ReadLog T Battery 40 If Err Then Error Stop 50 If Null Then null Goto 70 60 Print N 70 Next T SDIUndex SGN Num SIN Vum SLOPE sensor SQR Vum STATUS STD SensorName SUM SensorName SYSTAT ch Returns the byte stored at a memory address Returns a Sensor reading from the specified Time in the log ERR is set to True 1 if the operation fails NULL is set to True 1 if the data was null Error conditions include the log being empty the Time parameter being outside the range of log or if Sensor is not in the log Fetches a character from the last sdi result the end of the string is marked by a 0 byte The first valid Index is 0 Returns the slope of a sensor The standard deviation from the last time SensorName was averaged In addition STD WindSpeed returns the scalar standard deviation of speed STD WindDir returns the vector standard deviation of direction The sum of all of the samples taken the last time SensorName was averaged In addition SUM WindSpeed returns the scalar average of speed SUM WindDir returns the unit vector average of direction Returns system information based on ch C returns the rom checksum E returns a bitm
44. SETUP sub menu SETUP selection and save the current setup with Recording ON This makes it possible for the system to automatically turn Recording ON at power up As a safety measure if recording is OFF and you turn the display OFF the system will flash you the warning message Recording is Off to remind you that you are leaving the 8200 in a non operational mode Satellite radio equipped units will also show the status ON amp FT or OFF amp FT if the failsafe of the transmitter has been tripped Pressing SET will normally clear the failsafe condition OFF amp FT gt OFF and pushing SET again will begin recording OFF gt ON amp TX When Recording is toggled ON the 8200 checks for errors in the part of the setup that works with the recording If the 8200 finds an error a message is displayed and the Recording is left OFF Possible error messages are Error Message Corrective Action Bad MeasInt Measurement Interval too Short must be greater than 0 Bad Measmnt Log Measurements Log too Small must be greater than 0 Too Much Data Storage Space Exceeded The log must be big enough to contain one full days worth of data at the current recording rate Menu Tree Reference 4 5 MAIN MENU SYSTEM SETUP No Log RAM Log RAM not installed or failed SYSTEM SETUP Time UnitID 4 6 SYSTEM SETUP S System Setup The System Setup menu provides a way to perform most of the essential functions needed to set up an 8200 Th
45. SSP session Date D Set Date The Date and Time settings are used as references for making measurements and logging data The system has an internal clock chip which maintains the date and Time A jumper automatically controls whether or not a small internal battery will power the clock chip if and when main power is removed Since the date is used as a reference for the data written to the log the system adjusts the log whenever the date changes Normally this happens automatically whenever the day changes However if you change the date the system will detect the day change the next Time data is written to the log and will adjust it accordingly If the change is small the adjustment is rapid Only that data which falls within the size of the log will be retained For example if you adjust the date one month forward from 3 30 to 4 30 and the log had data for 1 1 to 3 30 you will still have the data for the Time period 2 1 to 3 30 with a blank area from 3 31 to 4 30 The 1 1 to 1 31 data would have been discarded If you adjust the date outside the size of the current log all data will be discarded MAIN MENUIDUMP DATA If you adjust the date by several years the system will take more time to make the adjustment and will lock you out of the log until the adjustment has been made See chapter 3 for examples in setting the date DUMP DATA DUMP DATA U Upload Download Data DUMP DATA contains a sub menu with a selection of comma
46. Setup I Init Setup Init Setup clears the setup in RAM to a default state It is commonly used to clear out an old setup all at once rather than changing each item one at a Time When using the PC the 8200 will prompt Are you sure when this function is selected Press Y to proceed with the function or any other key to abort Note nit Setup does not affect the EEROM setup values SYSTEM SETUP Zero Counters Zero Counters Z Zero Counters Zero counters will initialize Encoder1 Encoder2 Counter Counterl Counter2 Counter3 and Counter4 to zero This should be used before calibrating these sensors Menu Tree Reference 4 79 VIEW DATA VIEW DATA VIEW DATA V View Sensor Data VIEW DATA is a sub menu with four fields LIVE READINGS NEWEST READINGS OLDEST READINGS and Alarm Status These fields provide a way to view both current and logged sensor data The menu appears as View Sensor Data Menu L Live Data N Newest Data O Oldest Data A Alarm Status Choose VIEW DATA ALARM STATUS Alarm Status A Alarm Status When using a PC a display will be generated listing all the sensors with ALARM not OFF the current reading the trend and alarm status as shown in the example below When using the front panel the information will be scrolled across the screen SENSOR READING TREND ALARMS AirTemp 44 226 FALLING LOW BaroPress 15 605 STEADY SolarRad 3 462 RISING HIGH RainFall 4 940 WindSpeed 5 86
47. Setup for GOES transmissions The setup for a GOES station requires entries in the GOES setup and Alarm setup in addition to the normal setup for the station The following example shows the setup for a GOES station that will transmit in the self timed mode every 4 hours Each transmission will send 16 values Data TX ST 16 Encoderl is included in the transmission because Group Num is set to x1 xx the second value is 1 If the second value in Group Num were not set to 1 the data would not be transmitted in the self timed message How To 7 5 Setup for GOES Random Transmissions GOES SETUP MEASUREMENT SCHEDULE TX Mode TIMED MeasInt 00 15 00 Sat ID 00000000 SamplInt 00 00 00 Internatl OFF MeasTim 00 00 00 Format ST BINARY SampTim 00 00 00 Carrier ST LONG PwrTim 00 00 00 Channel ST TST Samples Set 10 Time ST 00 00 00 Measmnt Log 1 Rate ST 04 00 00 BasInt 00 00 00 Data TX ST 16 BasTim 00 00 00 DatTmST 00 00 00 PwrMode off DatInsT 00 15 00 ENABLE CONFIG ALARM SENSORS Sensor XX XX Name Encoderl Counter Enable on on Measure on on Average off off Log on on Intrvl 00 00 00 00 00 00 Slope 0 01 1 00 Offset 0 00 0 00 Elevation 0 0 Right Digits 2 2 Alarm Setup Enabled for goes goes High Alarm off off High Level 0 00 0 00 Low Alarm OEE off Low Level 0 00 0 00 ROC Alarm off off ROC Level 0 00 0 00 Deadband 0 00 0 00 Group Num 0100 0100 Setup for GOES Random Transm
48. Speech Menu LivMen Speak live data followed by the Speech Menu IdArc Speak the station ID followed by archived data IdLiv Speak the station ID followed by live data IdArcMen Speak the station ID archived data and speech menu IdLivMen Speak the station ID live data and speech menu Those Standard Messages that include the menu will allow you to press keys on a touch tone phone to interact with the 8200 Menu Tree Reference 4 41 MODEM SETUP Dial In 4 42 Note The standard dial in messages do not include the prompt for the password and must be edited if password protection to the 8200 is wanted Remember you will need to set SYSTEM SETUP ALARM OPTIONS Enable to ON or other non off state for each sensor you want the 8200 to speak IF this Enable is OFF the 8200 will omit the sensor when speaking Live data or Archived data Build Your Own Message Numbers To speak a number that is actual numbers such as 1 2 3 simply typing the desired number into the string All individual numbers must have white space such as a space character between them Example To instruct the 8200 to speak five four three two one enter the following dial in or dial out message noting the spaces 54321 Words and phrases Words and phrases are entered in a message string by typing the symbol followed by the word phrase number see 7 52 7 53 Alternatively the symbol may be used in place of No white space is allowed
49. Z 10 Z12 5 Z 2 OFF RUNLINE has no effect 1020 Stop 65100 RunLine Analog1 1000 Stop 10 20 Tiny Basic Command Set Command Syntax SETTIMEOUT Seconds Sets a timeout on the current device in seconds or disables timeouts if Second is 0 Resolution is to the ex allow the user 10 sec to hit a key tenths of seconds so a timeout value of 0 5 would SetTimeout 10 timeout in one half a second When a device times out it A Input will always return the ESCAPE character and the If A 33 Then Timeout Stop TIMEOUT function will become true 2 You pressed A SLEEP Seconds Pauses the program for the specified number of seconds Resolution is to the tenths of seconds ex pause for 1 5 seconds 10 Start Sleep 1 5 Stop SDI sdicommandstring Sends a command string to the SDI 12 port The response can be read using the SDI function ex send interrogate print result 10 SDI 0I Interrogate sensor 0 20 I 0 30 If SDI i 0 Then Stop 40 Print SDI i i i 1 Goto 30 STOP Stops execution of a program WAITFOR pattern Waits for a pattern to be detected from the input of the current device or a timeout to expire see SETTIMEOUT function Valid patterns are simple strings case sensitive with pattern matching options The character is used to embed a control character in a pattern ex WAITFOR JHello would wait for a line feed and then the word Hello The character is used to match any
50. a telephone speech unit make it a number so that the ID will be recognizable when it is spoken The 8200 will also use the ID when communicating using Sutron Standard Protocol The Setup Sheet has space for also recording the location and the name of the person who filled out the setup sheet These last two values are for informational purposes only and are not entered into the 8200 2 8200 Sensor Type Use table 2 provided on page 6 6 and decide what sensor names you will be using Make sure you do not pick two sensor names that use the same connection unless you want the same value measured twice Enable must be ON for any of the sensors you will use If you want to rename the sensor write the new name in the appropriate column 3 Sensor Configuration Decide whether the sensor is to be measured or averaged If Measure is ON a single value will be collected If Average is ON more than one value is collected and then the average is computed Set Log ON if you want the 8200 to make room in the LOG for the value Intrvl will be set to 00 00 00 for most common sensors instructing the 8200 to LOG the data at the end of each measurement cycle If you set Intrvl to a different value make sure you understand what you are doing Intrvl 99 00 00 disables automatic logging and leaves it to TINY BASIC If you leave the slope at 1 0 the 8200 will report the measurement in its basic units of volts hertz or counts If you set the Slope to 0 0 as th
51. and to select appropriate numbers to set the channel Press l again when you have completed the number GOES RADIO SETUP DatinST DatinST 6 Data interval The DatInST field determines the time interval between values selected from the log for a self timed transmission The purpose of this field is to allow users to precisely control which data from the log are transmitted When DatInST is set equal to the interval that the data is logged the self timed transmission will transmit data starting with the most recent data logged and continue with each previous value If DatinST is some multiple of the logged data interval the transmission will skip over some values In this case the DatTmST specifies which values get transmitted Example The following example shows what data is transmitted at 11 18 for a station with MeasInt 00 15 00 Measmnt Log 1 Data TS ST 3 DatInSt 00 15 00 15 minute data DatTmST 00 00 00 don t need DatTmST because DatTmST Meas Int The data remains the same for any transmission made between 11 15 and 11 29 Note that the first value is the one the transmitter running at 11 18 finds when searching the log backwards Menu Tree Reference 4 23 GOES RADIO SETUP DatTmST 10 00 10 7 10 15 10 8 10 30 10 9 10 45 11 0 third value in message 11 00 11 1 second value in message 11 15 11 2 first value in message Example The following example shows what data is transmitted at 11 18 for a station with MeasInt 0
52. available for just a few dollars from most any computer electronics store 9 Pin INTERFACE CABLE PC AT 8200 9 Pin Female 9 Pin Male Pin 2 Rxd Pin 2 Txd Pin 3 Txd Pin 3 Rxd Pin 5 Gnd Pin 5 Gnd Pin 4 Dtr Pin 4 Dsr Cts Pin 6 Dsr Pin 6 Dtr Rts Pin 8 Cts Pin 8 Dtr Rts 9 Pin Interface Cable For IBM AT Type Computers 25 Pin INTERFACE CABLE PC 8200 25 Pin Female 9 Pin Male Pin 3 Rxd Pin 2 Txd Pin 2 Txd Pin 3 Rxd Pin 7 Gnd Pin 5 Gnd Pin 20 Dtr Pin 4 Dsr Cts Pin 6 Dsr Pin 6 Dtr Rts Pin 5 Cts Pin 8 Dtr Rts How To Chapter 8 Installation This chapter describes the factors that must be considered in order to properly install the 8200 The topics covered include environmental protection power budget cabling lightning protection bench testing and field testing Use this chapter as a guide as you prepare for your own stations Environment Enclosure Environment Enclosure The 8200A and 8210 is designed to withstand temperature extremes but should be protected against direct exposure to rain and dust If you plan to install the 8210 outside order it in the modular mount configuration 8210 0014 2 This configuration fits nicely into NEMA 4 or IP65 type enclosures available from Sutron and others If the 8200A is installed outside it should be placed in an environmentally sealed Nema 4 type enclosure providing adequate protection from the elements If the 8200 is installed inside another structure such as a gage ho
53. averages or sums of sensor readings Such programs need a way to initialize and clear out the variables used by the program Other programs may use a lookup table which may need to be filled in the first time the program is run Since the program is always run from the start your program needs a special way to detect a first time program run so that variables can be initialized Detecting the first execution of a program is easy with Tiny Basic because all variables are set to zero when recording is turned on Your program should do something like the following 10 If Q 0 Then Gosub 1000 Q 1 Branch off to initialization code 20 Place your main code here 999 Stop 1000 Place your initialization code here 1100 Return In addition line 65100 is branched to when recording is turned on and before the program is run for the first time and line 65101 is branched to when recording is turned off Termination code must be short or the operating system will automatically abort the operation 10 normal part of the program 1000 Place your initialization code here 1100 stop 65100 goto 1000 Watching the time to measure log Often you will want your Basic program to perform an action only during certain times of the day You can control when your program performs an action by monitoring the Time function The time function returns the number of seconds since 1 1 85 which by itself is not very useful however if you can compute much more m
54. between the or and the word phrase number Ifa number is to follow the word phrase white space is required between the word phrase number and the actual number No white space is required between phrases Example To program the 8200 to speak the phrase Welcome to the Sutron 8200 enter the following dial in or dial out message 182 2 173 170 82 929 Note that the and symbols are interchangeable in the above example Also 8200 is pronounced Eighty two hundred thus the 29 MODEM SETUP Dial In NUMERIC LIST OF 8200 SPEECH PHRASES ONANNANBWWWN O 1 2 second of silence Zero one two to too three four for five six seven eight nine ten eleven twelve thirteen fourteen fifteen sixteen seventeen eighteen nineteen twenty thirty forty fifty sixty seventy eighty ninety hundred thousand point minus Please press pound Please enter password For live data For archive data To acknowledge alarms To enable alarms To disable alarms To enable data modem To list sensor names and numbers sensors in alarm To hang up Please press 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 Please call again is not available Hello Welcome to the Sutron 8200 Thank you please pound press star o clock account a ack
55. break the seal if the front panel appears stuck Caution remove the electronics slowly Do not allow parts to bump against the opening of the enclosure If there is an internal battery in the 8200A the electronics will be heavy and powered up 4 Set the front panel electronics on the table with the front panel in a vertical position The electronics will tip over easily if it is placed on end To re assemble the 8200A follow these steps 1 Place the enclosure on a table top with the opening up and feet towards you 2 Hold the front panel by the handles and lower into the enclosure Make sure the panel is in its proper orientation Do not allow electronic parts to hit the opening of the enclosure when inserting the electronics 3 When the electronics tray reaches the bottom of the enclosure it will need to line up with three guide support pins If the front panel does not sit flush on the enclosure it will be because the tray is hitting one of these guide pins Hold the front panel by the handles to lift it off the guide pins and move it slightly before lowering it again Several tries are needed to get the pins to engage properly 4 Insert and tighten the four bolts to hold the front panel in place Make sure you use washers under the head of the bolt The washer will often remain on the front panel Do not over tighten the bolts 5 Reconnect the sensor and power cabling Maintenance and Service 11 3 Fuses Fuses
56. circuitry The fail safe circuitry is designed to prevent transmitters from jamming a channel The fail safe limits both the length of transmissions and the time between consecutive transmissions The fail safe circuit is reset from either the front panel PC or by a push button on the GOES transmitter card To reset the failsafe from the front panel or PC you must go to the Main Menu Recording field If this field includes FT the fail safe is tripped To reset the fail safe press SET front panel or R PC several times until the FT is deleted Normally this happens when the status is OFF amp FT and the status becomes OFF You do not need to use the hardware reset if you have already reset the fail safe from the front panel or PC However if you want to use the hardware reset button it is located on the GOES card next to the large crystal oscillator On the 8200A this push button can be accessed through a plug on the side of the 8200 The fail safe button is immediately behind the type N connector on the front panel used for connecting the GOES antenna lead Push the button momentarily to reset the circuit NOTE Main battery power must be applied before resetting the fail safe or the operation will have no effect Radio Module Jumpers Refer to the separate manual on the 8200 LOS Radio module for jumper settings Maintenance and Service 11 9 Telephone Module Jumpers Telephone Module Jumpers 11 10 Modem standard Bell or CCI
57. data from the station when it is installed Then when the base station is setup an error is encountered which requires going to the station to change the setup Running tests on the bench help to insure that the data from the field stations is handled properly If your setup uses alarms you will want to adjust the sensors to measure at alarm levels Note how the 8200 handles the alarms to make sure that it is working the way you want Test Before you Leave Chapter 5 gives the basic steps to setting up an 8200 Naturally after entering the setup and activating the station you will want to check the station out before you leave These checks should include at a minimum 1 View data from each sensor and make sure the values displayed are correct If not there may be an incorrect number entered in the Config Sensors submenu or there may not be a good connection to that sensor 2 View logged data for each sensor and make sure the values are correct 3 Use a DVM to insure the charging voltage is present 4 Go to the Inspect System menu and then to the Display Status submenu Perform a Display Status and verify there are no error messages tripped failsafe or any other message which would lead you to believe that something may be wrong with the 8200 Also observe the messages which provide the Transmission Random and Self Timed schedules and make sure the next Tx times are going to occur when you believe they should Note the num
58. down arrow until COUNTER is displayed Press Y to view the BATTERY voltage Use 4 and Y to display the desired values To exit the display press 4 To view data from the test set press V to select View Data followed by L for live readings Then select sensors from the list by moving the cursor to the desired sensors and pressing ENTER Selected sensors will show the Note the menu at the top of the screen describes the keys the 8200 recognizes while in this menu Press V to activate the viewing of data Press ENTER to select the default update interval of 1 second To exit the display press ESC To watch the live display of the COUNTER change connect one wire to CNT G and the other to CNT 1 and touch the ends of the two wires together The value for counter will go up each time the wires are touched together Note that the value may jump up by increments greater than one This is because the debounce circuitry is designed for magnetic reed switches or mercury switches Brushing wires together creates a very noisy signal which the circuitry cannot handle properly Getting To Know The 8200 3 19 Setups Viewing Logged Data Menu Path VIEW DATA NEWEST READINGS Setups 3 20 The NEWEST READINGS and OLDEST READINGS Sub menus of VIEW SENSOR DATA are used to view logged data Selecting either of these will let you view data in the log As implied in the selection NEWEST READINGS will start the display with the most re
59. function turns on all switched voltages to make it easier to measure and calibrate them The test is activated by pressing ts at the Production Test setting Voltages will be turned on for 60 seconds during the course of the test The message Begin Test will indicate test performance INSPECT SYSTEM Select Radio front panel only Selects the radio to be used by the Test LOS Radio or Bert LOS Radio options 1 First LOS radio modem board installed in slot 1 2 Second LOS radio modem installed in slot 2 or connected to the COM port 3 External radio modem board connected to RS 232 port INSPECT SYSTEMIT Talk to Modem or Terminal PC only This option allows a user on the test set to talk to a user on the internal telephone modem or visa versa If another user is not logged in you will receive the message Nobody else logged in Otherwise you will receive the message TALK MODE Press ESC To Exit You may then enter any keys you wish and they will be sent to the other user and appear on their screen In order for the other user to respond they must also choose the Talk to Modem or Terminal option also you will not see any keys they press until that time INSPECT SYSTEM Test LOS Radio front panel only This option allows testing of one of up to three radios installed in an 8210 an LOS radio modem board installed in slot 1 slot 2 or an external radio modem An external radio connected to the RS 232 port must have the E
60. hardware sensors and setup as far as possible before trying to install the station A good bench test will connect the actual sensors using the actual cables Create and follow a wiring diagram for the connection of the sensors Fill out and use the 8200 setup sheet As stated in Section 5 the setup sheet is the tool used to specify the details of the 8200 setup The best place to create the setup sheet is on the bench with as many of the sensors connected to the 8200 as possible Most of the commonly used sensors have been interfaced to the 8200 and typical setups for them are located in the How To section in this manual If not contact Sutron for an Application note that Sutron may have written for the sensor If by chance you have picked a sensor which we have yet to interface with our Applications Dept will do their best to assist in the interfacing We do ask if this is necessary to send us one of the sensors you are trying to use so we may connect it to the 8200 in our lab and develope the appropriate application note Test Before you Leave You will want to activate the station so it makes its measurements logs data and even transmits Vary the sensor inputs to make sure that the conversion to engineering units and other processing is correct If the station is part of a network of stations set the base station up to handle the data A common error is that the base station software is not configured properly to receive and process
61. in order for the 8200 to transmit Also check to make sure you have entered TX Rate Check the battery connection Make sure it is made to the external battery input and not the solar panel input Check the battery voltage during a transmission The voltage should not drop more than 0 5 volts during the transmission Make sure the voltage is greater than 10 5 and less than 14 9 volts The 8200 will not make a transmission if the voltage is outside these limits Make sure fail safe has not tripped use System Status display status to check or look at recording status To reset the failsafe using the front panel go to Recording Status and press SET until FT goes away To reset the failsafe using a PC go to Recording Status and press R until FT goes away You can also reset the failsafe using the hardware reset button located on the GOES transmitter This can be accessed by removing the plug in the bottom of the 8200A 8200A or opening the front panel to expose the satellite transmission module 8210 SDI 12 Interface Standard SDI 12 Interface Standard SDI 12 is recent standard for interfacing to smart serial sensors SDI allows you to connect up to 10 sensors with as many as many as 9 parameters each The interface is implemented using three wires Data Ground 12V Grounding The ground conductor of the SDI interface line should be large enough to keep the voltage drop between the data recorder and the sensor to less than 0 5 vo
62. in the message as GH 43 75 Nine bytes have been used and one additional byte should be added for the space between this value and an adjacent one Four hours of such messages will require 10 times Data TX ST or 10 12 120 bytes If all three parameters were encoded in the same GOES RADIO SETUP Carrier ST way a message would be 3 120 or 360 bytes Two thirds of the available bytes have been used with only 3 parameters This example illustrates how the SHEF format can take up a large amount of transmission space GOES RADIO SETUP Carrier ST Carrier ST C Carrier The Carrier ST field determines the form of the beginning of transmitted messages Demodulation equipment at receive sites varies in capability for acquiring carrier and synchronizing with incoming messages The 8200 can send messages with two widely used forms of carrier and clock signals The Carrier ST may be set to SHORT or LONG When set to SHORT messages are preceded by 0 5 second of carrier and 0 5 second of clock signal When set to LONG messages are preceded by 5 seconds of carrier and 2 5 seconds of clock The SHORT option is the standard carrier for random reporting messages GOES RADIO SETUP Channel ST Channel ST 1 Channel The Channel ST field contains the channel identification number assigned to a particular station by NOAA NESDIS The channel is selected by pressing when Channel ST is in the display window Use the arrow keys to move right and left
63. in the path For example MENU PATH SYSTEM SETUP MEASUREMENT SCHEDULE Switched Power Options tells you to select SYSTEM SETUP from the MAIN MENU main menu is implied and then MEASUREMENT SCHEDULE from the SYSTEM SETUP menu and then Switched Power Options from the MEASUREMENT SCHEDULE menu Changing Values and Executing Functions Functions are executed and fields are changed by means of the key and the arrow keys The following paragraphs illustrate how these keys are used to set the Unit ID Date Time and Recording Similar keystrokes are used to change any field in any menu tree Setting the Unit ID The Unit ID is the second entry in the main menu To select the Unit ID press the Y key once after the Sutron 8210 vvxx message is displayed To change the Unit ID press the key A flashing cursor will appear at the first character of the Unit ID To change the first character press the up or down arrow keys Each depression will cause the displayed character to change Numbers from 1 through 0 and letters from A through Z are available When you have the desired selection displayed press the gt right arrow key to move to the next character Repeat this process until the Unit ID is correct You can move backwards in the ZD by pressing the 4 left arrow key When you have entered the Unit ID you desire press bs to make it permanent The flashing cursor will disappear and your selection will be saved If you wish to cancel y
64. initial set of transmissions following an alarm Any subsequent transmissions will be spaced at the alarm rate and will be single transmissions GOES RADIO SETUP Random Setup MenulAlminRR AlmInRR 5 Alarm Interval RR Time interval between transmissions The A m nRR field determines the amount of Time average that will elapse between transmissions caused by a group trigger sensor first moving into alarm state This field should not be set to less than 4 minutes which is the typical value for this field Use the J and arrow keys to change the value of this field GOES RADIO SETUP Random Setup Menu Channel RR 4 28 Channel RR 1 Channel RR Random reporting channel The Channel RR field contains the random reporting channel identification number assigned to a particular station by NOAA NESDIS The channel is selected by pressing J when Channel RR is in the display window Use the arrow keys to move right and left and to select appropriate numbers to set the channel Press again when you have keyed in the correct number GOES RADIO SETUP Random Setup MenulDatInRR GOES RADIO SETUP Random Setup Menu DatinRR DatInRR 8 Data Interval RR The DatiInRR field determines the time interval between data items selected from the log for a random or alarm transmission The purpose of this field is to allow users to precisely control which data from the log are transmitted When Dat nRR is set equal to the interval that the data is logged
65. input character ex WAITFOR B T would match the words BAT BIT or any other 3 letter sequence with B first and T last The character will match any number of characters up to the next character in the pattern ex WAITFOR B T would match any input which began with a B and ended with a T Finally the character is used to embed one of the special characters in to a pattern ex WAITFOR WAY would wait for the letters to be received Tiny BASIC 10 21 22 Tiny Basic Function Set COUNT SensorName The number of samples taken the last time SensorName was averaged ex try to read the log 10 N ReadLog Time Battery 20 If Err Then Failed 30 If Not Err Then N True 1 if the last instruction caused an error otherwise False 0 ReadLog is currently the only function which sets this status Open is the only command which sets this status EXP Num eN eis approximately 2 71828 INP Port INALARM HI LO ROC INT EXT Sensor ex check out Analog1 10 If InAlarm H Analog Then H 20 If InAlarm L Analog1 Then p 30 If InAlarm R Analog1 Then R INALARM ALARM INT EXT ex check system alarms 10 If InAlarm A Then Alarm 20 If InAlarm I Then Int Alert 30 If InAlarm E Then Ext Alert INPUT ex wait for a key and echo it 10 A Input 20 Print You pressed A 10 22 Reads a byte from an input output port Improper use of this func
66. is available through an 8200 menu and also to LOS radios and GOES random transmissions The View Alarm is the simplest way to view the last measured value Note that you need to have the Alarm Enable ON for this to work You can use this menu from the front panel test set or a telephone modem The speech modem can be instructed to speak the last measured value using speech menu keys 6 list normal sensors and 7 list sensors in alarm The last measured value is included in a GOES random message when the Measmnt Log is set gt 1 For LOS radios the ability to report the last measured value is controlled by the Alarm Enable The radio will report the last measured value for any sensor with Alarm Enable not OFF when it receives the POLL command Logged Data Logged data is the most common data retrieved from the 8200 There are the following methods of retrieving logged data 8200 Menus VIEW DATA NEWEST or OLDEST READINGS 8200 Speech Menu item 5 Output to an attached printer or recorder EEROM Serial LOGGER LOS radio reply to a Time Tag Data request GOES self timed transmission use the setup fields to control how much data is sent Use the Alarm Groups to control which sensors are sent e GOES random transmission use the setup fields to control how much data is sent Use the Alarm Groups to control which sensors are sent Retreiving Your Data 9 1 RAM Cards e Dump to serial port or modem use the DUMP DATA Serial Po
67. l Battery Voltage Random Counter l Temp 2 Precip 2 Stage 2 Temp T Precip 1 Stag I Delta Time Group ID The time stamp for the values is based on DatTimRR and DatIntRR A transmission made at 10 28 would have the 10 15 1 and 10 00 2 data if DatTimRR 00 00 00 and DatIntRR 00 15 00 If DatTimRR 00 00 00 and DatIntRR 01 00 00 the data would be at 10 00 1 and 9 00 2 If measmnt log were gt 1 the message would appear as follows Here is a message with 2 data items per transmission and with three sensors enabled in random group 2 2QCGtASXCQCI RQGSsASrERI RGI Battery Voltage Random Counter Temp 1 based on DatTimRR and DatIntRR Precip 1 based on DatTimRR and DatIntRR Stage 1 based on DatTimRR and DatIntRR Temp 1 last measured value Precip 1 last measured value Stag 1 last measured value Offset Tim Group ID The time stamp for these values is a bit different than that in the first example In this later case the 8200 sends the last measured value for each sensor first The time stamp for these sensors would be the last nearest measurement time The first data from the log 1 would have the same tim stamp as before SELF TIMED BINARY DATA FORMAT This format is used when
68. line number but it will also tell you what line the program is currently executing This is an excellent way to check on whether your program is either spending too much time in a certain section or worse never reaching a section that is supposed to run You will want to use the PC to display the status inasmuch as it can be displayed and refreshed quickly giving you a real time view of what the program is doing Tiny BASIC 10 27 Chapter 11 Maintenance and Service This chapter gives information needed to maintain and service an 8200 lts topics include general site maintenance instructions 8200 assembly and disassembly fuses jumpers initializations and resets Enclosure This maintenance section describes the inspections and tests that should be performed on a working station to insure its continued reliable operation If all the proper guidelines were followed when installing the site maintenance should be quick and needed once a year Included are checks of the enclosure sensors cabling battery antenna and 8200 itself Enclosure Sensors Cabling Battery Visually check the environmental enclosure and look for signs of moisture entering in In some cases the enclosures sweat which does not cause great problems with the 8200 since it has a protective box surrounding the boards and the boards themselves are conformally coated If a leak is discovered in the enclosure it should be sealed At locations where there
69. minus DeadBnd The alarm clears when the sensor value is greater than or equal to LoLev plus DeadBnd Example With LoLev set to 1 5 and Low Alarm set to BOTH and DeadBnd set to 1 the system will detect alarms as follows 4 62 Time 00 15 00 00 30 00 00 45 00 01 00 00 01 15 00 SYSTEM SETUP ALARM OPTIONSiLow Alarm Value Alarm Status 1 6 NORMAL 1 4 ALARM and transmit 1 4 lt 1 5 0 1 1 5 ALARM 1 6 back to NORMAL and transmit 1 6 gt 1 5 0 1 1 4 NORMAL SYSTEM SETUP ALARM OPTIONS Low Alarm Low Alarm 2 Low Alarm Low Alarm controls whether the 8200 will generate an alarm based on a comparison with the Low Limit The Low Alarm test compares the sensor value with LoLev minus DeadBnd If the sensor value falls below LoLev minus DeadBnd the sensor is in Low Alarm When the sensor value goes above LoLev plus DeadBnd the sensor is no longer in High Alarm This test will be made only if Low Alarm is not set to OFF Low Alarm can have the following options OFF ABOVE BELOW BOTH Alarm detection is not based on LoLev Low Alarm checks will be made Transmit alarm when the sensor value goes above LoLev plus DeadBnd out of alarm Low Alarm checks will be made Transmit alarm when the sensor value falls below LoLev minus DeadBnd into alarm Low Alarm checks will be made Transmit alarm both when the sensor goes into alarm and when it goes out of alarm Note The same test is done regardless of w
70. note is the same as PRINT in Tiny Basic x can be any variable n or nn is meant to represent a number Turns switched 12V power OFF if OnOffF 0 otherwise it is turned ON Turns auxiliary switched power OFF if OnOff 0 otherwise it is turned ON Auxiliary power is only available on specially modified 8200s and may not be available on your unit Tiny BASIC 10 19 20 POKE Addr Num Stores a byte of data Num into memory address Addr Improper use of this function can cause damage to the operation of the 8200 PULSE Output Seconds Turns one of the digital outputs on for the specified number of seconds Valid outputs are 1 thru 8 which ex pulse all the outputs for 10ms map to the sensors OUT1 thru OUTS The pulse 10 Fori 1 To 8 duration can range from 0 as fast as possible to 65 20 Pulse i 01 seconds with resolution of 0 01 seconds 30 Next i PULSE Output Seconds Turns one of the digital outputs off for the specified number of seconds Valid outputs are 1 thru 8 which ex negative pulse an output corresponds to the sensors OUT1 thru OUTS The pulse 10 REM you could do this duration can range from 0 as fast as possible to 65 20 OUT1 0 Sleep 2 OUT1 1 seconds with resolution of 0 01 seconds 30 REM but this is more accurate 40 Pulse 1 2 RAISEALARM SensorName Simulates the occurence of an alarm from SensorName resulting in alarm transmissions appropriate to ex send an alarm if battery is low Senso
71. of the unitID Ifa file already exists with this name you will be prompted to either replace the file or enter a unique file name Note make sure the EEROM Log Dump option is set to ALLBIN or DAYBIN so you can receive the file in binary format You may also use PROCOMM or other communications software to receive the data from the 8200 When you see the prompt Press ENTER to Start A for ASCII or ESC to Abort use the functions built in to you program to receive the file With PROCOMM you would press PGDN and then select YMODEM The X YModem dumps of the data can take considerable time depending on the size of the log and the dump speed If you are on site and want the fastest dumps of data you can run TS8200 the original 8200 test set software This program supports a fast transfer from the 8200 that includes a single 16 bit checksum at the end of the data When dumping the data to TS8200 the following messages can be displayed Complete Transfer was successful ACK received Failed Checksum was bad NAK received No Response Complete but neither ACK or NAK received End of Data No more data to dump Change Start Date No Connect Terminal is not connected Check cable If you receive a No Response or a Failed message you should dump the data again in case part of the data was lost If you miss the message altogether you can always check a log file by running the CHKLOG program supplied with the 8200 on the LOG file DUMP DATA St
72. on the OPTO 22 connector are CMOS 22 connector available compatible ON is 5V OFF is OV O O O O O O O o o SDI2 SDI3 SDI4 SDI5 SDI6 SDI7 SDI8 SDI9 1 alaj ala ala co SDIO_1 SDI 12 SDI 12 SDI1_1 SDI 12 SDI 12 9 different readings from SDiaddressO_ 9 different readings from SDiaddress1_ SDI 12 9 different readings from SDI address2 SDI 12 9 different readings from SDiaddress3_ SDI 12 S different readings from SDI address4 SDI 12 9 different readings from SDiaddress5 SDI 12 Sdifferentreadings from SDladdress6_ SDI 12 9 different readings from SDiaddress7 SDI 12 9 different readings from SDI address8___ SDI 12 9 different readings from SDI address9 Note WindSpeed and WindDir are combined to create a vectored reading which when averaged and logged will be a wind vectored average for speed and direction WindDir must be converted to read from 0 to 360 degrees Also WaterLevel readings are made from the pressure sensor which when averaged performs the data quality assurance program DQAP The DQAP method takes a sample set defined by Samples Set then computes a mean and standard deviations All readings which are more than 3 standard deviations outside of the mean are removed Each reading which is removed is called an outlier The standard deviation is recomputed after the outliers have been removed Jumpers set the use
73. option You will be able to select from a list of all the setups stored on the card Pressing the key will cause the 8210 s complete setup to be restored The following are possible messages Menu Tree Reference 4 9 DUMP DATA Serial Port Complete Successful Setup copied and burned No RAM Card Ram card not installed or inaccessible EEROM Failure Cannot write to the EEROM needs repair Bad Setup Setup is incompatible or not present DUMP DATA Serial Port 4 10 Serial Port S Send to Serial Port or Modem This command will cause the 8200 to transfer data to the RS 232 serial port or modem at the dump rate set in the EEROM setup menu see below page 4 16 Data will be transferred beginning from the start date up to but not including the current date or through the end of the log depending on the setting of the Log Dump field in the EEROM Setup sub menu see below page 4 17 If Log Dump is set to ALLBIN the dump will include all of the data in the log If Log Dump is set to DAYBIN the dump will terminate at the end of the previous day s cycle When you press S the 8200 will prompt Press ENTER to Start A for ASCII or ESC to Abort If you are using Sutron s TS8210 software you will also be prompted to select a transfer protocol The default is receive YMODEM If you simply press ENTER the software will begin a YMODEM receive The 8200 will name the file as xxxxMMDD LOG where xxxx is the first four letters
74. press OK and enter the name of the file containing the setup to send to the 8200 6 Watch the transfer and the COMPLETED message UPLOAD DOWNLOAD a BASIC program DOWNLOAD gets the setup from the 8200 and puts in on the PC disk Follow these steps 1 The PC needs to be running TS8210 or other communications program Connect to the 8200 and make sure you are able to display and select menus 2 Select U Upload Download from the main menu 3 Press T Transfer Setup 4 Wait for the TS8210 Transfer Menu 5 Press ENTER no changes to defaults are necessary 6 Watch the transfer and the COMPLETED message 7 The file will be named unitid SET UPLOAD DOWNLOAD a BASIC program UPLOAD sends a basic program to the 8200 Follow these steps if you have a PC connected directly to the 8200 or have dialed into an 8200 with a telephone modem If you have a two way radio system you will need to use other software provided by Sutron Contact customer service for additional information 1 The PC needs to be running TS8210 or other communications program Connect to the 8200 and make sure you are able to display and select menus 2 Select U Upload Download from the main menu 3 Press B Transfer Basic program 4 Wait for the TS8210 Transfer menu or press F3 X Y MODEM 5 Select SEND FILE and press OK 5 Enter the name of the file containing the BASIC program 6 Watch the transfer and the COMPLETED message Follow these steps to DOWNLOA
75. program needs 2 5 seconds to run the program will be run every 3 seconds If you need the 8200 to perform functions at several Time intervals you must set BasInt to the shortest interval and use instructions in Basic to check for the longer intervals For example if you want to sample once every 5 seconds a value and accumulate it for an hour set BasInt to 00 00 05 and then check in the program for the hour interval see Chapter 8 for more details SYSTEM SETUP MEASMNT SCHEDULE BasTim BasTim R Basic Run Time Basic Run Time BasTim sets the Time at which the basic program should be run The Time can be the same Time as MeasTim if the BASIC code makes its own measurements If the BASIC code does not MEASURE sensors it may use values from sensors with MEASURE ON or AVERAGE ON In this case it is necessary to have the Basic Run Time several seconds after MeasTim so the new values are available when the basic program runs see Chapter 8 for more on Tiny BASIC Example The following setup causes the basic program to run once every hour 30 minutes in to the hour BasTim 00 30 00 BasInt 01 00 00 SYSTEM SETUP MEASMNT SCHEDULE Measint MeasInt M Measurement Interval The measurement interval Meas nt is the Time HH MM SS that elapses between measurement cycles During each measurement cycle the 8200 will take new readings from any sensor enabled with MEASURE ON MeasInt is also used to prepare the LOG for data The LOG
76. s complement 18 bit binary 12345 base 10 111100 111111 000111 base 2 Now we can convert each piece back to base 10 111100 111111 000111 base 2 60 63 7 Finally we add 64 to each piece and convert to ASCII since the second piece is 63 we leave it alone 124 63 71 ASCII G Example 4 Decoding the 3 byte string SW This is just like encoding except we follow the steps backwards First we convert all the characters to ASCII decimal codes ASCII SW 64 83 87 Now we subtract 64 from each piece and convert to 6 bit binary 0 19 23 000000 010011 010111 Finally we combine all the bits to form one 18 bit twos complement number and convert to base 10 000000010011010111 1239 Appendix E 8200 Test Set Software Appendix E 8200 Test Set Software Introduction Sutron provides this test set software to simplify the process of operating the 8200 The software allows you to communicate serially with the 8200 download data serially into LOG files download RAM CARDS RAMPACKS with a rampack reader and output LOG files convert a LOG to ASCII comma delimited PRN file compute daily means min and max and to perform a quick plot of the data The programs contained on the disk are not copy protected and we encourage the user to make as many working and backup copies as needed Additional copies of the software and the 8200 Users Manual are available from Sutron at a nominal price Installation
77. selection of international channels for 8200s used outside of the USA Carrier ST Message carrier length short or long SatID Assigned ID code for this station from NOAA NESDIS Channel ST Assigned self timed channel Time ST Assigned self timed reporting time Rate ST Assigned self timed reporting interval Data TX ST No of data items for each parameter taken from 8200 log and encoded in each self timed transmission DatTmST Synchronization time the time at which to begin extracting data from the log in order to build a message DatInST Data interval the time interval between readings from the 8200 log equal to or a multiple of MeasInt GOES RADIO SETUP Data TX ST HData TX ST 4 Data Items TX No of data items per self timed transmission The Data TX ST field specifies how many of each designated parameter will be sent A designated parameter is one which has been assigned to the self timed reporting group by placing a one 1 in the second position of its Groups field See step 2 for setting up self timed reporting Designating sensors for inclusion in self timed messages Also see the Groups value under the ALARM OPTIONS Menu Chapter 4 page 4 60 for more information on Groups For example the normal GOES operating cycle is 4 hours Many users collect 15 minute data for all parameters or 16 values per cycle If you want each transmission to contain only the data from the last 4 hour period then Data TX ST should be 16
78. steadying off change less than deadband 01 15 00 2 90 yes it is steady set state to STEADY 01 30 00 2 85 itis still steady change less than deadband 01 45 00 2 75 it may be falling 02 00 00 2 70 no it is not falling change less than deadband 02 15 00 2 6 it may be falling 02 30 00 2 5 yes it is falling set state to FALLING SYSTEM SETUPICONFIG SENSOR SYSTEM SETUPICONFIG SENSOR CONFIG SENSOR C Configure Sensors This Sub Menu displays a list of all the sensors that are enabled in the 8200 and allows important configuration information to be set Ifa sensor has not been enabled 1t will not show up in the list to be configured The benefit of this is that it allows the user to configure only those sensors that have been enabled To view or change the configuration of a sensor from the front panel use the up down arrow keys to display the name of the desired sensor Notice that following the name of each sensor are 6 blanks that can contain the abbreviations Me Lg and Av Me means that Measure is ON Lg means that Log is ON and Av means that Averaging is ON Since measuring and averaging are mutually exclusive you will never see a sensor with both Me and Av To see the full configuration of make changes press the right arrow key The display will then display the configuration fields and permit the values to be changed Use the up down arrow keys to go through all the different fields of the configuration If you are
79. supplied to you in chapter 3 of this manual and wiring diagram that shows where each sensor wires gets attached to the 8200 This will take the guesswork out of connecting the sensors in the field The external input output capability of the 8200A and 8210 includes e Up to Five switch closures counters e Up to Five Frequency inputs e Up to Two Shaft Encoder inputs e Up to 8 0 to 5v analog inputs e One 5 to 100mv differential input requires 2 or 4 analog inputs e One RS 232 serial port e One SDI 12 serial port e One switched 12VDC voltage e 5V reference excitation voltages The output capability of the 8210 adds e switched 5v reference voltage e Software controlled switched 12VDC voltage e Five digital outputs open collector 0 to 5V The 8210 has an internal OPTO 22 compatible connector for e 8 digital outputs 0 to 5V 5 are shared with terminal strip e 12 digital inputs 0 to 5V In addition to the external input capability the 8200 can monitor and log several of its own internal functions including 5v instrument excitation voltage Analog Ground voltage 5v A D reference voltage Pressure amplifier voltage used with the 5 to 100mv differential input Main Battery Voltage RAM Card Battery Voltage Analog Sensors Analog sensors are sensors with a voltage output This voltage can be the result from e areference voltage passing through a resistive device e a powered sensor that has a voltage or current outpu
80. that the ground line of the output needs to be common with the power ground Self powered sensors have a battery or require no power to operate The most common example of a self powered sensor is a pyranometer Self powered sensors can operate with the 8200 as long as the sensor ground can be connected to the 8200 ground battery ground The pyranometer would connect to the pressure port because of its very low output voltage range 0 to 10 mv Other self powered sensors will probably connect to one of the 0 5 volt analog channels Analog Sensors 5 8 6 2 The 8200s have jumpers that set the use of Analog Sensors 5 6 7 and 8 When you set one of the jumpers to activate this sensor you will at the same time disable one of the lines used by the pressure measurement The following table shows how the jumpers affect the front panel terminations for pressure Function 8210 8200A 8210 Jumper 8200A 57 Analog Pes Termination Jumper 8210 J19 5VDIFF 8210 J14 DIFFIN 8210 J15 DIFFIN Analog Press 8 Pressure 4 5 volt excitation J12 1 2 8210 J20 5VDIFF Analog Press 5 Pressure 1 0 to 5 volt J11 2 3 8210 J19 A5 Analog Press 6 Pressure 2 0 to 5 volt J13 2 3 8210 J14 A6 Analog Press 7 Pressure 3 0 to 5 volt J14 2 3 8210 J15 A7 Analog Press 8 Pressure 4 0 to 5 volt J12 2 3 8210 J20 A8 Counter Frequency Sensors The jumpers come set at the factory in the position which uses all terminations for the ana
81. the previous higher menu level No matter where you are in the menu tree you can return to the top of the main menu by pressing 4 no more than four times Practice moving through the menus using the arrow keys From the top with the prompt Sutron 8210 xxvv press the Y key until the display shows VIEW DATA Press gt and the display will show LIVE READINGS Press Y until the display shows Alarm Status Look at the menu tree to see the path you followed by pressing the keys Now press 4J to return to VIEW DATA Press Y until INSPECT SYSTEM is displayed Press gt and the display will show Perform Selftest Press gt again and notice that the display does not change This is because there is no sub menu for Perform Selftest As a general rule when the display is in all capital letters you can press gt to bring up a sub menu When the display is in a mixture of upper and lower case letters there is no sub menu Press 4 as many times as it takes to get back to the top of the menu tree y g p Special Tip If you hold one of the arrows down for more than a half second 1t will automatically repeat Now that you can navigate through the menus let us introduce a few terms or conventions we have adopted to help describe the 8200 menus MAIN MENU We will use the term main menu to describe all those items that appear by pressing only the down arrow from the top of the tree These items are UnitID Date Time Rec
82. the appropriate steps to be taken to correct the failure If the errors have been identified and their solutions determined erase the error messages by going to the Clear Status sub menu and depressing the FJ key then immediately to the Perform Selftest sub menu and depress the key To verify the error messages have been erased simply perform a Display Status again and view the screen All the messages displayed should be normal and the unit be ready to be put back in operation Disassembly Reassembly 8210 You should record the Number of Resets value that is displayed and compare it to the value recorded the last time the site was visited If this number changes it indicates the station has been reset Disassembly Reassembly 8210 The 8210 package requires no disassembly to examine internal components To access the inside of the 8210 simply loosen the thumb screws on the right of the front panel The front panel will then swing clear providing access to internal boards and cables Disassembly Reassembly 8200A The following steps can be followed to disassemble an 8200A 1 Remove all cabling and grounding from the front panel of the 8200A 2 Use the Hex wrench to remove the four bolts at the corners of the front panel 3 Use the handles on the front panel and pull the front panel and electronics from the enclosure Note that the front panel gasket may be attached tightly to both the panel and enclosure Use a large screwdriver to
83. the keys are used to set the Unit ID Date and Time Similar keystrokes are used to change any programmable item in any menu tree Setting the Unit Name UnitID The Unit Name UnitID is the second entry in the main menu The letter N is used to select this item to change it Press N and the cursor will jump to the Unit Name that is displayed Type in a new unit ID or press BACKSPACE and edit the existing ID When the value is correct press ENTER You may press ESC at any time to cancel the change to the Unit Name Setting the Date The Date is the third entry in the main menu To select the Date press D and the cursor will jump to the first field in the date The date will normally be displayed in MM DD YY format such as 05 21 1992 Type in anew month or press BACKSPACE and edit the existing month Once you are satisfied with the change press ENTER to lock in the new monthly value and go to the next field which is the day Use the same steps to change the day and year Pressing ENTER while in the year field will cause the 8200 to accept the entire new date If ESC is pressed at any time the cursor returns to the menu without changing the date Setting the Time The Time is the fourth entry in the main menu To select the Time press T and the cursor will jump to the hours field Type in a value for the hours or press BACKSPACE and edit the existing hours value Press ENTER to go to the minutes section Use t
84. the precipitation sensor and battery every minute and stores the data in the log To program the setup into the 8200 simply enter the information from the sheet into the 8200 e Goto SYSTEM SETUP MEASUREMENT SCHEDULE and enter the information from page 2 under the same heading e Goto SYSTEM SETUP ENABLE and enable the appropriate sensors as given on the setup sheet Also change the name for sensors as required e Goto SYSTEM SETUP CONFIGURE and enter values into the fields for the sensor as given on the setup sheet Finish one sensor before going on to the next one e Repeat the above steps for the ALARM SETUP e Check and enter the values from the rest of page 2 of the setup sheet The information can be easily entered into the 8200 by noting Getting To Know The 8200 3 13 The Setup Sheet The sheets have the values grouped so that it is simple to read the data off the sheet and enter it into the 8200 3 14 The Setup Sheet 8200 SENSOR SETUP UnitID Location Name SYSTE ETUPAENABL ENSORS Enable ON OFF FON 3 ON SYSTEM SETUP CONFIG SENSORS Miss ONO ON ON a os ONO JON ON Peewee ono for OR TP mwa ww O RI E a C IAS IR ER E EM fea forsee ono fea fee ES ER ER FR E EUITIO EXI EOI ERA E IS IE SYSTEM SETUP ALARM OPTIONS EOS MEE a A A A ETICA PP O A CCOO E IR IR O a yA manm J OOO IS IS wam O O O s S C A A O O PR mwa INS
85. the screen for the sensor pointed to by gt SYSTEM SETUP MEASMNT SCHEDULE MEASMNT SCHEDULE M Measurement Schedules Scheduling in the 8200 is controlled by values setup in the MEASUREMENT SCHEDULE sub menu see below for more detailed information and an explanation of each of these values The order of the parameters in the sub menu is Measurement Interval MeasInt Sample Interval SampInt Measurement Time MeasTim Sample Time SampTim Power Time PwrTim No of Samples per Set Samples Set No of Measurements per Log Measmnt Log Basic Run Interval BasInt Basic Run Time BasTim Switched Power Options PwrMode Menu Tree Reference 4 73 SYSTEM SETUP MEASMNT SCHEDULE Measmnt Log SYSTEM SETUP MEASMNT SCHEDULE Measmnt Log Measmnt Log L Measurements per Log Measurements per log Measmnt Log is the number of processing cycles between times when data is logged recorded to the 8200 memory for sensors configured with Log ON SYSTEM SETUP CONFIG SENSORS Measurements per log should be set to one 1 under almost all circumstances Setting the measurements per log value to 2 will cause data to be logged every other processing cycle A value of 3 would cause data to be logged every third cycle and so on The benefit of this is that it is possible for the 8200 to measure data more frequently than it is logged This frequently measured data is available for transmission over a radio or satellite even t
86. to random reporting or both Channel RR Assigned random reporting channel RN Rate Normal or base interval between random transmissions RA Rate Alarm interval between random transmissions TX Alarm Number of attempts made for each alarm random transmission RR AlmInRR Time interval between the attempts at alarm random transmissions Data TX RR No of data items for each parameter taken from 8200 log and encoded in each random transmission DatTmRR Synchronization time the time at which to begin extracting data from the log in order to build a message DatInRR Data interval the time interval between readings from the 8200 log equal to or a multiple of MeasInt GOES RADIO SETUP Random Setup MenuW Data TX RR Data TX RR 6 Data Items TX RR Number of data values from each parameter in a group The Data TX RR field specifies how many values of each parameter in a group will be sent Some care must be taken in assigning Data TX RR so that messages do not become too long see Chapter 7 page 7 5 for more on self timed transmissions Random transmissions should average no more than 3 seconds long The data transmission rate is 100 bits second Practically speaking only 2 seconds of the message may be used because of required clock carrier and ID bits Thus only 200 bits may be sent in each random message The more conventional method for measuring message length is 8 bit bytes Twenty five bytes may be sent during each report
87. to the external serial port 9 js A Analertmessage has been triggered to the board in slot42 Sensor an Bits vale EE ption oo 1 Ena ON ON A MeasureON S O 3 IA Alarm A Bits vale a q TT ption EA ae Alarm Alarm Enable O OSE 1 2 Enable alertsto board in slot 1 o 2 4 Enable alerts to external serial port o 3 8 Alarm condition toggles switched power i 4 t Alerton value above high limit o pS 32 Alerton value belowlowlimit o 6 64 Alerton value above low limit o 8 256 Alert on value above roc limit 9 512 _ Alerton value below roc limit o F 3 Appendix F 8200 Sutron Standard Protocol Capabilities System CORRE Bits value Description 1 Recording ON ss ON e a a O 65 536 ROM Error 131 072 RAM Read Write Error F 4 Appendix F 8200 Sutron Standard Protocol Capabilities The SYSTAT Sensor A special sensor called SYSTAT is available to be accessed by SSP to gather various system statistics Much of this information is also encoded in the Send to Sutron GOES test message These codes are documented under the Tx Code column Field Code 1 Sample Status Recording Status 0 Cleared 1 Disabled 2 WaitPower i ioe 3 WaitAverage 4 Averaging 5 WaitMeasure 6 Measuring 7 Logging JC A Battery Status Lowest measured value of the battery voltage Max Battery Battery Status Highest measured value of the battery voltage TX d e bad received good on t
88. using the PC a list of all the enabled sensors will be displayed on the left side of the display with a pointer gt in front of the first sensor as shown below The current configuration for the sensor will be displayed on the right of the screen identified with a label and the key required to make a change to the values Use the up down arrows to move the cursor to different sensors and note the information on the right change Note that some of the configuration fields cycle or toggle between values each time the menu key is pressed For example Measure changed OFF to ON or ON to OFF each time M is pressed For other items such as Slope a cursor will appear when the item is selected so a new number can be typed in For example when you press S the cursor will jump to the Slope field and let you enter a new value for slope Press ESC to abort a change to a item once it has been selected On the following page we have recreated a screen shot from a PC running the TS8210 software Menu Tree Reference 4 67 SYSTEM SETUP CONFIG SENSORS Average Ho CONFIGURE SENSORS HO Active Sensors Configuration 1 gt Analog4 i M Measure OFF Pressure i L Log OFF A Average OFF H I Interval 00 00 00 Calibration V Value 1008 886 i S Slope 2 4618 O Offset 0 000 E Elevation 1000 R RightDigits 31 HO SYSTEM SETUPICONFIG SENSORS Average Average A
89. want to plot by using the up down arrows to move the pointer to a sensor Press ENTER to select or deselect a sensor When you have selected all the sensors you desire press P to generate a plot The software will prompt for you to enter a MIN and MAX value for the plot You may enter your desired values for the MIN and MAX or accept the defaults by pressing ENTER After this is done the graph is displayed The software will have also read in the values for the sensors it plotted and can now suggest better values for the MIN and MAX To do this press ESC to go back to the selection menu and press P again This time the software uses the actual MIN and MAX values from the last plot for the values 1t suggests as defaults You may use these values by pressing ENTER or enter your own by typing the value followed by ENTER You may want to round up or down the numbers suggested by the program to improve the plot labeling Appendix E 8200 Test Set Software With the graph on the display you can use several keys to control the display The keys are defined as follows Viewing Options 1to9 View 1 to 9 days of data at a time W View a week of data 7 days M View a month of data 31 days Y View a year of data 365 days F B Change Foreground and Background colors Movement Arrows Right Arrow view next screen of data Left Arrow view previous screen of data Saving Options Shift Fl to F9 Save current screen to m
90. way 60 MEM 0 43 The MEM array is a convenient source of extra storage 70 REM remarks can begin with either the word REM or a singe quote Initialization Variables in Basic are initialized to zero whenever the program is modified upon system reset or whenever the program is run the first time by the 8200 after recording is turned on This allows you to detect when a recording cycle has begun by comparing any variable to 0 The MEM array is only initialized to zero when the program is modified or upon system reset Hence the MEM array can be trusted to retain values when recording is toggled Sensors and programmable sensors are only initialized to zero upon system reset So sensors can be used to hold values even when the program is changed Finally the slope and offset of a programmable sensor can be used to store fixed constants which the user can easily change Since the measured value of a programmable sensor is always calculated as LastStoredNumber Slope Offset you only have to store a zero in the sensor Future measurements will then return the sensor s offset Performance Considerations Several things can be done to improve the performance of your tiny basic programs unfortunately usually at the cost of readability If your program is processing at rates greater than once a minute or you otherwise need a boost you may want to consider some of the following items e The variables A Z are the fastest to use becaus
91. with an external modem do the following e set the Serial field in the EEROM setup sub menu to USER or EXT MODEM EXT MODEM adds login prompts to a user dialed in e set the User Rate field in the same sub menu to the appropriate baud rate for the external modem NOTE Do NOT set the Serial field to MODEM The MODEM selection is only for use with the internal modem and makes an 8200 emulate at Hayes compatible modem Use the following cable to hook an 8200 to an external modem MODEM 25 Pin 8200 9 Pin Male Male Pin 2 Txd Pin 2 Txd Pin 3 Rxd Pin 3 Rxd Pin 7 Gnd Pin 5 Gnd Pin 8 CD Pin 4 Dsr Cts On a Hayes compatible modem DTR should be held high by a jumper switch because of the way the 8200 answers the phone Close switch on a real Hayes modem UPLOAD DOWNLOAD a setup 7 12 UPLOAD sends a setup from the PC to the 8200 Follow these steps if you have a PC connected directly to the 8200 or have dialed into an 8200 with a telephone modem If you have a two way radio system you will need to use other software provided by Sutron Contact customer service for additional information 1 The PC needs to be running TS8210 or other communications program with X MODEM or Y MODEM capabilities Connect to the 8200 and make sure you are able to display and select menus 2 Select U Upload Download from the main menu 3 Press T Transfer Setup 4 Wait for the TS8210 Transfer Menu or press F3I XYMODEM 5 Select SEND FILE
92. 0 Perform processing for State 0 110 Determine whether to go to another state 120 If lt some condition gt Then S lt next state gt 130 Stop 200 Perform processing for State 1 210 Determine whether to go to another state 220 If lt some condition gt Then S lt next state gt 230 Stop 300 Perform processing for State 2 310 Determine whether to go to another state 320 If lt some condition gt Then S lt next state gt 330 Stop 400 Perform processing for State 3 410 Determine whether to go to another state 420 If lt some condition gt Then S lt next state gt 430 Stop 500 Perform processing for State 4 510 Determine whether to go to another state 520 If lt some condition gt Then S lt next state gt 530 Stop By the way here is an interesting trick using a variable Goto instruction you can use to replace lines 10 through 60 with the risk that illegal states will cause interesting effects 10 Goto s 100 100 When S 0 line 10 will automatically branch to line 100 when S 1 it will branch to 200 etc If S was some illegal number such as 0 5 then the program would branch to line 150 causing all sorts of problems Of course you are not limited to just one state in a program you can maintain multiple state variables to help synchronize all sorts of events Custom Phone Handling 10 8 When using Sutron s internal Speech Modem special processing can be performed by a Basic program when the
93. 0 15 00 Measmnt Log 1 Data TS ST 3 DatInSt 01 00 00 hourly values DatTmST 00 00 00 send top of the hour data The data remains the same for any transmission made between 11 00 and 11 59 Note that the first value is the one the transmitter running at 11 18 finds when searching the log backwards for data at the top of the hour 8 45 10 2 9 00 10 3 third value in message 9 15 104 9 30 10 5 9 45 10 6 10 00 10 7 second value in message 10 15 10 8 10 30 10 9 10 45 11 0 11 00 11 1 first value in message 11 15 11 2 GOES RADIO SETUP DatTmST 4 24 DatTmST 5 Data Time When the 8200 is set up to log more data than it transmits the DatTmST field lets you select the time of the data to send This situation arises when DatInST does not match the interval at which the data is logged For example if the log has 15 minute data in it and you want to send hourly data DatTmST lets you select which of the four 15 minute values gets sent In this example Dat mST 00 00 00 would select the data logged at the top of the hour DatTmST 00 15 00 would select the data logged 15 minutes into the hour and so forth In situations where you want to send data at the same interval that it is logged DatTmST has no affect and should be left at 00 00 00 Example Refer to the examples for DatInST to see how DatTmST operates when it is set to 00 00 00 Example The following example shows what data is transmitted at 11 18 for a station with Meas
94. 0 will only transmit numbers in the range 32768 to 32767 The value transmitted is taken directly from the log of the 8200 which was scaled by Rightdigits before being placed in the log The value transmitted will be value 10 RightDigits The string will be sent if the data was never recorded or was erased The number of sensors transmitted depends on the number of sensors in the random group and the number of log records sent depends on Data TX RR selected in the 8200 The most recent data is always sent first Note if Measmnt Log is set gt 1 the first value transmitted is the last measured value not the last logged value This has been done to support users who want data logged hourly to conserve space and still transmit randomly a value collected more often COUNTER is a 2 byte binary encoded number which indicates the transmission number and increments after every transmission The number will be between O and 4095 BATTERY is a 1 byte binary encoded number representing the battery voltage of the 8200 before the transmission The range of the number will be 32 to 31 and can be converted to volts by multiplying by 0 234 and adding 10 6 allowing a range of 3 1 to 18 1 volts EXAMPLE Here is a message with 2 data items per transmission and with three sensors enabled in random group 2 This message assumes that measmnt log 1 2 Gt Sx i Gs Sr i GI l l l l
95. 00 The amp key toggles the display on and off The four blue outlined keys marked with black triangles control the position of the display window in the menu tree They cause the display to move up down left and right in the menu tree The EJ key is used along with the arrow keys to adjust settings in the display window Getting To Know The 8200 3 1 The Front Panel Terminal Strip Terminal strips are used to connect sensors power and some communication to the 8200 There are three basic configurations for terminal strips depending on the model ordered 8210 0014 1 The terminal strisp in the 8210 0014 1 are built in to the side of the fiberglass enclosure 8210 0014 2 The terminal strips are on a separate detached board that can be mounted anywhere in the enclosure 8200A The terminal strips are located at the bottom of the front panel are used to connect instruments and or an external power source to the 8200 Connections to the terminal strip are made as follows e strip approximately 1 8th inch of insulation from the end of a signal or ground wire e loosen the appropriate terminal block screw e insert the stripped portion of the wire into the small rectangular opening immediately beneath the screw e re tighten the screw To sensors After all connections are made to an 8200 the connectors may be unplugged from the unit with all wiring intact To remove a connector grasp each end firmly and pul
96. 00 alarm status is set to ALERT whenever it is trying to notify you of an alarm This status changes back to ALARM or NORMAL when the notification is complete For telephone systems and radio systems the notification is complete when the alarm is acknowledged For satellite radio systems the notification is complete as soon as the burst of transmissions have been made The status will go to NORMAL only when all alarms have been cleared Make an Event Driven System Using Alarms 7 10 Make an Event Driven System Using Alarms The basic idea behind an event driven system is to have a transmission every time a sensor value changes The most common event driven systems use LOS radios for communication however you can also have event driven systems using telephone or GOES The event driven system setup below makes a transmission every time the value for precipitation or stage changes If there is no change in the level for 8 hours there is also a transmission PROTOCOL SETUP MEASUREMENT SCHEDULE Masterld BASE MeasInt 00 15 00 CarrierDly 7 SampInt 00 00 00 ReplyDly 0 MeasTim 00 00 00 Ack Delay 100 SampTim 00 00 00 TN Rate 08 00 00 PwrTime 00 00 00 TA Rate 00 00 00 Samples Set 10 RetryIn 00 00 00 Measmnt Log il Retries 0 BasInt 00 00 00 BasTim 00 00 00 PwrMode on ENABLE CONFIG ALARM SENSORS Sensor 6 8 Name Encoderl Counter Enable on on Measure on on Average off off Log on on Intrvl 00 00 00 00 00 00 Slo
97. 00 will make alarm transmissions whenever a sensor value changes by an appreciable amount regardless of the time frame of the change This allows a base station data base to be kept up to date in real time This method is not used with the speech modem because it would result in phone calls when there may not actually be a real emergency condition When the comparison is done based on the last measured value the time frame is important Only when the change of value exceeds RocLev in the specified time will an alarm be generated Example The 8200 is set up with RocLev 0 5 and ROCAlarm ABOVE The table shows the alarm state for both a telephone system and a radio system Time Value Telephone Radio 00 15 00 1 2 NORMAL NORMAL 00 30 00 1 4 NORMAL ROC ALARM if last tx value is lt 0 9 00 45 00 1 6 NORMAL NORMAL 01 00 00 1 8 NORMAL NORMAL 01 15 00 2 4 ROC ROC ALARM 2 4 1 4 gt 0 5 ALARM SYSTEM SETUP ALARM OPTIONS Suffix Units Suffix Units S Suffix Speech Modem Only The Suffix provides the 8200 with the number of a word or phrase to speak to identify the sensor units of measurement When the Suffix is non zero the 8200 will speak the suffix after speaking the value The value for the Suffix can be any of the words or phrases defined for the speech module see table 1 page 4 43 for a complete listing of the 8200 words and phrases It can also be one of the following phrases specifically prepared for the suffix 200 Centimete
98. 11 4 There are several fuses inside the 8210 The following table lists all the fuses for the 8210 Fuses designated RVx are thermal fuses and are automatically reset when the excess load is removed Protection lamp 3AG 12V to CPU board Termination Board 6461 1171 or RV1 RV3 60ma RS4835 protection 6461 1175 0 45 amp SDI 12 port 12V CPU Module 8210 0 66 amp J1 pin 1 Aux 12 6461 1170 protection 0 66 amp Switched 12V protection There are several fuses inside the 8200A The following table lists all the fuses for all the 8200A Module Location Front Panel with two F1 Samp 3AG Voltage to Battery fuses 6461 1088 1 or 2 2amp 3AG 12V to SDI CPU Rev E or later and Option Card CPU Module 8200A no fuse 6461 1095 3 Cable to GOES tx none Samp 3AG 12 to transmitter Multiple Module Support Multiple Module Support When configuring the 8210 for multiple communications follow these examples SLOTI SLOT2 REASON GOES RADIO GOES only works in slot 1 GOES SPEECH GOES only works in slot 1 RADIO RADIO Dual radios are supported dual GOES or SPEECH are not RADIO SPEECH Other order might cause the radio to miss messages SPEECH INT MODEM May occasionally miss a wakeup As a rule of thumb GOES always goes in SLOT1 SPEECH always goes in SLOT2 Be sure to set the switches on the CPU board to indicate the type of communications board installed Jumpers and Connectors 8210 CPU Module Switches Opt
99. 2 RATE WindDir 350 328 Battery 12 500 Press SPACE to repeat or ESC to exit VIEW DATA LIVE READINGS 4 80 LIVE READINGS L Live Data Using the front panel LIVE READINGS requires you to press the gt right arrow key to enter the list of enabled sensors If no sensors are enabled the message None Enabled will flash Once in the sub menu use the up and down arrows to select the desired sensor Live data will be refreshed at most 10 times a second The data will have the slope and offset applied except for DEVIATION OUTLIERS TIMER1 TIMER2 and will be displayed using the number of right digits specified in the configuration The data will VIEW DATA LIVE READINGS not be averaged even if the sensor has AVERAGE ON If Recording is ON and TINY BASIC has set RUNLINE for the sensor see page 10 20 the TINY BASIC code will also be applied to the data For example if you have set up vectoring on analog to convert the voltage to temperature units VIEW LIVE readings will display the value for analog 1 in VOLTS if Recording is OFF or in temperature units if Recording is ON You may press the key to change the value of a sensor This will adjust the offset of the sensor to make the live reading match the number you enter For counter and encoder sensors it will set the hardware counter and not alter the sensor offset This is a convenient way to calibrate sensors such as shaft encoders which have a fixed slope but often suffe
100. 43 2 Modem Setup The most common setting for Answer Mode is Voice and Data In this mode the 8200 will answer Please press pound and pause for a few seconds If is not pressed the 8200 will turn on its modem signal and try to establish a data link The other Answer Modes are available if you need them LOS Radio With The Answer Mode in one of the voice modes you will want to pick a Dial In message A common one is IdLivMen which causes the 8200 to speak the ID speak live current data and then give you a menu Other canned dial in messages are avallable You can also construct your own dial in messages from the functions and words listed on page 4 43 Be careful when building your own message as it is easy to write down a single wrong character that will throw the whole message off Remember custom messages can be entered only using a PC If the person installing the 8200 does not have a PC use one of the canned messages Do the same for Dial Out message Pick a password for the station to protect your unit from unauthorized users You can probably use the same password for all your sites If you want to dial out on alarms set Dial Out Enable ON and specify the phone numbers as needed 3 EEROM Setup Set Enter Reqd to ON The 8200 will expect an ENTER to be pressed after a menu item When working over phone lines this helps lessen the chance that noise will cause menu to be selected LOS Radio 1 Alarm Setup Set
101. 8 alphanumeric characters The first four characters are used by Sutron software as part of DOS file names when creating MAIN MENUWVIEW DATA a file of the data While alphanumeric characters are allowed in the Unit ID blank spaces are not The reason for this is that embedded blanks can cause the software to malfunction or cause DOS to create files which cannot be accessed Note do not use spaces decimal points or other special characters in the Unit ID It may cause you to be unable to communicate with an 8200 or use the file created when data is dumped When using an internal or external modem the Unit ID becomes the user name you enter to login When using a speech modem the Unit ID is used to speak the ID of the station in alarm or dial in messages If the Unit ID contains numbers then the number will be spoken to identify the unit if the Unit ID contains letters then the letters are converted to numbers based on the touch tone keypad order and spoken as numbers For this reason you may prefer to use a numeric Unit ID when using a speech modem For more information on setting this and any of the following menu items see Chapter 3 7 VIEW DATA VIEW DATA V View Sensor Data VIEW DATA is a sub menu with four fields LIVE READINGS NEWEST READINGS OLDEST READINGS and Alarm Status These fields provide a way to view both current and logged sensor data The menu appears as View Sensor Data Menu L Live Data N Newest Da
102. A N gt lt DATA N gt lt DATA N gt lt BATTERY NAM NAME OFFS INTERVAL DATA BATT E gt lt OFFSET gt lt BATTERY gt is the sensor name or SHEF CODE as entered in the 8200 in the enable sensor menu SHEF CODES are usually two digit codes and you will have to look up the appropriate codes for your sensors So for instance the SHEF CODE for gage height is HG cumulative precipitation is PC air temperature is TA and battery voltage is VB After the group id the actual data from the 8200 s log are sent Each record is prefixed with an lt OFFSET gt which is an ASCII number indicating the number of minutes ago the most recent data was recorded INTERVAL indicates the interval in minutes between transmitted sensor data items The 8200 always uses the same interval for every sensor The interval is called the Data Interval in the 8200 GOES setup menu Unlike the binary formats the SHEF format groups all the related sensor lt DATA gt together So the data line for precipitation would contain the most recent precip data first followed by the next oldest etc One entry is generated for each sensor in the self timed group number 1 The data is transmitted in ASCII with sign and decimal point if needed If a data value has not yet been recorded or has been erased the letter M for missing data will be sent
103. AUXA Pressures 5 volt feedback used only if internal jumper is on Hooking Up Sensors 6 5 Choosing Sensors and Making Connections Sensor 8210 8200A Value Signal Name Connection Connection eee A ESE 6 6 available when WaterLevel is Enabled Deviation Vots available when WaterLevel is Enabled Serial RS232 RS232 EEROM must be setup for Serial SENSOR The format of the data is xxxx Battery a Internal measure of the battery Shaft8500 RS232 RS232 eae EEROM must be setup for Serial SENSOR The format of the data is xxxx Timert gt Counts countinseconds __________ Timer2 J Counts countinseconds i O DataPack Data Data Volts Measures the 3 bolt battery in the data cartridge Cartridge Cartridge 8200 only Excitation Volts Internal connection of the 5V excitation voltage Ground J Volts Internal connection of the Analog Ground Reference Amplifier Optional al GoesClock Internal connection of the A D 5V reference Pressure Amplifier voltage po futureuse ___ O Counts count in seconds from the GOES 1Hz oscillator since power up Roll over at 32767 The 5 outputs on the terminal strip are current sinking ON is OV OFF is pulled high to 5V The 8 outputs on 5 o Ek the OPTO 22 connector are CMOS compatible ON is OUT1 8 OUT1 5 0 OUT6 8 on available i internal OPTO 22 connector 5V OFF is OV INP1 12 internal OPTO not The 12 inputs
104. Average The Average field can have a value of either ON or OFF Set Average ON for any sensor you want to sample and compute an average for With Average ON the 8200 will use the MeasInt and SampTim in the MEASUREMENT SCHEDULE to control when sampling starts and SampInt to control how often the samples are taken After Samples have been taken the average is computed and stored as the current value for the sensor The slope and offset are applied after the average has been computed to scale the value to its proper units Average and Measure are mutually exclusive If you set Average ON the 8200 will automatically turn Average OFF and vice versa The reason they are exclusive is that it would be useless to start sampling and compute an average only to have the value overwritten by the measure performed because of the Measure ON SYSTEM SETUP CONFIG SENSORS Elevation Elevation E Elevation Elevation is an offset that gets added to a value before it is displayed It is for display purposes only and does not alter the data that is logged It is called Elevation as it is commonly used to enable the 8200 to display the actual elevation of a water surface Example Set up the 8200 to display the actual water surface elevation above mean sea level for a sensor installed to read 0 at an elevation of 3200 Elevation 3200 The display will now show 3215 52 if the shaft encoder is at a position of 15 52 4 68 SYSTEM SETUP CONFIG SENSORS
105. BATTERY Note that the values on the right will change as BATTERY is selected Following the same procedure as above set Measure ON and Log ON and make sure all other values are correct Press ESC to return to the setup menu Press ESC again to return to the main menu Operating the 8200 Turning on Recording Menu Path Recording With the 8200 set up you are ready to turn on Recording With Recording OFF the 8200 will not automatically measure data or transmit it To turn ON Recording from the front panel use the arrows to select Recording and press E The status of Recording should change to ON Note the 8200 will prompt OK to erase log if you have made any changes to the setup that affect the log size such as enable disable logging of sensors or change MeasInt If you see this message press to proceed Pressing any other key aborts the change to Recording ON To turn ON Recording from a test set press R in the main menu Again note the change of the status to ON If you see the OK to erase log you will need to press Y to proceed Pressing any other key aborts the change to Recording ON Viewing Live Data Menu Path VIEW DATA LIVE READINGS To view data from the front panel press Y to display VIEW DATA followed by P The display will show LIVE READINGS Press gt again to select the live readings and the live data for COUNTER will be displayed If some sensor other than COUNTER is displayed press the Y
106. D a basic program from the 8200 to the PC 1 The PC needs to be running TS8210 or other communications program Connect to the 8200 and make sure you are able to display and select menus 2 Select U Upload Download from the main menu 3 Press B Transfer Basic program 4 Wait for the TS8210 Transfer menu and press ENTER 5 Watch the transfer and the COMPLETED message 6 The file will be named unitid BAS Store and forward and cross device repeating SSP messages The 8210 can store and forward SSP messages either back out the same port smart repeating or out another port cross device repeating Smart repeating is used in LOS radio systems to send a message to a site which is on the fringe of reception or out of range by using a third site in the middle For instance if site A cannot reach site C but site A can reach site B and site B can reach site C then smart repeating can be used to send from site A to site B and then on to site C How To 7 13 9 Pin Interface Cable For IBM AT Type Computers To set a PCBASE2 master station to use store and forward set the radio path with the names of the destination and repeating stations separated by For the previous example the radio path would be B_C read this as to site B then repeat to site C Multiple repeaters can be specified by chaining them together B_C_D_E would send a message to B first which would repeat it to C which would repeat it to D which would
107. D help with the command RAMCARD RAMCARD File Manager for the 8210 Version 1 0 C 1995 Sutron Corp Usage RAMCARD d imagename X R filename W filename E RAMCARD manages the files on an 8210 PCMCIA Ram Card If duplicate files are detected they are automatically renamed The drive letter of the PCMCIA device and or the actual name of the dump file can be supplied otherwise RAMCARD will try to find an available drive starting with D Options By default RAMCARD shows the directory of files on the Ram Card d drive letter of PCMCIA device imagename name of ram card image file to use X extracts all files from the Ram Card same as R R filename read matching files from the Ram Card W filename writes matching files to the Ram Card E erases all files from the Ram Card display this help screen Note The Ram Card must be preformatted by an 8210 before use Typically you will set your working directory to the directory you want to extract files to and enter the command RAMCARD X to extract all the files on the ram card to that directory RAMCARD will never overwrite existing files instead it will increment the extension of the filename For instance if TEST0111 LOG already exists on the disk then RAMCARD will extract TEST0111 LOG from the RAM Card as TEST0111 L01 File Naming Conventions The files which RAMCARD creates have names such as TNKS1104 LOG REXI1213 LOG BONY0105 LOG The nam
108. Delay 4 18 Printing 7 4 Production Test 4 37 Protocol Setup 4 5 4 54 Protocol Setup Options 4 5 4 54 PwrMode 4 78 PwrTim 4 78 R R Reply Delay 4 55 RA Rate 4 30 Radio LOS Rate 4 18 Radio Rate 4 18 RAM Card 4 9 transferring data from memory to RAM card 9 3 use of 9 2 Range of applications 1 2 Rate ST 4 26 Read Setup from Ram Card 4 9 Recording 4 5 Index possible error messages 4 6 turning off 5 5 turning on 5 5 Recording Status 4 5 Redial Delay 4 53 ReplyDelay 4 55 Retry Interval 4 56 RetryIn 4 56 Right Digits 4 72 RightDigit 4 72 RN Rate 4 30 ROC Alarm 4 65 7 9 ROC Level 4 66 ROCAlarms 7 12 RocLev 4 66 RS 232 Serial 1 O Port baud dump rate 4 16 operating modes 4 18 transferring data 3 2 uses of 3 3 RS 485 10 14 S SampInt 4 79 Samples to Average 4 76 Sampling Interval 4 79 Sampling Time 4 79 SampTim 4 79 Satellite ID 4 26 SatID 4 26 SDI 12 Port uses of 3 3 SDI Rate 4 18 SDI 12 Baud Rate 4 18 Select Radio 4 38 Send to RAM Card 4 9 Send to Serial Port or Modem 4 10 4 12 Sensor setup sheet 3 15 Sensors analog 6 1 complete list of 6 5 connecting sensors 6 4 counter 6 3 maintenance and calibration of 11 1 RS 232 6 4 SDI 6 3 shaft encoders 6 3 Serial Port 4 10 4 12 transferring data 4 10 Index 4 Serial Port Mode 4 18 Set Date 4 2 Set Time 4 6 Setup sheet 3 13 Setups basic 8200 setup 5 1 computing slope and
109. ELOW High Alarm checks will be made Transmit alarm when the sensor goes below HiLev minus DeadBnd out of alarm BOTH High Alarm checks will be made Transmit alarm both when the sensor goes into alarm and when it goes out of alarm Note The same test is done regardless of whether High Alarm is set to ABOVE BELOW or BOTH These different settings control when to notify you of the alarm not how the data is tested See HiLev on page 4 62 and also Understanding Alarms and Alerts in Chapter 7 for more information SYSTEM SETUP ALARM OPTIONS MHiLev HiLev H High Limit The 8200 alarm status is set to ALARM when the sensor value is greater than or equal to HiLev plus the dead band value The alarm is cleared when the value is less than HiLev minus DeadBnd The Above Below options for High Alarm do not change this sense these options merely determine whether the 8200 will dial out based on entering or leaving the alarm condition Example With HiLev set to 1 5 and High Alarm set to Above and DeadBnd set to 1 the system will detect alarms as follows Time Value Alarm Status 00 15 00 1 2 NORMAL 00 30 00 1 5 NORMAL 00 45 00 1 6 ALARM 1 6 gt 1 5 0 1 transmission made 01 00 00 1 5 ALARM 01 15 00 1 4 NORMAL 1 4 lt 1 5 0 1 no transmission made because High Alarm was set to ABOVE not BOTH SYSTEM SETUP ALARM OPTIONS LoLev LoLev L Low Limit An alarm is generated when the sensor value is less than LoLev
110. EROM SETUP Serial option set to Menu Tree Reference 4 37 INSPECT SYSTEM Transmit Status front panel only PROTOCOL or RADIO otherwise you will receive the message No Radio Use Select Radio to choose which radio you would like to test This option is very useful for testing the integrity and reliability of a two way radio link between two 8200 s or an 8200 and the master station The test radio screen is broken up in to 3 fields S Where the rrrrrrrrrr shows received characters as they come in io shows characters received and transmitter characters being sent out and ss shows a status of CD if carrier is detected or TX if you have keyed the transmitter Following is a list of valid options EJ Send a character and decrement the next character to send gt Send a character and increment the next character to send Key the transmitter Send a test mail message This is a test mail message to the master station hd Reset the next character to send to blank Exit test mode Turn to page 12 5 for detailed suggestions on how to use Test LOS Radio to solve communications problems INSPECT SYSTEM Transmit Status front panel only 4 38 This option shows only the GOES transmitter information of the display status option If all you need to do is check the Time of the next transmission this is a quicker way than using Display Status Note that this does not display the status of the failsafe You must use Disp
111. GITS 4 37 4 37 4 37 4 37 4 38 4 39 4 39 4 40 4 41 4 4 4 42 4 50 4 51 4 51 4 51 4 52 4 53 4 53 4 53 4 53 4 54 4 54 4 54 4 54 4 55 4 55 4 55 4 56 4 57 4 57 4 59 4 59 4 59 4 60 4 61 4 62 4 62 4 63 4 63 4 64 4 65 4 65 4 66 4 67 4 68 4 68 4 69 4 69 4 70 4 70 4 70 SYSTEM SETUP CONFIG SENSORS SLOPE 4 71 SYSTEM SETUP CONFIG SENSORS VALUE 4 71 SYSTEM SETUP ENABLE SENSOR 4 72 SYSTEM SETUP MEASMNT SCHEDULE 4 73 SYSTEM SETUP MEASMNT SCHEDULE MEASMNT LOG 4 74 SYSTEM SETUP MEASMNT SCHEDULE SAMPLES SET 4 74 SYSTEM SETUP MEASMNT SCHEDULE BASINT 4 74 SYSTEM SETUP MEASMNT SCHEDULE BASTIM 4 75 SYSTEM SETUP MEASMNT SCHEDULE MEASINT 4 75 SYSTEM SETUP MEASMNT SCHEDULE MEASTIM 4 76 SYSTEM SETUP MEASMNT SCHEDULE PWRMODE 4 76 SYSTEM SETUP MEASMNT SCHEDULE PWRTIM 4 77 SYSTEM SETUP MEASMNT SCHEDULE SAMPINT 4 77 SYSTEM SETUP MEASMNT SCHEDULE SAMPTIM 4 78 SYSTEM SETUP BASIC PROGRAM PC ONLY 4 78 SYSTEM SETUP CHANGE PASSWORD 4 79 SYSTEM SETUP NIT SETUP 4 79 SYSTEM SETUP ZERO COUNTERS 4 79 VIEW DATA 4 80 VIEW DATA ALARM STATUS 4 80 VIEW DATA LIVE READINGS 4 80 VIEW DATA NEWEST READINGS 4 82 VIEW DATA OLDEST READINGS 4 83 CHAPTER 5 511 UICK SETUP 5 1 REVIEW 5 1 BASIC 8200 SETUP 5 1 TELEPHONE WITH SPEECH MODEM 5 2 LOS RADIO 5 3 SATELLITE UNITS SELF TIMED 5 3 SATELLITE UNITS RANDOM REPORTING 5 4 ENTERING THE SETUP 5 5 RECORDING OFF ON 5 5 CHAPTER 6 6 1 HOOKING UP SENSO
112. I 12 interface 50 Open TERM 60 Control 12 1 set PROTOCOL SETUP Use RS 485 to yes 70 Close 80 SDI2_1 Measure SDI2_1 measure SDI2_1 using RS 485 interface Tiny BASIC 10 15 Tiny Basic Command Set Command Syntax AVGDONE SensorName Computes the average value of SensorName and the following statistics accumulated by calls to AVGSUM MIN MAX STD SUM and COUNT See AVGINIT and AVGSUM AVGINIT SensorName Initializes a sensor for Basic controlled averaging See AVGSUM and AVGDONE AVGSUM SensorName Measures a sensor and accumulates statistics ex check peak battery voltage See AVGINIT AVGDONE MIN MAX STD SUM and COUNT 10 Avglnit Battery 20 For i 1 To 100 30 AvgSum Battery 40 Next i 50 AvgDone Battery 60 Peak Bat Max Battery CONTROL Cmd Data Sends a standard device control and optionally data to the currently open device Following are some of the ex set baud rate to 1200 standard commands Turn device On 10 Open TERM Turn device Off 20 Control 11 1200 Detect Carrier and set STATUS 30 Close Set baud rate according to Data Turn LED cursor On if Data is 1 Off if 0 Turns RTS On if Data is 1 Off if 0 CLEARALARM INT EXT Clears and acknowledges internal alarms external alarms or both An internal alarm is one directed to an ex ClearAlarm Int Ack Internal internal device such as a GOES Radio LOS Radio or ClearAlarm Ext Ack External Speech Modem An
113. Int 00 15 00 Measmnt Log 1 Data TS ST 3 DatinSt 01 00 00 hourly values Dat mST 00 30 00 send half hour data The data remains the same for any GOES RADIO SETUP Format ST transmission made between 11 30 and 12 29 Note that the first value is the one the transmitter running at 11 18 finds when searching the log backwards that was logged on the half hour 8 30 10 2 third value in message 8 45 10 2 9 00 10 3 9 15 10 4 9 30 10 5 second value in message 9 45 10 6 10 00 10 7 10 15 10 8 10 30 10 9 first value in message 10 45 11 0 11 00 11 1 11 15 11 2 GOES RADIO SETUP Format ST Format ST F Format ST The Format ST field determines how data from the 8200 log will be encoded prior to transmission The available options are SHEF Standard Hydrologic Exchange Format and BINARY SHEF format embeds SHEF parameter codes in ASCII messages BINARY format uses 6 bit binary encoding and messages are positional with no parameter codes BINARY format is much more efficient Both formats are described in detail in Appendix D NOTE The SHEF codes which are embedded in a message are set by changing the names of the sensors in the Master Sensor List in the Enable Sensors sub menu After you have enabled a sensor by pressing E press the P right arrow key The cursor will begin flashing under the first character of the sensor name Use the Y up down arrow keys and the gt right arrow key to change the sensor name to
114. Interval There are no other values to change in the Measurement Schedule Press ESC to return to the System Setup Menu Step 3 Enabling Sensors Menu Path S YSTEM SETUP ENABLE SENSORS Press E to select ENABLE SENSORS The display will show a complete list of all the sensors supported by the 8200 Note the cursor pointing to Analog Use the keyboard arrow keys to move the cursor to point to Counter Press ENTER and note the indicating that Counter has been enabled Use the keyboard arrow keys to move the cursor to Battery and again press ENTER To disable a sensor move the cursor to the name with a in front of it and press ENTER The sensor will be disabled and the removed Press ESC to return to the System Setup Menu Step 4 Configuring sensor inputs Menu Path SYSTEM SETUP CONFIG SENSORS Press C to select Configure Sensors The display will show a list of enabled sensors on the left with a cursor pointing to the top value The data on the right will be from the sensor the cursor is pointing to If the cursor is not at Counter use the arrow keys to move it Press M to toggle Measure ON OFF If it shows OFF press it again until it is ON Press L to toggle LOG ON OFF If it shows OFF press it again until it is ON Operating the 8200 Make sure the other values for COUNTER are correct and change them if necessary When you are finished configuring Counter press the arrow key to move the cursor to
115. Intervl You should only need to use the E evation parameter if your sensor offset is larger than the largest number which can be stored in the log otherwise you should use the Offset parameter For instance if you install a shaft encoder at 1000 feet above sea level and require 0 01 foot resolution you cannot use an offset of 1000 If set the offset to 1000 the 8200 will have values for the sensor such as 1001 23 which exceeds the maximum value the 8200 can log with 2 right digits 327 67 If you instead set the Elevation to 1000 the 8200 will be able to log the measured portion of the value 1 23 and still display the value as 1001 23 because the Elevation is added whenever the value is displayed SYSTEM SETUP CONFIG SENSORSIUntervi Intrvl Interval Interval Intrvl affects how often data is written to the Log With J nterval set to 00 00 00 the 8200 will write data to the log for those sensors with Log ON at the end of each measurement cycle or multiple of cycles if measurements per log is not 1 If Interval is set to a time other than 0 the 8200 will wait for the required time before logging the data For example with nterval set to 01 00 00 data will be logged only on the hour even though the log may be set up to handle data every minute With Interval set to 99 00 00 the 8200 turns all control of logging over to BASIC for that sensor BASIC is thereby responsible for any values that get written to the log Even though
116. L SETUP Retryin Retryln 3 Retry Interval When a sensor goes into Alert the 8200 will immediately make a transmission If the ACK is received the 8200 changes the sensor status to Alarm and will not attempt a retry If no ACK is received and Retries is gt 0 the 8200 will delay based on Retry n and then try again This continues until the number of attempts gt Retries The 8200 delay is actually a random delay based on Retryln With Retryln set to 00 01 00 the delay will be anywhere from 0 and 60 seconds 00 01 00 Typically RetryIn is a short Time of less than 10 minutes or so PROTOCOL SETUP TA Rate TA Rate 2 TX Alarm Rate TA Alarm Rate sets the amount of Time between 8200 transmissions when a sensor is in the alarm state For example if you want to have a report from the 8200 every hour you would set TA Rate to 1 hour If TX Alarm Rate is 00 00 00 no transmissions will be made Sensors must have Alarm Setup Enable RADIO SERIAL or BOTH for the TA Rate to be used SYSTEM SETUP ALARM OPTIONS PROTOCOL SETUPITN Rate TN Rate 1 TX Normal Rate This represents the Normal or Base random reporting rate The TN Rate field contains a Time value indicating the amount of Time between transmissions from the 8200 when there are no sensors in the alarm state For example if you want to have a report from a group twice per day set TN Rate to 12 hours If TX Normal Rate is 00 00 00 no transmissions will be made Senso
117. M 256K Operating System Lithium Battery storage 2 years min depending on environment Back up Life 1 year min 8200 0014 1 version only 6 5 Amp Hour 12 Volt sealed battery Accuracy of minute month 8210 5014 1 GOES Satellite units accuracy 15 7 sec yr with typical accuracy of 5 sec yr System Reset upon microprocessor failure 1 sec to 24 hr in 1 second increments dependent on memory and sensors PCMCIA Format Static Ram cartridge Size up to 2 MB See Sutron Supplied Options RS 232 Port or PCMCIA Memory Card Slot 16 character alphanumeric LED Connection through RS 232 port One internal RS 232 port is available through Tiny Basic control See manual for use of ports with dual communication configurations Fully supported through SDI 12 port See RS 485 for option Power to external sensors is polyfuse protected no fuse replacement required RS 485 compliant port capable of supporting SDI 12 protocol for long distance communication to compatible sensors General access to the port is controlled by Tiny Basic Front Panel Access Communications Internal Power Supply Solar Panel Charger Power Consumption Digital Inputs and Outputs Shaft Encoders Tipping Bucket Rain Gauges Counter Inputs Analog Inputs Pressure Transducer System setup and control through the front panel User security is controlled through use of password setup option Any one or two
118. M SETUP BasicSize EEROM SETUP BasicSize BasicSize B Basic Prog Size KB BasicSize defines the amount of memory that the 8200 will set aside for a BASIC program The BASIC program will use this memory for its code and memory array This memory is allocated from the log memory space Therefore changing the size of the Basic program will cause the 8200 to clear the log The 8200 will prompt OK to erase log To cancel the change of the BasicSize press any key other than SET Any BASIC program in memory is also cleared whenever the BasicSize changes Make sure you set the BasicSize to a large enough value to accommodate your entire program to prevent the end of the program from being truncated Also be sure to allow some extra room for expanding the program in the future EEROM SETUP Com Rate Com Rate C Com Baud Rate The Com Rate setting determines the baud rate for an external modem or terminal attached to the internal Com port or for the second radio in a system with two LOS radio boards EEROM SETUP DateFmt DateFmt Date Format MDY the date will be displayed in the format MM DD YYYY DMY the date will be displayed in the format DD MM YYYY YMD the date will be displayed in the format YY YY MM DD EEROM SETUP Dump Rate Dump Rate T Transfer Baud Rate Dump Rate sets the baud rate for the serial port when dumping data to the serial port from the front panel dump data menu option see the DUMP DATA Menu above page 4 3 for
119. Measurement per Log is set to 2 the log will be prepared for 30 minute data Note Changing the Log status for a sensor the measurement time or the measurements per log will cause the 8200 to resize its log and erase any old information in the log This will be done when recording is turned ON SYSTEM SETUP CONFIG SENSORS Measure Measure M Measure The Measure field can have a value of either ON or OFF When ON the 8200 will make a measurement for the sensor and store it as its last value during each measurement cycle When OFF the 8200 does not make an automatic measurement but the value can still be measured using the BASIC MEASURE statement See MeasInt page 4 75 and MeasTim page 4 76 for a description of measurement times When a sensor is measured it is scaled by the slope and offset before being saved as the last value SYSTEM SETUP CONFIG SENSORS Offset Offset O Offset The 8200 uses Slope and Offset to scale sensor s data when it is measured or sampled The equation is Converted Value Raw_ Value Slope Offset See the How To section Chapter 7 3 for help in computing the slope and offset for a sensor SYSTEM SETUP CONFIG SENSORS Right Digits 4 70 Right Digits R RightDigit The Right Digits field affects to how many digits numerical data is displayed and logged The 8200 log is a collection of 2 byte 16 bit integers One bit is used for the sign leaving 15 bits for a data value Wi
120. ODEM SETU MODEM SETU MODEM SETU MODEM SETU MODEM SETU MODEM SETU MODEM SETU MODEM SETU MODEM SETU P SPEECH MODEM MODELS ONLY P 1 P ANSWERMODE P DIAL IN STANDARD MESSAGES BUILD YOUR OWN MESSAGE P DIAL OUT ENABLE P DIAL OUT P NUMBER RINGS P PHONEPASS P REDIAL PROTOCOL SETU PROTOCOL SETU PROTOCOL SETU PROTOCOL SETU PROTOCOL SETU PROTOCOL SETU PROTOCOL SETU PROTOCOL SETU PROTOCOL SETU PROTOCOL SETU PROTOCOL SETU PROTOCOL SETU P P RETRIES P ACK DELAY P CARRIERDLY P HW HANDSHAKE P LONG PACKETS P MASTER P REPLYDELAY P RETRYIN P TA RATE P TN RATE P USE RS 485 SYSTEM SETU SYSTEM SETU SYSTEM SETU SYSTEM SETU SYSTEM SETU SYSTEM SETU SYSTEM SETU SYSTEM SETU SYSTEM SETU SYSTEM SETU SYSTEM SETU SYSTEM SETU SYSTEM SETU SYSTEM SETU SYSTEM SETU SYSTEM SETU SYSTEM SETU SYSTEM SETU SYSTEM SETU SYSTEM SETU SYSTEM SETU SYSTEM SETU SYSTEM SETU P P ALARM OPTIONS P ALARM OPTIONS CONTROL P ALARM OPTIONS DEADBND P ALARM OPTIONS ENABLE P ALARM OPTIONS GROUPS P ALARM OPTIONS HIGH ALARM P ALARM OPTIONS HILEV P ALARM OPTIONS LOLEV P ALARM OPTIONS LOW ALARM P ALARM OPTIONS PREFIX NAME P ALARM OPTIONS ROC ALARM P ALARM OPTIONS ROCLEV P ALARM OPTIONS SUFFIX UNITS P ALARM OPTIONS TREND P CONFIG SENSOR P CONFIG SENSORS AVERAGE P CONFIG SENSORS ELEVATION P CONFIG SENSORS INTERVL P CONFIG SENSORS LOG P CONFIG SENSORS MEASURE P CONFIG SENSORS OFFSET P CONFIG SENSORS RIGHT DI
121. OO0101 If you have entered a correct file name and if the program can locate the file you will see the following messages Creating xxxxmmdd PRN Reading Descriptor Reading Sensor Inf Writing Header Writing Data Date mm dd yyyy hh mm ss Complete Where xxxxmmdd is the same as the input file name and mm dd yyyy is the current date being converted The LOGPRN program allows you to choose several options in the way that data from the RAM Card are converted The options are selected by typing LOGPRN followed by the option selector For example LOGPRN xxxmmdd X Retreiving Your Data 9 5 Radio Options You may select more that one option at a time as long as they are not mutually exclusive The first two options X and Z control the way the conversion of null data items Null items can either be ignored or they may be zeroes The second options control time and date display in the converted data S tells the program to time tag to seconds J changes the date display from month day to the Julian numbering system The file format is designed to be spreadsheet compatible When using LOTUS 123 a PRN file is read in by using the FIN File Import Numbers command By using the FIN command the data will be imported in the correct number of columns in numeric form Radio Options External radio support is a standard part of all 8200s 8200s with the internal radio modem also have additional radio support The radio supp
122. Output output file convert convert convert Version 1 0 version Basic LOS RADIO LOS RADIO Speech Modem GOES Radio An input_file with TXT extension causes an ASCII file to be read in An output_file with TXT extension causes an ASCII file to be output lake set is displayed output directed to a file program will prompt for setup file name to an 8210 setup file a setup to an ASCII file an ASCII file to a setup file The following pages are an example of a setup that has been printed 8210 8200 Setup File Listing C gt SETMGR WEATHER S T ET MAIN SETUP EPROM Version Unit ID Sampling Interval asurment Tim Sampling Time Switched Power Time Samples to Average Switched Power Mode Auto Record Basic Run Interval Basic Run Time Password Number Resets Log Size ROM Checksum T EROM SETUP Serial Port Mode User Baud Rate Radio Baud Rate Com Baud Rate Transfer Baud Rate SDI 12 Baud Rate Enter Key Reqd Log Dump Mode User Time Limit Power Delay Analog Delay Pressure Delay Auto Startup Keys Time Format 10 asurement Interval asurements per Log S3A WEATHER 00 15 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 900 1 ON Yes 00 00 06 00 00 00 PASWD 0 126976 65222 USER 9600 9600 1200 No ALL BIN 60 1 5 5 NORMAL Appendix E 8200 Test Set Softwa
123. RS 6 1 CONCEPTS 6 1 ANALOG SENSORS 6 1 ANALOG SENSORS 5 8 6 2 COUNTER FREQUENCY SENSORS 6 3 SHAFT ENCODER QUADRATURE SENSORS 6 3 SDI SENSORS RS232 SENSORS CHOOSING SENSORS AND MAKING CONNECTIONS GROUNDS SENSOR SETUP EXAMPLES TIPPING BUCKET SHAFT ENCODER QUADRATURE WIND SENSOR WITH AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT HOW TO SETUP FOR A SIMPLE STREAM GAUGING STATION SETUP FOR AVERAGING SETUP FOR A SIMPLE WEATHER STATION COMPUTE THE SLOPE AND OFFSET FOR A SENSOR PRINTING THE SETUP SCHEDULE DETAILS SETUP FOR GOES TRANSMISSIONS SETUP FOR GOES RANDOM TRANSMISSIONS SETUP FOR LOS RADIO POLLED SETUP FOR TELEPHONE SPEECH MODEM SETUP FOR TELEPHONE ALARMS UNDERSTAND ALARMS AND ALERTS MAKE AN EVENT DRIVEN SYSTEM USING ALARMS USE AN EXTERNAL MODEM WITH THE 8200 UPLOAD DOWNLOAD A SETUP UPLOAD DOWNLOAD A BASIC PROGRAM STORE AND FORWARD AND CROSS DEVICE REPEATING SSP MESSAGES 9 PIN INTERFACE CABLE FOR IBM AT TYPE COMPUTERS 6 3 6 4 6 4 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 INSTALLATION vi ENVIRONMENT ENCLOSURE POWER BUDGET CABLING SURGE AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION BENCH TESTING TEST BEFORE YOU LEAVE GOES ANTENNA POINTING RETREIVING YOUR DATA 9 1 INTRODUCTION 9 1 LIVE READINGS 9 1 LAST MEASURED VALUE 9 1 LOGGED DATA 9 1 RAM CARDS 9 2 USING THE RAM CARDS 9 2 TRANSFERRING DATA FROM MEMORY TO ARAM CARD 9 3 HOOKING UP THE RAM CARD READER 9 4 USING THE RAMCARD PROGRAM FOR 8210 PCMCIA CARDS 9 4 FILE NAMING CONVEN
124. Setup MenulRA Rate RA Rate 3 TX Alarm Rate RR Alarm random reporting rate The RA Rate field contains a Time value indicating the average amount of Time allowed between random transmissions for all groups whose Menu Tree Reference 4 29 GOES RADIO SETUP Random Setup Menu RN Rate group triggers are in alarm state For example if you want to have a report from a group which is in alarm state every hour you would set RA Rate to 1 hour The same cautions concerning transmission collisions applies to RA Rate as applies to RN Rate see above GOES RADIO SETUP Random Setup Menu RN Rate RN Rate 2 TX Normal Rate RR Normal or Base random reporting rate The RN Rate field contains a Time value indicating the average amount of Time allowed between random transmissions for all groups when the group triggers are not in alarm state For example if you want to have a report from a group twice per day set RN Rate to 12 hours Be aware that because of potential collisions on the random channels you may have to set RNRate to 6 to 8 hours to average two transmissions per day after collision loss 4 30 INSPECT SYSTEM INSPECT SYSTEM INSPECT SYSTEM Inspect System and Test A special Inspect System sub menu is provided which allows the user to quickly examine how the 8200 is setup and whether or not the unit is operating properly Before leaving a field site you may find this sub menu to be useful in ensuring that a unit is properly
125. Speak list of both normal and alarm sensors 1 Speak list of live readings from all sensors vNN Speak last recorded value of sensor NN rNN Read sensor NN and then speak value nNN Speak name of sensor NN uNN Speak units of sensor NN tNN Speak trend of sensor NN aNN Speak alarm status of sensor NN cNN Speak current value of sensor NN Name Value Units oNN Speak old last archived value of Sensor NN Name Value Units Trend Alarm p Ask for password numeric or alpha touch tone key 2 ABC touch tone key 3 DEF etc wN Wait for any DTMF key to be pressed repeat on and acknowledge alarms if the key pressed was N m Enter speech menu system Allows a user to acknowledge alarms enable or disable alarm hear current data or hear stored data via the telephone z Repeat marker If user presses key or symbol is in message message will repeat from this point If no is in message it will repeat from the beginning Repeat from beginning of message or symbol until key is pressed 2NN Read a new value for sensor number NN from the user User enters the number with the DTMF keypad is used for a decimal point and is used to enter the number Menu Tree Reference 4 47 MODEM SETUP Dial In 8200 SENSOR NUMBERS 4 48 Sensor Name Analog 1 Analog 2 gt 5 O LQ Ww SPS PS QO OW QW wiw www GW MN N Nh N N No e a a L FR o o ojo N R Opwojfo ZI A OS QO N F O W oo
126. TIONS 9 4 CONVERTING DATA TO ASCII SPREADSHEET USABLE FORM 9 5 RADIO OPTIONS 9 6 ENABLING EXTERNAL RADIO SUPPORT 9 6 CONNECTING TO AN EXTERNAL RF MODEM 9 7 GOES DATA 9 7 CHAPTER 10 10 1 TINY BASIC 10 1 TINY BASIC INTRODUCTION 10 1 STEPS TO RUNNING AN EXISTING PROGRAM 10 1 CREATING A SIMPLE PROGRAM 10 2 STATEMENTS 10 3 INITIALIZATION 10 3 PERFORMANCE CONSIDERATIONS 10 3 EXPRESSIONS 10 4 EXAMPLES 10 5 INITIALIZING VALUES 10 5 WATCHING THE TIME TO MEASURE LOG 10 5 COMPUTE AN AVERAGE PEAK VALUES AND ACCUMULATE A SUM 10 6 INTERACTING WITH A USER 10 7 CREATING STATES TO CONTROL EXECUTION 10 7 CUSTOM PHONE HANDLING 10 8 CUSTOM GOES FORMATTING WITH TINY BASIC 10 11 USING MEM 10 13 COMMUNICATING WITH RS 485 SENSORS 10 14 TINY BASIC COMMAND SET 10 16 TINY BASIC FUNCTION SET 10 22 DEVELOPMENT CYCLE 10 26 DEBUGGING TROUBLESHOOTING 10 26 ERROR MESSAGE DESCRIPTION 10 26 CHAPTER 11 11 1 vii MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE 11 1 ENCLOSURE 11 1 SENSORS 11 1 CABLING 11 1 BATTERY 11 1 ANTENNA AND CABLE 11 2 8200 STATUS 11 2 DISASSEMBLY REASSEMBLY 8210 11 3 DISASSEMBLY REASSEMBLY 8200A 11 3 FUSES 11 4 MULTIPLE MODULE SUPPORT 11 5 JUMPERS AND CONNECTORS 8210 11 5 JUMPERS 8200A 11 8 SATELLITE MODULE JUMPERS 11 9 SATELLITE MODULE FAILSAFE RESET 11 9 RADIO MODULE JUMPERS 11 9 TELEPHONE MODULE JUMPERS 11 10 INITIALIZATION AND RESETS 11 11 INITIALIZATION 11 11 PASSWORD RESET 11 11 HARD RESET 11 11 CHAPTER 12 12 1 TROUBLESHOOTING 12 1
127. TT The modem standard is determined by the setting of switch 1 of S1 on the modem option card Set the switch according to Table SETTING THE MODEM STANDARD Switch 1 of S1 Standard Typical Usage Setting Bell USA Open CCITT most other countries Closed Factory default setting Pulse dial modes The pulse dial mode make break ratio is determined by switch 2 of S1 on the modem option card SETTING THE PULSE DIAL MAKE SPACE RATIO Switch 2 of Sl Make Space Ratio Typical Usage Setting 40 60 USA Open 33 67 most other countries Closed Factory default setting Setting the speaker mode The 8200 modem options include an audio amplifier and speaker connections for audible verification of modem operation The speaker is connected to J1 using shielded cable pins 1 and 3 are ground pin 2 is the audio signal The volume is controlled by R15 Set the speaker mode by placing a jumper between the two pins of J2 J3 or J4 as described below Speaker on J2 In this mode the audio on the telephone line will always be broadcast by the speaker This option is most useful in voice only applications Auto speaker switching J3 In this mode the speaker will automatically turn off when the telephone modem establishes communications with another modem The speaker will continuously remain on during speech operations This is the factory default setting Speaker turn off J4 Initialization and Resets In this mode the speaker
128. TUP DATINST GOES RADIO SETUP DATTMST GOES RADIO SETUP FORMAT ST GOES RADIO SETUP INTERNATL GOES RADIO SETUP RATE ST GOES RADIO SETUP SATID GOES RADIO SETUP TIME ST GOES RADIO SETUP TXMODE GOES RADIO SETUP RANDOM SETUP GOES RADIO SETUP RANDOM SETUP GOES RADIO SETUP RANDOM SETUP MENU TX ALARM RR GOES RADIO SETUP RANDOM SETUP MENU ALMINRR GOES RADIO SETUP RANDOM SETUP MENU CHANNEL RR P P P P MENU MENU DATA TX RR GOES RADIO SETUP RANDOM SETUP MENU DATINRR GOES RADIO SETUP RANDOM SETUP MENU DATTMRR GOES RADIO SETUP RANDOM SETUP MENU RA RATE GOES RADIO SETUP RANDOM SETUP MENU RN RATE INSPECT SYSTEM NSPECT SYSTEM BERT LOS RADIO FRONT PANEL ONLY NSPECT SYSTEM CLEAR STATUS NSPECT SYSTEM DISPLAY STATUS NSPECT SYSTEM ENTER SDI 12 CMD NSPECT SYSTEM GOES RADIO TEST NSPECT SYSTEM M MONITOR SSP COMMUNICATIONS PC ONLY NSPECT SYSTEM PERFORM SELFTEST o o o ax 8 0 axe 4 12 4 12 4 13 4 13 4 14 4 15 4 15 4 15 4 16 4 16 4 16 4 16 4 17 4 17 4 17 4 18 4 18 4 18 4 18 4 19 4 20 4 20 4 21 4 21 4 23 4 23 4 23 4 24 4 25 4 25 4 26 4 26 4 26 4 26 4 27 4 27 4 28 4 28 4 28 4 29 4 29 4 29 4 30 4 31 4 31 4 32 4 32 4 35 4 35 4 36 4 37 INSPECT SYSTEM PRODUCTION TEST INSPECT SYSTEM SELECT RADIO FRONT PANEL ONLY INSPECT SYSTEM T TALK TO MODEM OR TERMINAL PC ONLY INSPECT SYSTEM TEST LOS RADIO FRONT PANEL ONLY INSPECT SYSTEM TRANSMIT STATUS FRONT PANEL ONLY M
129. This version is designed to easily fit into custom enclosures Large Secure Memory When fully configured each 8200 system can control up to 384KB of battery backed up RAM Data Storage Recording 256KB of EPROM Operating System and 6KB of EEROM Setup Information Passwords amp Security The battery backed up memory is used as a log for recording data The standard 128KB memory can hold over 60 000 Introduction 1 3 Easily Networked readings which translates into nearly two years of data for one sensor recorded every 15 minutes The memory system uses Lithium batteries for long shelf life 2 years minimum and long safe data storage 1 year minimum Easily Networked The 8200s were designed from the start to work closely with other Sutron data collection and processing equipment Telemetry equipped units communicate in Sutron Standard Protocol thus allowing them to be used to relay data to Sutron 9000 Remote Telemetry Units which can then act as repeaters or data processors The 8200s can also talk directly to Sutron PC or VAX base stations Chapter 2 Unpacking and Initialization This chapter provides information to help you unpack the 8200 and start using it You will learn how to hook a battery to an 8200 and how to run a quick test to make sure it is operating properly Unpacking Unpacking e Carefully remove the 8200 from the shipping container e Save the container and packing materials as they may be
130. Time Tx Conducted Spurs Deviation VHF or UHF bands Transceiver Size Connector Front Panel Modem for external radio Bell 202 CCITT V 23 M 1200 M 1300 S 2200 S 2100 Isolated or Grounded 50 mv to 4 0 V p p 1200 bps 40 to 60 C 5 ma Quiescent 600 Ohms Standard Radio with modem 4 Watts 5 ppm over Temp 22 ma 12 5 VDC 1 350 ma 30 C to 50 C 12 dB sinad lt 45 uV lt 10 ms gt 52 dBc 5 Khz max 136 174 403 424 450 470 Mhz FCC Certified Mounts in the internal card slot of the 8200 Type N female 8200 Satellite Radio Module 8200 5000 SPECIFICATIONS 8200 5000 Satellite Radio Module Output Frequency Frequency Stability Harmonics Spurious Phase Noise Tx Power Modulation Data Rate Power Req Temp Range GOES 401 701 to 401 998 MHz Intnat 1 402 0025 to 402 0985 MHz Tunable to Meteosat Bands 5 ppm over temperature 5 ppm year aging gt 60dBc Meets NESDIS specification lt 3 deg RMS 2BL 20 Hz 8 5 Watts 5 dB Factory Set Bi Phase Manchester Encoded NRZ data 60 deg 100 Bps 12 5 Volts 2 Volts 11 mA quiescent 3 54 nom Transmit 40 to 60 C Operating 65 to 100 C Storage no batt Appendix B Blank Setup Sheets 8200 SENSOR SETUP UnitID Location Name SYSTEM SETUP ENABLE SENSORS 8200 Sensor Name Enable ON OFF SYSTEM SETUP CONFIG SENSORS m NA e A E a e ES E A E A A
131. To install this software on a hard disk create a new directory and use the copy command to copy the contents of this disk Example C gt Md 8200 C gt Cd 8200 C 8200 gt Copy A In the future you may reach the 8200 directory with the change directory command Example C gt Cd 8200 The disk contains the following files README TXT Important information about the programs LICENSE TXT Contains software license information TS8210 EXE Test set software communicate serially with an 8200 This replaces the older TS8200 software Each of the programs is described in the following sections Appendix E 8200 Test Set Software TS8210 This program is the test set software for the 8200 It allows a PC to communicate serially using COM1 or COM2 to an 8200 Using TS8210 you will be able to display complete menus for the 8200 manual setup of the 8200 upload send and download receive setups and basic programs download receive data manual test of 8210 and display status and troubleshooting information Note These same functions can also be performed by most other communications programs such as PC ANYWHERE PROCOMM CROSSTALK TS8210 is a communications program You may use these other programs in place of TS8210 if you like Running TS8210 TS8210 is run by simply executing the command TS8210 and the MS DOS prompt Make sure TS8210 is in the current directory or path TS8210 accepts command line arguments
132. Tree Reference This chapter describes in detail all the items that make up the 8200 setup The chapter is not meant to be read from front to back but is intended as a reference 8200 Menu Reference 8200 Menu Reference Each Menu item in the 8200 is documented in the following sections First all the items of the Main Menu are documented followed by each of the sub menus in alphabetical order The items within each menu sub menu are listed in alphabetical order based on the front panel name Each Menu item is described in a separate section identified by its Front Panel name PC Menu Name and Menu Path For example the entry for UnitID will appear as follows Path Name PC Item Name UnitID UnitID N Unit Name The Unit ID is used by the software to uniquely identify the 8200 to the user and to other systems in a network is al identify the data source for data dumped to the Item Description Front Panel Item Name At the top of each page is a header that contains the menu path for one of the items described on the page You can look at this header while turning pages to help you find a particular menu and item The items in a sub menu are described in alphabetical order based on the front panel name If you are looking for an item based on its PC item name you may need to search through all the items in a sub menu to find the PC item name The menu path shows all the menus you must use to select a particu
133. UREMENT _ BasTim Basic Run Time SCHEDULE MeasTim Measurement Time PwrTim Power Time SampTim Sample Time GOES SETUP DatTmST Data Time ST DatTmRR Data Time RR Menu Tree Reference 4 19 EEROM SETUP TimeLimit EEROM SETUP WTimeLimit TimeLimit L User Time Limit sec After a specified amount of time without any user activity on the front panel the 8200 normally turns off the front panel display to conserve battery power TimeLimit sets the amount of time in seconds a user can be logged in to the 8200 without pressing a key Longer times may be appropriate for certain situations but keep in mind that battery power is being used up If you are connected and logged into an 8200 using a PC TimeLimit will force an automatic logout if the period of inactivity reaches TimeLimit EEROM SETUP User Rate User Rate U User Baud Rate The User Rate setting determines the baud rate for the serial port when it is in the PROTOCOL USER LOGGER RADIO MODEM EXTMODEM or SENSOR modes Automatic baud rate detection is not supported 4 20 GOES SETUP GOES Models Only GOES SETUP GOES Models Only GOES SETUP G GOES Radio Setup Basic setup for self timed reporting is controlled through the GOES Radio Setup sub menu Eleven fields must be defined in order to make self timed transmissions The fields are TX Mode Transmission mode self timed random reporting or both Format ST Data message format Internatl Enable
134. UTRON 710 6200 DATA RECORDER OPERATIONS MANUAL Sutron Part No 8800 1059 Revision D O Sutron Corporation 21300 Ridgetop Circle Sterling Virginia 20166 703 406 2800 Fax 703 406 2801 TABLE OF CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 1 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 8200 FAMILY OVERVIEW 1 1 MODEL NUMBERS 1 2 WIDE RANGE OF APPLICATIONS 1 2 INPUTS SPECIFICALLY DESIGNED FOR HYDROMET APPLICATIONS 1 3 SIMPLE SETUP 1 3 EASY WIRING 1 3 SEALED UNITS 1 3 LARGE SECURE MEMORY 1 3 EASILY NETWORKED 1 4 CHAPTER 2 2 1 UNPACKING AND INITIALIZATION OOO A UNPACKING 2 1 INITIALIZATION 2 1 CONNECTING THE MAIN BATTERY 2 1 CONNECTING THE CHARGING VOLTAGE 2 3 QUICK TEST 2 3 CHAPTPR 3 22 2 3 1 GETTING TO KNOW THE 8200000 8200 FRONT PANEL 3 2 THE FRONT PANEL 3 1 THE DISPLAY 3 1 THE 6 BUTTON KEYPAD 3 1 TERMINAL STRIP 3 2 RAM CARD SOCKET 3 2 RS 232 SERIAL I O PORT 3 2 SDI 12 PORT 3 3 GROUND LUG 3 3 FRONT PANEL CONTROL OF THE 8200 3 3 TURNING THE DISPLAY UNIT ON AND OFF 3 3 CHANGING THE DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS 3 3 THE 8200 MENU TREE 3 3 POSITIONING WITHIN THE MENU TREE 3 6 CHANGING VALUES AND EXECUTING FUNCTIONS 3 7 PC CONTROL OF THE 8200 3 9 STARTING THE PC SOFTWARE 3 9 THE 8200 MENU TREE 3 10 SELECTING OPTIONS AND CHANGING VALUES 3 12 THE SETUP SHEET 3 13 EXERCISE 3 17 STEPS USING FRONT PANEL 3 17 STEPS USING THE TEST SET 3 18 OPERATING THE 8200 3 19 TURNING ON RECORDING MENU PATH RECORDING 3 19 VIEWING LIVE DATA MENU PATH VIEW DATA LIVE
135. Use SYSTEM SETUP Init Setup to clear out any old setup and initialize the values to default values 2 Enter the Unit ID from the Setup Sheet 3 Set the Date and Time Use an exact time reference if using a GOES model and set the time to GMT 4 Go to SYSTEM SETUP MEASMNT SCHEDULE Enter your selections from the setup sheet Note that many of the values will already be 0 so it will not be necessary to enter them again 5 Go to SYSTEM SETUP ENABLE Enable the sensors as shown on the sheet Change the names for any sensors that have a new name shown on the sheet 6 Go to SYSTEM SETUPICONFIG Enter the configuration data from the sheet one sensor at a time Note that you can enter the data only on sensors that have been enabled 7 Go to SYSTEM SETUP ALARM Enter the alarm data from the sheet one sensor at a time Note that you can enter the data only on sensors that have been enabled 8 Go to the EEROM menu and enter any values that are noted on the sheet 9 Go to the PROTOCOL menu and enter any values that are noted on the sheet 10 Go to the Modem setup or GOES setup and GOES random setup and enter the values The setup is now complete However recording is OFF because you have been making changes to the setup Be sure to turn recording ON to start the 8200 operating automatically to collect data Recording OFF ON When you are entering the setup the 8200 keeps Recording OFF This keeps the 8200 from being confused as y
136. W active Jumper Selectable Differential measurement reduces standard analog inputs to 6 or 4 if excitation is used DC Excitation 5V Interface Differential Input Range 5V to 100 mV 8200A Data Recorder Transmitter 8200 0014 Dimensions Weight Temperatures Processor Memory Battery Backup Real Time Clock Watchdog Timer Sample Intervals Data Retrieval Visual Display Serial Sensor SDI 12 SPECIFICATIONS All models 8200A 5 1 2 Hx 10 1 4 Wx 9 5 8 D including handles 7 lb Options affect weight see Data Sheets for 8200 Options 40 C to 50 C Operating NEC V25 plus Clock speed 5 MHz RAM 124K or 62 000 readings Expandable to a total of 380K or 190 000 Readings in 128K Increments Battery backed up EPROM 256K Operating System Lithium Battery storage 2 years min depending on environment Back up Life 1 year min Accuracy of 1 minute month GOES units have greater accuracy System Reset upon microprocessor failure 1 sec to 24 hr in 1 second increments RS 232 Port RAM Pack 10 sec download time 16 character alphanumeric LED Connection through RS 232 port Unit remains programmable through port Fully supported through SDI 12 port Communications Power Supply Power Consumption Control Output 1 Shaft Encoders Tipping Bucket ha El Gauges 5 max Counter Inputs 5 max Analog Inputs Press
137. XYMODEM transfers TS is a special version of TS8200 which is useful for debugging because it can display characters in ASCII hex and decimal Use F3 Mode to change the type of display you desire TS can also toggle the DTR line F10 which can be used to key and unkey base station radios or an 8200 set up as a base station radio CHKLOG This program can be run on any LOG file to determine whether the contents of the file are valid For instance although an upload using TS8200 may fail due to a dropped character the received data is still written in to a file If you do not see the Passed or Failed message you may not know whether to trust the data By running CHKLOG on this file you can tell if it was corrupted SETMGR This program displays and converts 8200 8200A or 8210 binary setup files display the contents of setup file convert a binary setup from one version to another convert a binary setup to an editable ASCII text file convert a text file back to a binary setup file Using SETMGR EXE you can display the contents of a binary setup file You can also convert the file to be compatible with different models of the 8200 SETMGR EXE may even be used to make simple edits to a setup by converting a binary setup to an ASCII text file editing that text file and then converting the text file back to a binary setup file Supported Models SETMGR EXE only work with setups from 8200 s running Version 3 or 4 software Setup files from
138. ables CTS RTS h w handshaking on the COM port This is useful if you are connecting an external high speed modem to the COM port The 8210 will stop transmitting when CTS is dropped and will drop RTS if it s receive buffer starts to fill up The default is OFF PROTOCOL SETUP Long Packets Long Packets L Long SSP Packets Enables the 8210 to use long SSP packets 1024 bytes as opposed to 256 bytes Long packets provide better performance and are the default Reasons to use shorter packets include very bad signal quality or a need to repeat messages thru an 8200 which only supports short packets PROTOCOL SETUP Master Master M Master Name The Master Name is used to name the destination whenever the 8200 makes a transmission using the internal or external radio For example with Master Name set to BASE the 8200 will format a packet with the destination of BASE when it makes the alarm transmission The name can be a base station another field station or a base station through a field station PROTOCOL SETUP ReplyDelay 4 54 ReplyDelay R Reply Delay 1s Reply Delay sets the Time that the 8200 will delay before replying to a message Its default value is 0 meaning no delay A value of 10 would cause the 8200 to wait 1 second after receiving a message before transmitting the reply Reply delay is useful if the system sending a request needs a second or two to get ready for the reply PROTOCOL SETUPIRetryln PROTOCO
139. adBand This value provides a dead band to prevent multiple alarms from occurring when the sensor value is very close to the alarm limits It is used in the detection of alarms based on HiLev LoLev ROCLev and Trend The dead band should be set to a number larger than the typical instability of the sensor For instance if it is 25 outside and your temperature sensor reports readings from 24 95 to 25 05 then you should set the sensor s dead band to a minimum of 0 050 SYSTEM SETUP ALARM OPTIONS Enable Enable E Enable Enable does much more than just turn on off alarm detection for a sensor For speech 8200 s it allows you to enter prefix and suffix phrases for each sensor For GOES 8200 s 1t sets up the self timed and random reporting groups The following are the values for Enable for all versions of the 8200 OFF Alarms are not enabled for this sensor Other alarm setup information is not saved when this is OFF ON Alarms are enabled for this sensor and or other alarm setup information is saved EXT ALL 8200 s Alarms are enabled for this sensor and the 8200 will make transmissions through the RS232 front panel port For this to work correctly the port must also be set up in the EEROM menu for RADIO SMDM SPEECH MODEM ONLY Alarms are enabled for this sensor and the 8200 will automatically dial out using the telephone modem based on the alarm condition Menu Tree Reference 4 59 SYSTEM SETUP ALARM OPTIONS Groups GOES
140. age power needed and the location of the site As a general rule of thumb use a panel that provides at least 10 times the average power needed Example Size a solar panel for a site with average current of 50ma e Power needed 10 current voltage 10 50ma 12 volts 6000 mwatts The minimum size panel should have an output of at least 6000 milliwatts A 9 watt panel should work just fine Note that the internal charger in the 8200 has a maximum output of 0 75 amps or 9 watts If you need to use a solar panel larger than 9 watts with the 8200 you should use an external regulator Many sites have serious problems because of bad cabling The following points should be considered as you plan and install your cabling 1 Keep cable length to a minimum The shorter the run the less chance of signal degredation 2 Use shielded cable especially if the run is greater than 75 feet The additional cost is minimal compared to the cost of logging bad data 3 Bury the cable when possible Make sure however that the cable used is rated for direct underground burial If not conduit should be used to protect the wires 4 Strip and tin tinning is another term for soldering the ends of the wires that connect to the 8200 If the ends are not tinned the wires might frey causing a bad connection and potential signal loss 5 Finally the most common mistake made when connecting to the 8200 occurs when the insulation is securred i
141. ains the reporting Time assigned to a particular station by NOAA NESDIS These times are in Universal Coordinated Time Formerly Greenwich Mean Time or GMT If you are keeping Time in any U S standard Time format you MUST convert this Time to UCT Time It is much better practice and safer to set the Time in the 8200 to UCT GMT WARNING If this Time is set incorrectly you will make transmissions in a Time window which is not yours You will then be in violation of the operating rules of the GOES system The Time ST is set by pressing kJ when S7 Time is in the display window Use the arrow keys to move right and left and to select appropriate numbers to set the Time Press after completing each sub field of the Time hours minutes and seconds GOES RADIO SETUP TXMode TXMode T Transmit Mode The TX Mode field controls whether the 8200 will transmit on the selected self timed channel the selected random reporting channel or both Select the desired mode by pressing the F key 4 26 GOES RADIO SETUP Random Setup Menu GOES RADIO SETUP Random Setup Menu GOES Radio Random Setup Menu Turning on random reporting and setting the reporting intervals is nearly identical to the steps required to set up for self timed reporting The setup for random reporting is controlled through the GOES Radio Setup sub menu Nine fields must be defined in order to make random transmissions The fields are TX Mode Transmission mode must be set
142. al etc From that point on the display should be in synchronization with reference time This can be verified by watching the display for a short period Options With Pre Defined Values Up to this point you have learned how to program in values for menu items fields that require user specific data such as the time and date In addition to these types of settings are fields which contain a limited number of pre defined unalterable values In this type of menu field the value of the field changes to the next legal value each time is pressed For example with the Display at Recording OFF pressing J will cause the 8200 to change the value to ON Some error or status messages may be displayed if the 8200 is not ready to start recording Similarly with Recording ON pressing J will cause the 8200 to change it to OFF PC Control of the 8200 At times there are more options than just ON and OFF For example the Serial field in the EEROM SETUP menu has the value options USER SENSOR LOGGER PROTOCOL RADIO EXTMODEM MODEM values in all CAPS do not contain sub menus Each time J is pressed the display scrolls to the next possible value for the field eventually moving back to the beginning of the list For the EEROM SETUP field of User Rate pressing FJ will cause the display to cycle through all the available baud rate values for the serial port 110 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 and so forth To lock in a value simply pr
143. all 230 Log Time RainDay RainDay Log the daily rainfall 240 Gosub 1000 Initialize for next time 999 Stop 1000 R Measure Rain Initialize last day rain to current 1010 X 99999 Initialize max temp to impossibly small 1020 N 99999 Initialize min temp to impossibly large 1030 C 0 Initialize number of averages taken to 0 1040 S 0 Initialize sum of temp to zero 1050 H INT Time Mod 86400 3600 Remember current hour 1100 Return Interacting with a User There will often be times when you will want to allow an operator to change the action of a basic program For instance after the 8200 reports an alarm that a reservoir level is low the operator may wish to give a command to the 8200 to turn a pump on While the 8200 may be programmed to turn the pump on automatically in many cases it may be advisable to make the 8200 wait for a qualified confirmation before taking such a critical action The most flexible way a basic program can get input from an operator is by using sensor variables An operator can set a sensor variable using LIVE READINGS from the front panel with CONFIG SENSORS value from the test set or dial up modem using DTMF codes with the speech modem or with Sutron Standard Protocol over a LOS Radio All your Basic program needs to do is check a sensor variable periodically for a special number and then take action For instance the following program will turn the switched 12 volt power on whenever the se
144. an highest point in table 170 flow mem i 1 stage mem i 2 mem i mem i 2 mem 1 1 mem 1i 1 200 log time stage stage 210 log time flow flow 220 stop 1000 mem 0 15 number of points in the table 1010 mem 1 3 4 mem 2 O 1020 mem 3 4 2 mem 4 3 1030 mem 5 4 4 mem 6 7 6 1040 mem 7 4 6 mem 8 15 1050 mem 9 4 8 mem 10 20 1060 mem 11 5 mem 12 28 1070 mem 13 5 2 mem 14 40 1080 mem 15 5 4 mem 16 54 Tiny BASIC 10 13 14 1090 mem 17 5 8 mem 18 94 1100 mem 19 6 mem 20 122 110 mem 21 6 2 mem 22 154 120 mem 23 6 4 mem 24 190 130 mem 25 6 6 mem 26 230 140 mem 27 6 8 mem 28 280 150 return Communicating with RS 485 sensors 10 14 The RS 485 port is accessed thru the TERM device using special on modes which redirects the data to the RS 485 interface RS 485 is a half duplex interface which requires software to determine when to drive the signal line and when to just listen The 8210 supports 3 different modes for handling the RS 485 transmitter and receiver enables Control 1 3 Full software control on mode 3 Control 1 4 Automatic transmitter enable by characters on mode 4 Control 1 5 Automatic transmitter enable by block on mode 5 To enable the RS 485 transmitter use with on mode 3 Control 26 2 T
145. an take several minutes see System Resets Fuse Blown open unit and check the fuses Troubleshooting 12 5 Troubleshooting Guide 12 6 PROBLEM Unit will not record data No recorded data for one sensor All sensor data recorded as zero Excessive power usage 8200 looses clock time or setup when main battery is changed Unable to transfer a setup from a RAM Card Battery slowly discharges even with external charger Display is too dim PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTION Recording is OFF in main menu turn Recording ON Log is OFF for sensor go to CONFIGURE SENSORS sub menu and turn on Log for missing sensor SLOPE set to zero in CONFIGURE SENSORS sub menu go to sub menu and set slope to correct value Use 1 0 if sensor reads out in user units Possible hardware problem go to LIVE READINGS sub menu and see if data are reaching 8200 if not perform hardware diagnosis on wiring and sensor Power usage is a function of how many sensors are connected how long they are turned on and how often they are sampled Minimize power consumption by sampling as infrequently as possible turning on the 12v power only when needed and keep the Measurement Interval as long as possible Disconnect the sensors to see if one of them is causing excessive power drain Do not leave the display on for long periods the red LED s use considerable power Make sure the on board RAM battery is gt 2 6 volts
146. ansmission format The 8200 supports two different formats standard decimal also known as SHEF and binary The following text gives a brief look at these different formats For more detailed information refer to Appendix D Also refer to the GOES RADIO SETUPW Data Items TX section of Chapter 4 for information on transmission lengths The standard decimal format is human readable while the binary format requires some processing before the values can be read The standard decimal format is also longer generally twice as long as the binary transmission This means that less data can be sent in the same amount of time using the standard decimal format An example of a standard decimal format message is as follows This message comes from a station with three sensors in the self timed group The sensors have been named HG PC and TA The battery voltage is the voltage of the battery just prior to transmission It is not the same as the battery sensor that can be enabled in the 8200 sensor list Retreiving Your Data 9 7 GOES Data G 0 15 10 20 10 15 i 0 15 50 49 TA O 15 22 1 22 0 VB O 12 Precip Temperature Battery Older gauge reading by data interval time Newest gauge reading Data Interval Offset Time Gauge Height The names HG PC TA and VB used in the transmission are the names given to the sensors in the 8200 These names default to ones such as ENCODER1 COUNTER and ANALOG so be sure to change the name if you want short
147. apped error status and N returns the number of resets The format for the E error status is as follows bit O Rom Error bit 1 Ram r w Error bit 2 EEROM r w Error bit 3 EEROM Checksum Error bit 4 Analog Error bit 5 Digital Error bit 6 GOES Timer Stopped bit 7 GOES Timer Error TAN Num Tangent of Num in degrees 10 24 Tiny Basic Function Set Function Syntax TIME ex display the time in HH MM SS 10 a Time Mod 86400 20 h Int a 3600 30 m Int a mod 3600 60 40 s Int a mod 60 50 h 210 m 210 s1210 TIMEOUT The current time in seconds since Jan 1 1985 with resolution to the hundredth of a second There are 86400 seconds in a day There are 3600 seconds in an hour You can calculate the start time of the current day with Time Time Mod 86400 You can then add or subtract seconds from this number to calculate absolute times Used to detect whether a device timeout has occured and can be used in conjunction with the WAITFOR and INPUT functions to tell whether input was terminated because of a timeout TIMEOUT returns 1 or true when a timeout has occured on a device otherwise 0 or false is returned Tiny BASIC 10 25 Development Cycle 26 For all but the shortest programs it makes the most sense to write the programs on a PC using your favorite editor and then upload the programs to the 8200 Then as changes are made to the program there are t
148. arriage return Alternatively the sensor can assert request to send to wake up the 8200 and then send data in ASCII followed by a carriage return The sensor can have 0 5 volt signals rather than the RS232 levels however it must use the same data sense as RS232 Sensors and Making Connections Each 8200 input connection is associated with 1 or more pre named sensors The following list gives all the standard names and the corresponding connections For example the sensor named ANALOGI refers to the analog input connected to Al and Encoder refers to the sensor connected to ENC1 1 and ENC1 2 Note that several sensors use the same connection such as Analog and ORG100 Both sensors can be enabled for the same connection as long as one of the sensors is not Encoder or Encoder2 These sensors cause the 8200 to reprogram the connections for quadrature detection making it impossible to make frequency or counter measurements The sensor names listed are the default names and can be changed through a command In chapter 3 page 3 8 we learned how to change values such as the Unit ID the Date and the Time For our example Analog can be renamed TEMP to identify it as a Choosing Sensors and Making Connections temperature measurement To do so enter the Analog field in the ENABLE SENSORS sub menu Menu Path SY STEM SETUP ENABLE SENSORS Analog1 Press the gt right arrow to bring up the flashing cursor over the first letter A As in setting t
149. art You should always use TS8210 or other X Ymodem programs to dump the log over telephone lines TS8200 should only be used on site and when the normal TS8210 dump takes too long You can also dump data directly into a program which can capture serial data to a disk file most communications programs support this capability The drawback is that the data is not checked for accuracy when you use this method If you want an ASCII dump of the data start your capture program and press A when you are prompted with Press ENTER to Start A for ASCII or ESC to Abort DUMP DATA Start Start D Start Date This is the date from which data will be dumped to the uesr s choice of RAM Card serial port or modem The date cannot be set to before the earliest date in the log or later than the latest date After data is dumped the start date will be automatically updated to the date of the next data to be dumped DUMP DATA Write Card Setup Write Card Setup W Write Setup to Ram Card Write Card Setup is used to write a copy of the 8210 EEROM to a RAM Card The RAM Card can then be taken to another 8210 and cloned by using the Read Card Setup option above Pressing the t key will cause the setup to be written to an installed ram card The following are possible messages Complete Successful Setup written to ram card No RAM Card RAM Card not installed or inaccessible Ram Failure Write operation failed RAM Card may be bad Writ
150. ay B ert Options brings up a sub menu of options as follows Choose S end Bert A sk for Bert L ocal Clear RJemote Clear G et Status or lt ESC gt S end Bert send a 1KB test message to all units in line of site A sk for Bert request a 1KB test message be sent by the selected destination L ocal Clear clears the BERT statistics for the 8210 R emote Clears requests that the selected destination clears its BERT statistics G et Status requests the BERT statistics from the selected destination Bert statistics consist of number of good Bert packets received out of total and an error distribution Each Bert packet consists of 4 bytes Each Bert message contains 256 packets or 1024 bytes The error distribution is an indication of where errors are occuring in the message Turn to page 12 5 for detailed suggestions on how to use M Monitor Communications to solve communications problems 4 36 INSPECT SYSTEM Perform Selftest INSPECT SYSTEM Perform Selftest Perform Selftest S Perform Selftest Perform Selftest provides a way of initiating some of the built in tests without going through a power up sequence The Selftest is started by pressing kJ on the front panel or S in the Inspect System Menu The Selftest performs the following tests RAM Test Read Write Test to RAM EPROM Test CheckSum of EPROM EEROM Test CheckSum of EEROM INSPECT SYSTEM Production Test Production Test P Production Test The Production test
151. be set up by means of the front panel buttons or a PC equipped with appropriate software Even though the 8200 can be set up without using the front panel it is important to know how to operate it in this way Turning the display unit on and off The blue outlined key on the front panel toggles the display on and off If the display is turned on and left on with no input output activity it will turn itself off after 60 seconds the time out period is settable This time out feature conserves battery power Changing the Display Brightness The brightness of the display can be changed by pressing EJ when the message Sutron 8210 xxvv is displayed The best time to do this is immediately after turning the display ON Each time te is pressed the brightness will change There are three brightness levels to choose from The 8200 Menu Tree The dark red front panel display area can be thought of as being a window into the menu tree Moving this window up and down the menu tree allows the user to see and control one level setting at a time The entire menu tree contains all of the items available to set up and control the 8200 Not all the items are needed each time the 8200 is set up In this chapter we will teach you how to move around through the various menus using the arrow keys You do not need to be concerned with the meaning of all Getting To Know The 8200 3 3 Front Panel Control of the 8200 the items in the menu The complete descri
152. ber of resets and use this as a reference for later visits 5a If you have a GOES unit it is advisable to perform a forced transmission to ensure proper operation of the Goes transmitter section and verify the external battery has enough capacity to allow a transmission Make certain when forcing self timed transmissions that you transmit into a dummy load to keep from interfering with another DCP Connect a voltmeter directly to the battery and observe the voltage drop while the transmissions are taking place If the voltage drops much more then 1 2 of a volt the battery is suspect and should be changed to avoid future problems When forcing random transmissions it is advised to transmit through the antenna and verify your downlink received it before you leave the general location of the site 5b If you have a telephone system have someone dial the station make sure it answers in the proper mode and communicates the data properly 5c If you have a LOS radio system have the base station poll the station and display the system status to look at communications statistics Installation 8 5 GOES Antenna Pointing 6 Contact the base station to make sure data are being received properly 7 Make sure the date and time are correct The time for GOES units should be exact 8 Press and make sure the Recording ON message is displayed or ON amp TX for GOES units GOES Antenna Pointing 8 6 It is important to properly aim the ant
153. cal Note the values will increase and accumulate with each tip The rollover is at 32767 To clear the accumulator use S System Setup C Clear Counters This will also clear all counters and will affect other rain gauges and encoders that may use Shaft Encoder Quadrature counters The following setup is for the Sutron model 5600 0530 Shaft Encoder Sensors Connection ENC1 ENC2 ENC1 1 ENC1 2 SWD12 GND 0 01 for U S use with 1 0 ft wheel 0 005 for metric use with 0 5 meter wheel 2 for U S 3 for metric 00 15 00 typical Slope RightDigits Measmnt Interval Wind Sensor with amplifier Circuit B green C blue A red D black The following setup is for the Sutron model 5600 201 Wind Sensor Sensors WindSpeed1 4 WindDirl 4 Connection SWD12 V Supply GND REF ENCx x WS SIG 6 8 Slope WindSpeedx Offset WindSpeedx Slope WindDirx Offset windDirx RightDigits Sample Interval Samples Measurement Interval Wind Sensor with amplifier Circuit 5V AZ EXC A1 A4 AZ SIG Install 1 Meg OHM pull down resistor if not on Squarer circuit 0 0980 m s 0 2192 mph 0 3216 fps 0 1904 knots 0 3528 km hr 0 0 360deg 5V 72 0 0 0 00 00 01 900 00 15 00 Hooking Up Sensors 6 9 Chapter 7 How To This chapter gives specific examples of how to use the 8200 The examples are meant to match the common situations you will enco
154. cent data in the log and OLDEST READINGS will start with the oldest data in the log To view data using the front panel first use Y to display VIEW DATA from the menu Press gt to display LIVE READINGS and press Y to display NEWEST READINGS Press gt to display COUNTER and gt again to see the most recent data The display format will appear as 135 1258 00024 The left number in the display 135 in the example is the Julian Calendar day Press gt to see the full date It will only be displayed briefly The second value in the display is the time and the third value is the recorded data To move back in time press a To move forward in time press Y To move back to the sensor list for NEWEST READINGS press E You may use 4 and Y to select any other sensor that is logged followed by P to view its data To view data using the test set press V to display the View Sensor Data menu followed by N for the newest readings A display of the most recent log entries will be displayed along with a menu across the top of the screen If all the sensors do not fit on the screen you will need to use the R and L keys or the arrow keys to scroll to the right and left You may also scroll up and down using the U and D keys or the arrow keys The 8200 setup is in RAM a type of memory that can be changed This makes it possible for the 8200 to be configured by the customer to function a particular way The setup can be
155. ched Power Time A Samples to Average L Measurements per Log B Basic Run Interval R Basic Run Time O Switched Power Options Choose Configuration M Measure L Log A Average Interval Calibration V Value S Slope O Offset E Elevation R RightDigits PC Menus Upload Download Data Menu D Start Date P Protocol A Auto Dump C Send to Ram Card S Send to Serial Port or Modem R Read Setup from Ram Carrd W Write Setup to Ram Carrd T Transfer Setup B Transfer Basic Program Y Ymodem Ram Card File s Transfer Raw Ram Card Image V View Ram Card Directory E Erase Ram Card EEROM Setup Menu M Serial Port Mode U User Baud Rate R Radio LOS Baud Rate C Com Baud Rate T Transfer Baud Rate S SDI 12 Baud Rate E Enter Key Required D Log Dump Mode L User Time Limit sec O Power On Delay 10 ms P Pressure Delay 10 ms A Analog Delay 10 ms K Auto Startup Keys 1 Time Format 2 Date Format B Basic Prog Size KB Protocol Setup Menu M Master Name C Carrier Delay 1s R Reply Delay 1s A Ack Delay 1s 1 TX Normal Rate 2 TX Alarm Rate 3 Retry Interval N Number of Retries U Use RS 485 w SDI 12 L Long SSP Packets H H W Handshake on COM Inspect System and Test S Perform Selftest D Display Status C Clear Status E Enter SDI 12 Commands T Talk to Modem or Terminal G GOES Radio Test M Monitor SSP Communicat
156. cified in SampInt before making more measurements This continued until either all the measurements have been taken or the next cycle time arrives This latter test is a safeguard to prevent the 8200 from taking too long to make the average In step 3 the 8200 measures all sensors with MEASURE ON and then logs the data if required This starts immediately if the averaging terminated because of the cycle time or if the Measurement Time equals the Sample Time With this information in mind try to predict the behavior of the 8200 on the following setup MeasTim 00 07 30 MeasInt 00 06 00 SampTim 00 04 30 SampInt 00 00 01 Samples 180 PwrMode OFF Since PwrMode is OFF we look at SampTim and MeasInt to determine when the 8200 starts its sampling Given the values above the 8200 starts its averaging at 00 04 30 00 10 30 23 58 30 throughout the day Once it starts its averaging it will take samples every second SampInt 00 00 01 until 180 samples have been taken This will normally finish at 00 07 29 00 13 30 and so forth after the 180th sample With MeasTim set to 07 30 00 the 8200 will finish its sampling at 7 30 00 whether or not it is done with the averaging and then make its measurements of the other sensors and log the data What would happen if the MeasTim were set to 00 07 00 In this case the averaging would be cut short by about 30 samples The average is still computed correctly using the fewer number of samples
157. ck Setup This chapter focuses on the setup sheet and gives hints on filling it out as well as entering the information into the 8200 Review Review In the first three chapters of this manual you learned how to power up an 8200 and use the front panel and PC menus You were also introduced to the reference chapter of all the 8200 menu items In the remaining chapters of this manual you will learn more about its many applications in actual field operations Covered in these chapters will be topics such as hooking up sensors the different field setups you may need to configure the 8200 for using the Tiny Basic programming language to maximize your control over the 8200 operation and other relevant information If you are a new user please work through Chapter 3 before continuing through the rest of this manual Once you have mastered the concepts in Chapter 3 you will be prepared for the information that follows Basic 8200 Setup Remember that the Setup Sheet is the tool used to specify the details of the 8200 setup You should create a setup sheet for each site and use it when setting up a site Do not trust your memory for this important information Blank setup sheets are found in Appendix B We will now take you through the steps of filling out the Setup Sheet Use the reference Chapter 4 to get complete details on any of the fields 1 UNIT ID and Location Information Pick a name or number for the Unit ID If you are using
158. ck a high limit low limit and rate of change limit for each enabled sensor Deadband values are also available for each limit Triggering of any of the sensor alarms can occur as a value goes over a limit or when it falls below the limit An 8200 with a speech modem can also check trending information Trending determines whether the reading of a particular sensor is rising or falling This information is particularly useful in talking stations when speaking water levels or barometric pressure e g the water level is 8 48 and rising or the barometric pressure is 29 95 and falling for use with 8200 SPEECH Models As mentioned earlier the ALARM OPTIONS do more than just control alarms e The GOES 8200 uses some of the alarm information to define its self timed and random reporting groups e A speech 8200 uses the prefix and suffix to determine how to speak a particular sensor Menu Tree Reference 4 57 SYSTEM SETUP ALARM OPTIONS e Any 8200 communicating using SSP will use the Alarm Enable to include the sensor in the reply to a poll for current data The options in Alarm will be used even though you may not have a need for alarms at a site see 7 8 for more detailed information You set the ALARM OPTIONS in a manner similar to setting the Configuration options From the front panel the 8200 will display a sub menu of sensors Use the 4 or Y front panels to select the desired sensor and press gt You will then be able to vie
159. connection to the 8200 LAST wire multiple sensors together first don t take chances with shorts The entire system load when the SDI sensors are not communicating should be only a few milliamps per sensor This will depend on the manufacturer of the sensors being used You can measure the current flow through the 12 to check out the correct system operation If the current draw is too high you will drain the system battery Current draw under sample conditions will be much higher The maximum current used on the 12V line should not exceed 2 amps at any time Appendix A 8200 Specifications 8210 Data Recorder Transmitter 8210 0014 Dimensions Weight Temperatures Processor Memory Battery Ram Backup Data Storage Internal Battery Real Time Clock Watchdog Timer Sample Intervals Removable Memory Card Type Data Retrieval Visual Display Serial Sensor SDI 12 RS 485 SPECIFICATIONS All models 8210 12 x10 x6 NEMA 4 enclosure molded fiberglass polyester construction With quick release latches Other enclosures available 10 Ib Typ without battery Options affect weight see Data Sheets for 8200 Options 40 C to 60 C Operating NEC V25 plus 16 Bit Processor Clock speed 5 MHz internal Full real time multitasking capability provided RAM Battery backed up 122K or 62 000 readings Expandable to a total of 378K or 190 000 Readings in 128K Increments EPRO
160. corded or was erased S 3 o e o The number of sensors transmitted depends on the number of sensors in the self timed group and the number of log records sent depends on the Number of Data Items selected in the 8200 The most recent data is always sent first BATTERY is a 1 byte binary encoded number representing the battery voltage of the 8200 before the transmission The range of the number will be 32 to 31 and can be converted to volts by multiplying by 0 234 and adding 10 6 allowing a range of 3 1 to 18 1 volts Here is a message with 2 data items per transmission and with three sensors enabled in the selftimed group B1 Gt Sx ieGs Sr il PERPE 1 vk l Battery Voltage eb Lo o esas Temp 2 ADAP Is Ll Alb l Precip 2 EPEE H opea Stage 2 LIIL I 4 Temp 1 IS Precip 1 Il 4 Stag 1 he self timed group number 1 The data values are Delta Time Group ID Block ID SELF TIMED SHEF DATA FORMAT This format is used when the 8200 makes a self timed transmission and the format has been set to SHEF The format of the transmission data is lt NAME1 gt lt OFFSET gt lt INTERVAL gt lt DATA1 gt lt DATA1 gt lt DATA1 gt lt NAME2 gt lt OFFSET gt lt INTERVAL gt lt DATA2 gt lt DATA2 gt lt DATA2 gt lt NAME N gt lt OFFSET gt lt INTERVAL gt lt DAT
161. cted the 8200 will not dial out based on alarm conditions ON When this option is selected the 8200 can dial out based on the alarm conditions programmed for each sensor MODEM SETUP Dial Out MODEM SETUP Dial Out Dial Out message O Dial Out Message This field represents the message the 8200 will speak when it dials out The construction of the message is identical to that described previously for DialIn Refer to the information on Dial In for details DialOut has built in messages available that are a little different from Dialln The main difference for the built in DialOut messages is that all the messages speak the ID and some messages make 1t possible to acknowledge alarms The built in messages are as follows IdArcAck Speak the ID archived data and all acknowledgment of alarms IdLivAck Speak the ID live data and allow acknowledgment of alarms IdArcMen Speak the ID archived data and speech menu IdLivMen Speak the ID live data and speech menu MODEM SETUP Number Rings Number Rings N Number of Rings This field indicates how many times the telephone should ring before being answered by the 8200 MODEM SETUP PhonePass PhonePass P Phone Password The 8200 supports a password for voice and data communications The password may be entered as a number or as a string of characters The maximum length of the password is 5 characters or digits NOTE If characters are used and the 8200 is used in voice mode
162. d computer terminal to the RS 232 port an 8200 can be used to communicate with another computer NOTE Once this mode has been entered there is no way to return to User mode except by the front panel EXTMODEM _ This is used when you will connect an external modem to the RS232 port The 8200 cannot use the external modem to dial out a clever Tiny Basic program might be able to dial out in a limited fashion A DIP switch or a software option usually has to be set in the modem to ignore DTR data terminal ready is pin 20 on a DB25 Usually modems will not answer the phone if DTR is not asserted and since the 8200 is usually powered down it does not assert DTR The CD carrier detect is pin 8 on a DB25 must be wired to CTS clear to send pin 4 on the 8200 DB9 so that the modem will wake up the 8200 when a call comes in OFF The 8200 will not automatically use the serial port conduct a login session if a terminal is connected It will however still be available for data transfer serial sensor or SDI 12 operations EEROM SETUP TimeFmt TimeFmt Time Format NORMAL Time ranges from 00 00 to 23 59 59 Data logged at exactly midnight will have the Time stamp of 00 00 00 of the next day 24HOUR Time ranges from 00 00 01 to 24 00 00 Data logged at exactly midnight will have the Time stamp of 24 00 00 Users must reset not necessarily change the following parameters in order for the Time Format Command to take effect SYSTEM SETUP MEAS
163. d the basic program For example when running PROCOMM this is done by pressing PGUP to perform an upload send basic program to the 8200 or PGDN to perform a download receive basic program from the 8200 Other software will have a similar function If you are downloading the basic program select the YMODEM protocol so the software will be able to automatically name the file for you If sending a file you may use either XMODEM or YMODEM Make sure you have set the BasicSize option in the EEROM Setup menu see page 4 16 to a large enough size to accommodate your program otherwise the 8200 will not be able to receive the whole program The 1K byte default is only large enough for very small programs For example If MSDOS shows the file size of your program to be 5269 then the BasicSize must be set to at least 6 k bytes Upload Download Data Transfer Raw Ram Card Image PC Only 4 12 l Transfer Raw Ram Card Image Transfer Raw Ram Card Image is used to send upload or receive download the entire contents of the RAM Card This option could potentially be used to recover data from an accidentally formatted or damaged RAM Card or to transfer a software upgrade to a RAM Card Upload Download DatalTransfer Setup PC Only Upload Download DatalTransfer Setup PC Only T Transfer Setup Transfer Setup is used to send upload a setup to an 8200 or receive download a setup from an 8200 To use this function you must be runni
164. de Of ENABLE CONFIG ALARM SENSORS Sensor 2 3 8 18 22 Name Analog2 Analog3 Counter WindSpeedl WindDirl Enable on on on on on Measure on on on off off Average off off off on on Log on on on on on Intrvl 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Slope 64 37 100 00 0 01 0 10 72 00 Offset 99 10 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Elevation 0 0 0 0 0 Right Digits 1 0 2 0 0 To make the wind vector a one minute average using the samples taken in the minute before the data is logged enter the measurement schedule as follows noting the change to the sampling time and the samples to average MEASUREMENT SCHEDULE MeasInt 00 15 00 SampInt 00 00 01 MeasTim 00 00 00 SampTim 00 14 00 PwrTim 00 00 00 Samples Set 60 Measmnt Log al BasInt 00 00 00 BasTim 00 00 00 PwrMode off 7 2 Compute the Slope and Offset for a Sensor Compute the Slope and Offset for a Sensor Most sensors produce an analog output or frequency 8200 measurements report the values in the units of volts or Hz unless some action is taken to scale the value into its final units The slope and offset are used to perform this scaling As long as your sensor is a linear sensor slope and offset can be used to scale it If you have a non linear sensor and want the 8200 to do the computation you will need to use the BASIC capability of the 8200 A linear sensor is one that has output that can be graphed as a straight line Examples of linear sensors are
165. detection is not enabled for this sensor ABOVE A Rate of Change alarm is generated if the absolute value of the difference between the current data and a previous value is above the ROC Level plus the dead band BELOW A Rate of Change alarm is generated if the absolute value of the difference between the current data and a previous value is below the ROC Level minus the dead band this is used to generate alarms when a sensor is not changing or changing slower than desired NOTE a value for ROC Level must be entered in order to select this option The previous value can be either the last collected data or the last transmitted data depending on the setup See ROC Level below 4 64 SYSTEM SETUP ALARM OPTIONSIROCLev SYSTEM SETUP ALARM OPTIONS ROCLev RocLev R ROC Level An alarm is generated when the current sensor value differs from a previous sensor value by more than this amount plus the dead band value The previous value used in the comparison can be one of two values depending on how the 8200 is set up e last alarm transmitted value isused as the previous value for sensors enabled to transmit over a radio or GOES e last measured value isused as the previous value for sensors enabled to transmit over the telephone or not enabled to transmit The difference between the two is significant When the comparison is done based on the value transmitted in the last alarm transmission RANDOM transmission for GOES the 82
166. does not show up in the labels pressing F4 does a push to DOS Be sure to type EXIT to return to the program Appendix E 8200 Test Set Software Using TS8210 Menus When you press SETUP or XYMODEM TS8210 will display its own menus To work with these menus you should understand the following conventions e Ifyou have a mouse you may click on fields and controls as desired e Ifa field or control is has a letter number highlighted you may select it by press ALT along with the letter or number For example COM1 has the 1 highlighted Pressing ALT 1 causes COM1 to be selected e You may press TAB to move between fields and controls Each time you press TAB you will see the cursor move to highlight a different control or field Within a field such as baud rate you may use the arrows to select the desired option SETUP Pressing the F2 SETUP key brings up several menus that allow you to set the com port baud rate foreground and background colors The first menu is for setting the com port and baud rate Use the conventions explained above to set the desired communications port and baud rate For example to set the com port to COM2 e click the in front of COM2 with a mouse then click on OK or if you do not have a mouse you might try either e press ALT 2 to select COM2 then press ALT O for OK or e TAB until the cursor is on COM1 Use the down arrow to select COM2 Then TAB until OK is highlighted and press ENTER After se
167. e ALERT is acknowledged and the status changes to ALARM If it is not pressed the 8200 continues its alarm notification with the next phone number D Data Mode the 8200 will send the data out in the same format as VIEW ALARMS It will then automatically acknowledge the alarm and change the status from ALERT to ALARM if a modem connection was made Menu Tree Reference 4 39 MODEM SETUP AnswerMode H Placing an H Hayes command before a phone number will allow Hayes commands to be added before the phone number The dial command must also be included For example HS8 30DT5551212 123 will set the S8 register time to pause for a comma to 30 seconds DT will tell the modem to dial the phone number using touch tone and the comma after the number will delay 30 seconds and then dial the rest the 123 This sequence might be used to dial a pager and enter the code 123 The H option can be combined with other dial options by placing the H after the dial option For example the SHS11 200DT5551212 will send an SSP alarm using a long 200ms delay between touch tone digits DIALING COMMANDS P Pulse Dial Pause Flash Wait for 1 8th second Wait for silence W Wait for second dial tone Example The phone number SP17035551212 will cause the 8200 to pulse dial a base station at the phone number 17035551212 Example The phone number C5551212 will dial up a computer that has a special program written t
168. e Alarm Setup enabled for ON which allows the prefix and suffix to be entered for each sensor The prefix defines what is said before the value is spoken usually the sensor name The suffix defines what is said after the value is spoken usually the units MODEM SETUP MEASUREMENT SCHEDULE DialOut off MeasInt 00 15 00 AnswerMode VO amp DA SamplInt 00 00 01 Number Rings 3 MeasTim 00 00 00 PhonePass DEMO SampTim 00 00 00 DialIn E AS i PwrTim 00 00 00 DialOut Samples Set 900 PhoneNumber Measmnt Log 1 PhoneNumber BasInt 00 00 00 PhoneNumber BasTim 00 00 00 Redial 00 03 00 PwrMode on ENABLE CONFIG ALARM SENSORS Sensor 1 4 9 12 24 28 Name AirTemp BaroPress SolarRad RainFall WindSpeed WindDir Enable on on on on on on Measure on on on on off off Average off off off off on on Log on on on on on on Intrvls 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Slope 64 37 7 61 2000 00 0 01 1 68 72 00 Offset 99 10 3 49 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Elevation 0 0 0 0 0 0 Right Digits 2 2 2 2 1 1 Alarm Setup Enabled for on on on on on on High Alarm off off off off of off High Level 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Low Alarm off off off off of off Low Level 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 ROC Alarm off off off off of off ROC Level 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Deadband 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Trending off off off off of off Prefix 200 201 206 152 211 209 Suffix 202 205 130 124
169. e Ram card is already full you will need to erase it first before you can reuse the card WriteProtect The card cannot be written without changing the write protected switch on the card DUMP DATA Erase Ram Card 4 8 Erase Ram Card E Erase Ram Card Prepares a PCMCIA RAM Card to be written to by the 8210 and erases any existing files on the RAM Card The format placed on the card is technically a floppy disk compatible DOS FAT file format with one big file called RAMCARD RCD RAMCARD RCD can contain multiple data and setup dumps This format can be read directly by laptops and card readers which have the standard PCMCIA file system drivers loaded RAMCARD RCD can be copied to the PC where individual dumps can be extracted using the RAMCARD utility or it can be operated on directly DATA Ram Card RAMCARD RCD is a binary file and should only be operated on by the RAMCARD utility DATA Ram Card Ram Card C Send to Ram Card By inserting a PCMCIA RAM Card into the front panel socket and setting this command use the amp J button selected data will transferred from the 8200 to the RAM Card New data is always appended after any existing data on the RAM Card A single RAM Card may contain data dumps and setups from one or more 8210 s Once a RAM Card fills up it will have to be erased inorder to reuse the card be sure to copy important data off the card first The 8200 will transfer as much data from the log as will
170. e and forward smart repeater To test a station on the other side of a repeater request a BERT message from that repeater then request stats from the field unit To test a station thru multiple repeaters REP1 and REP2 to unit UNITNAME a side effect must be used Simply address an SSP message to REP1_REP2 When the repeater REP2 tries to send the message to unit it will substitute a BERT message for the original message Then you will need to set the Master name back to REP1_REP2_UNITNAME and request remote BERT statistics Lastly BERT testing is also possible thru a modem port but it cannot be initiated by the 8200 1 The following Basic program can be used to send a BERT message out the COM1 2 port of a PC out a Base Station Radio or to an 8200 directly connected 10 OPEN COM1 1200 N 8 1 CS DS FOR OUTPUT AS 1 20 SLEEP 1 30 FOR 0 TO 255 40 PRINT 1 CHR 16 CHR 27 CHR i CHR 255 1 50 NEXT i 60 SLEEP 1 70 CLOSE 1 INSPECT SYSTEM Clear Status Clear Status C Clear Status The Clear Status function clears out error and communication status messages Checksums are also set to zero To recompute them you must use the Selftest option The number of resets is not cleared by this function INSPECT SYSTEM Display Status Display Status D Display Status Display Status gives you a look at what the system is doing Pressing J on the front panel or pressing D in the Inspect Syste
171. e final values How To 7 3 Printing the Setup A 5 psi pressure sensor has a calibrated span of 36 22 millivolts and an offset of 1 22 mv This example gives all the information necessary but is in a different form We know that x1 y 1 1 22 0 We know that Y2 is 5 psi but they do not give us the X2 value Instead they give the span from which we can compute X2 knowing that X2 Span X1 Or we can just use the span as it is X2 X1 So we have Slope Y2 Y 1 X2 X1 5 0 0 03622 138 04 and offset 0 0 00122 slope 0 168 Notice that we converted the millivolts to volts before using the values in the equation because the x values must be in the same units as the raw reading Printing the Setup To print an 8200 setup the following steps must be performed 1 Transfer the Setup to a PC see Upload Download a Setup later on in this section 2 Run SETMGR See Appendix E for information on SETMGR Example SETMGR SITE34 SET gt SITE34 DAT 3 Print the file Example PRINT SITE34 DAT Schedule Details The 8200 uses the fields entered in SYSTEM SETUPIMEASMNT SCHED such as MeasInt and MeasTim to control the when it measures and averages data from sensors This section gives a more complete description of how all the measurement schedule fields interact The best way to describe the 8200s use of these fields is to give a quick look at the routine the 8200 runs to use the values This routine has the foll
172. e items in the menu provide a means to set up the following submenus Measurement Schedules Enable Sensors Configure Sensors ALARM OPTIONS Basic Program Change Password Init Setup Zero Counters See separate headings starting with SYSTEM SETUP for complete information Time T Set Time Time represents the current 8200 clock time All 8200 functions are performed relative to this Time and the Date see above Therefore an effort should be made to keep them accurate The Time is used as a reference for initiating measurements and for sampling The Measure Time MeasTim and Sample Time SampTim settings can be found under the measurement schedule Menu Path SYSTEM SETUP MEASUREMENT SCHEDULE menu The 8200 compares its time with these times to determine whether or not to start sampling and measuring Changing the time affects only when the next sampling or measuring cycle will start It will not stop the current functions However altering the time setting may cause the 8200 to skip a sampling or measuring cycle if the new time set skips the interval or does not permit the current functions to complete before the next interval begins See Chapter 3 12 for examples of setting the time UnitID N Unit Name The Unit ID is used by the software to uniquely identify the 8200 to the user and to other systems in a network It is also used to identify the data source for data dumped to the RAM Card and serial port The Unit ID can be up to
173. e station 2 send station 1 a BERT message The local statistics will show how well station 1 is receiving station 2 15 If you cannot get steps 1 through 13 to function reliably then the rest of your radio system will not work Be sure to set the PROTOCOL SETUP Master field to the name of your master station when you are finished if you changed it If you are using a PC you will be able to do the above tests using the INSPECT SYSTEM M Monitor Communications Menu This menu allows you to display the status of carrier detect key unkey the transmitter select a destination for transmissions view BERT information view mail information and more For a complete description of this menu refer to the information on page 4 36 If you are testing without a PC you can use the Front Panel INSPECT SYSTEM Test LOS Radio command Before doing so you may need to use the INSPECT SYSTEM Select Radio command to select between a radio in slot 1 slot 2 or external radio modem Troubleshooting Guide The following table lists a variety of problems which may occur with an 8200 along with the likely cause solution PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTION Display will not light 8200A ON OFF switch in OFF position Remove switch cover and press switch 8210 battery disconnected Open unit and connect battery cable to J6 Battery discharged or worn out open unit and check battery voltage External charging circuit faulty System may be resetting which c
174. e the GROUPS field for each sensor Leave a 1 in the second position of GROUPS if you want to keep the self timed group Y ou must also define the specify the type of alarm by setting High Alarm Low Alarm or ROC Alarm to the appropriate value and entering a value in the High Level Low Level or ROC Level 2 GOES Setup Random transmissions are already in the binary format with the short carrier so there are no fields to set these values for the random channel You will need to set Satellite ID as assigned by NESDIS and the Transmit Mode to RANDOM or BOTH 3 GOES RANDOM Setup The channel used for the random transmission is set in the Random Setup Menu along with fields that determine how often transmissions are made when the 8200 is in and out of alarm The fields also control what data is pulled from the log for the transmission Refer to the reference Chapter 4 and also to examples in Chapter 7 for more information on these fields Entering The Setup Entering The Setup With the Setup Sheet in hand it is a simple matter to enter it into the 8200 As already described you can use the front panel keys or a PC to enter the setup You should note that the 8200 is capable of working as a Logger after just the basic setup information described above has been entered The modem or radio specific information simply activates and controls the different communications options The following steps should be followed to enter a setup 1
175. e the size of the buffer turn the device on print characters to the buffer turn the device off set the return code in variable Z and stop Return codes are Z 0 do not transmit Z 1 send the buffer Z 2 send normal Binary The BUFFER device uses memory in the Basic area at the end of the MEMO array When you allocate the BUFFER the number returned by FREEMEM will go down Be sure to set the Basic Size in the EEROM Setup menu large enough to accomodate the Basic Program the MEMO array and the BUFFER The following snippet of code will open the BUFFER device initialize the BUFFER size to 500 bytes turn it on print a test string get the buffers length turn it off close it and then print the length and the buffer to the screen Printing the length and the buffer to the screen are performed for demonstration purposes actual formatting code would not do this of course real code would not just put This is a test message in the buffer either a 1000 Open BUFFER 1010 Control 0 500 1020 Control 1 positions 1030 Print This is a test message Print a message semi colon prevents a cr lf 1040 Control 4 Select the BUFFER device Allocate 500 bytes Turn the Buffer on resets the 4 Request the buffer length 1050 a Status Store the length in to a variable 1060 Control 2 Turn the device off 1070 Close Deselect the BUFFER device 1080 Print Length a
176. e they are accessed directly e The MEM array is slower to access because of the array index calculation Tiny BASIC 10 3 e Direct access to sensor names is the slowest because the names must first be found in a table before they can be used As a direct result of this the sensors at the Analog can be accessed faster than Battery and much faster than SDI9_9 e You may wish to keep comments out of the code because the interpreter must skip over them each time the program runs e Shorter line numbers will be parsed at a faster rate than longer ones e A line number cache is maintained so that repetitive line number jumping is quick This is compared to jumping to a new line number which requires the parser to conduct a search Line numbers are located using a binary search method so the search time will vary according to the length of the program and not so much by the position of the line number in the program e Using multiple statements on a line reduces the number of bytes which must be parsed e Use no more than one space between commands to reduce the amount of whitespace the interpreter has to skip e Reducing equations to their simplest forms will help although extra parentheses should be avoided e Move all calculations which only need to be calculated once to the initialization part of your program Expressions 10 4 Expressions can be used where ever a number or value is required by the program Expressions consist of nu
177. eProtect The RAM Card is write protected NeedErase The RAM Card needs to be erased Upload Download Data Protocol PC Only P Protocol The default serial transfer protocol can be set to either XMODEM or YMODEM If available use the YMODEM option which features faster transfers 1024 bytes versus 128 bytes at a time automatically supplies the filename and doesn t roundup the file size Menu Tree Reference 4 11 Upload Download DatalTransfer Basic Program PC Only Upload Download DatalTransfer Basic Program PC Only B Transfer Basic Program Transfer Basic Program is used to send upload or receive download the basic program to the 8200 To use this function you must be running software on the test set that supports XMODEM or YMODEM such as TS8210 or PROCOMM When this function is selected the 8200 will prompt Ready for X Ymodem Upload Download press ESC to abort If you are running TS8210 the transfer program menu will also be displayed This menu allows you to select between Receive and Send You will also be able to specify a file name if you are sending to the 8210 If you are receiving the basic program and using YMODEM the program will automatically name the setup file as unitid BAS If this file already exists on disk you will be prompted to replace the file or enter a unique file name If you are running a different communications program you will need to instruct your program to upload or downloa
178. eaningful numbers using the MOD function Here are some interesting times you can derive by combining the Time function with the MOD function Day of the Week Int Time Mod 604800 86400 gt 0 Mon 1 Tue 2 Wed 3 Thu 4 Fri 5 Sat 6 Sun Hour of the Day Int Time Mod 86400 3600 gt 0 to 23 Minute in the Hour Int Time Mod 3600 60 gt 0 to 60 Tiny BASIC 10 5 Example Let s toggle switched power every Thursday at 3pm 15 00 hrs 100 The program should be run at least once an hour 110 Compute D day of week and H hour of day 120 D Int Time Mod 604800 86400 H Int Time Mod 86400 3600 130 If D 3 And H 15 And X 0 Then Power 1 Sleep 1 Power 0 X 1 140 If H lt gt 15 Then X 0 X prevents more than one toggle at 15 00 hrs 150 Stop Compute an Average peak values and accumulate a sum 10 6 Often you will wish to perform special processing on sensor data which the 8200 can not normally perform Possible examples include find min and max values summing a sensor and calculating daily totals Fortunately Tiny Basic can accomplish all of these operations The following is a sample program which calculates hourly average min and max temperature and daily total rainfall The following sensor names should be set in the enable sensor s menu for use of the program Temp Input for measure air temperature Analogl 8 Rain Input connected to a tipping bucket rain gauge Counter 1 4
179. ecause it is a subset of BASIC it is called TINY BASIC TINY BASIC supports full floating point expressions control statements measurements logging alarms custom displays and more It is fully compatible with the menu driven software Because this subject does require some prior knowledge of the BASIC language we ask you to proceed only if you feel you have an adequate grasp of the programming conventions of BASIC You will find TINY BASIC to be especially useful for special conversions on sensors smart sampling or logging special alarm detection control applications and custom phone voice messages The TINY BASIC language is based on a subset of the BASIC language used on most personal computers The following are some of the features and limitations of 8200 Tiny Basic Single letter variable names A Z No string variables or string functions literal strings are allowed Interpreter with immediate mode Programs can be entered modified and tested interactively or transferred to or from a test set Line numbers are required Full IEEE 64 bit floating point support Full expressions and logarithmic functions Single nested FOR NEXT loops and GOSUB RETURN Program size may be increased up to 64K bytes Sensor values may be accessed directly and or used as variables Unused program memory can be used as data storage Steps to Running an Existing Program 1 Set the Basic Size option in the EEROM Menu to an appropriate number
180. ected to its UnitID If this number is 0 the 8200 has not received any messages with its UnitID The second number 541 gives the total number of messages received This count includes messages that were addressed to other stations The third number gives the number of messages that were received but had errors indicating a corruption of the message The numbers following TX give the number of transmissions that succeeded number of attempts and the number bad When you have communications problems you should note these numbers and decide what they tell you about the problem Sometimes the answer will be clear just by looking at these values Also use the Inspect System Monitor Communications function Using this function you will be able to see what the 8200 is receiving and transmitting This will sometimes help you to identify problems in the setup or help you identify the problem more clearly However more often than not you will need to clear the status and then conduct a test of each path to see 1f it is working Here are some general steps to follow when debugging a radio setup 1 If you can have a person at site 2 while another is at site 1 try some simple tests shown in steps 2 to 7 Otherwise skip to test 8 2 Key the transmitter at site 1 verify that carrier is detected at site 2 3 While the transmitter is keyed send some test characters verify that the characters are received at site 2 4 Unkey the transmitter at site 1
181. ected to the logger and sensors if necessary There is a ground lug located on the lower left hand corner of the 8200 which can be used to connect to When bringing the wire into the gage house or Nema Enclosure try to keep bends in the wire to a minimum since lightning tends to follow a straight pathway 4 At stream gaging stations do not solely ground to the stilling well It would appear logical that the best ground one could have would be the river or stream at the site however when a close by lightning strike occurs on the water the transient travels freely through the water to the metal float up the steel tape into the shaft encoder then finally into the logger This information has been obtained from various field people who have indicated this being a source of problems therefore it is suggested that the earth grounding guidelines listed above be followed and grounding to the stilling well only be used as a last resort Bench Testing A complete station consists of sensors wiring 8200 power supplies communications and setup or programming Sutron recommends that each station be tested on a bench setup in the office before it is put in the field There are countless stories of persons traveling hundreds of miles to install a station who cannot complete the task because of a missing cable incompatible sensor or incomplete programming information The most important lesson from these wasted trips is to bench test the system
182. ee below page 4 53 PROTOCOL SETUP Retries Retries N Number of Retries See Retryln above for a description of how Retries is used to control the number of re transmissions that are made when a sensor goes into Alert If Retries is set to 0 no re transmissions are made A typical value for Retries is 3 PROTOCOL SETUP ACK Delay ACK Delay A ACK Delay 1s Ack Delay sets the Time that the 8200 will wait for an acknowledgment when sending an SSP message Many SSP messages expect an acknowledgment from the receiving end to let the sender know the message was received without errors With 4ck Delay 100 the default value the Ack message must be received in 10 seconds On radio systems with multiple repeater paths Ack Delay should be much longer about 10 seconds for each path This value is shared by both radio and telephone communications If you are using both modes set the value to the longer of the two response times PROTOCOL SETUP CarrierDly CarrierDly C Carrier Delay 1s Carrier Delay specifies the amount of Time the carrier must be on before the data is sent The typical value for Carrier Delay is 10 meaning 1 0 seconds The 8200 will key the transmitter wait for the carrier delay period and then send data The Carrier Delay affects both internal and external transmitters Menu Tree Reference 4 53 PROTOCOL SETUP HW Handshake PROTOCOL SETUP HW Handshake HW Handshake H H W Handshake on COM En
183. el ST Assigned self timed channel Time ST Assigned self timed reporting time Rate ST Assigned self timed reporting interval Data TX ST No of data items for each parameter taken from 8200 log and encoded in each self timed transmission DatTmST Synchronization time the time at which to begin extracting data from the log in order to build a message DatInST Data interval the time interval between readings from the 8200 log equal to or a multiple of MeasInt See separate headings under GOES SETUP for complete information INSPECT SYSTEM INSPECT SYSTEM Inspect System and Test A special Inspect System sub menu is provided which allows the user to quickly examine how the 8200 is setup and whether or not the unit is operating properly Before leaving a field site you may find this sub menu to be useful in ensuring that a unit is properly programmed See separate headings under INSPECT SYSTEM for complete information MODEM SETUP Speech Modem Models Only MODEM SETUP M Modem Setup Menu The MODEM SETUP Menu contains the settings needed to fully configure a modem equipped 8200 for data transmission See separate headings under MODEM SETUP for complete information PROTOCOL SETUP PROTOCOL SETUP P Protocol Setup Options The Protocol Setup defines important information used when the system communicates using its internal or external radios These communications use Sutron Standard Protocol MAIN MENU Recording
184. emory Fl to F9 Recall screen saved by Shift Fl to F9 Other Options Shift PRTSCR Print Graph if GRAPHICS COM was run Display help screen ESC exit The default colors have been set to improve the chances that graphs will appear on LAPTOP black and white displays If they still do not appear try toggling the foreground and background colors to see if that helps LOGPRN Conversion of LOG files to spreadsheet usable ASCII files is done using the LOGPRN program You should have received the LOGPRN program on a diskette with your RAM Pack Reader LOGPRN can either be executed directly from the diskette or loaded on to a hard disk When you execute the LOGPRN program you will see the following screen display LOGPRN Convert V1 7 Log to Prn Options X exclude non recorded data items Z Zero non recorded data items S display Seconds J display Julian day number F fixed column output B insert Blank line between days H output in HYDATA format T output Today s data Y output Yesterday data SYYMMDD specifies start date EYYMMDD specifies end dat Input File At this point LOGPRN is expecting you to type in the name of an existing LOG file followed by a carriage return for example DEMO0101 Appendix E 8200 Test Set Software If you have entered a correct file name and if the program can locate the file you will see the following messages Creating xx
185. enna at the satellite in order to insure the best performance of the transmitter To determine the direction in which the antenna of a GOES DCP should point both the location of the GOES spacecraft subpoint available from NOAA NESDIS and the GOES DCP must be known The transparent overlay map and other aids provided in Appendix D enable the user to determine the antenna azimuth and elevation angles for any geographical location The azimuth and elevation are determined by placing the transparent overlay over the map so that the center point of the overlay corresponds to the location of the spacecraft on the equator The location of the GOES DCP is then marked on the overlay Scales on the overlay indicate the required antenna azimuth and elevation Elevation angle is marked out from the center of the overlay Azimuth angles are around the outside edge of the overlay Angles read from the overlay must be corrected for local magnetic variation Diagrams are provided to help in making the correction The following example illustrates the process Assume a site is located at 40 north latitude and 80 west longitude and a satellite is located at 70 west longitude Antenna pointing can be determined using the following procedure e refer to the figure in Appendix D which has the overlay superimposed on the map in the correct location e locate 40 north latitude and 80 west longitude e read elevation and azimuth elevation 43 off horizo
186. ephone modems etc J5 Ribbon Cable to 1 30 LOS radio modems Option Board speech and telephone SLOT 2 modems etc Spare Front Panel Connector 4 Down Arrow Right Arrow RS 232 Sense CMOS Levels J No Connector installed Maintenance and Service 11 7 Jumpers 8200A o Ees s s 7 Onoff Ribbon Cable to 1 50 All power lines and all r Protection signal lines Termination Board Test Points pI faro _ 2st uRXDO No Connector 3 fuersor installed 4 RTSO 5 UARTOON 6 GND _____ 812 Volts 9 12 Volts Protection Termination Connectors Cable counters swd power Cable 2 Pos Moles Power 12 V Connection for Gnd option card 2 Pos Molex Telephone Connection 2 Pos Molex Internal 12 V Battery Connection 2 Gnd Refer to drawings in Appendix C for the locations of connectors 12 V Gnd 2 Pos Moles Power 12 V Connection for Gnd option card Jil J13 Jl J2 J3 J4 J5 J6 1 26 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 Jumpers 8200A Front Panel Jumpers Rev 6461 1088 1 or 2 Rev E or later Position Function Default Jumper position Satellite Module Jumpers CPU board for 8200 xx14 8200A 6461 1095 3 E Default Jumper position Satellite Module Jumpers There are no jumpers on the Satellite radio module Satellite Module Failsafe Reset NOAA NESDIS requires that all GOES transmitters be equipped with fail safe
187. erface Telephone 2 wire to RJ 11 modular jack Mode Full duplex over public switched telephone network PSTN Compatibility Bell 212A 1200 bps Bell 103 300 bps CCITT V 22 1200 bps and V 21 300 bps Answer Mode Features Ring detect Auto baud rate detection 2225 Hz Answerback Tone 30 second timeout if baud rate training sequence not complete Dial Mode Features Dual tone multifrequency DTMF or pulse dialing 2225 Hz Answerback tone detection One minute timeout if AT not received Programmable number of call attempts after programmable delay Test Modes Digital loopback On Hook Off Hook Control On hook call termination after With Call Termination auto answer or auto dial timeout 30 seconds programmable of data inactivity system reset power up initialization Applicable Standards Phone Line Interface meets or exceeds the following standards U S Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and Regulations Part 68 Canadian Department of Communications DDC Standard CS 03 Electronic Industries Association EIA Standard RS 496 8200 LOS Radio Module 8200 4000 8200 6000 SPECIFICATIONS 8200 4000 and 8200 6000 8200 4014 1 FSK Freq Assign Push to Talk PTT Audio Level Adjust Baud Rate Operating Temp Power Consumption Audio Impedance Twisted Pair Capability 8200 6014 1 Transmitter Power Frequency Stability Rec Standby Current Transmitter Current Operating Temp Receiver Sensitivity Tx Carrier Attack
188. ery that are connected together internally One set of connections J6 accommodates a 2 pin connector and the other set of connections is for use with bare wires A picture of the connections is shown on the following page If your 8210 comes with an internal battery the cable with connector is ready to plug into the J6 receptacle on the protection termination board If you have your own battery to connect to the 8210 use your own cable and connect it to the terminal strip as shown on the following page Use 18AWG wire or less to minimize the voltage drop in the cable Unpacking and Initialization 2 1 Connecting the Main Battery Warning Ifyou connect the battery incorrectly you could blow one of the internal fuses Refer to page 11 4 for instructions on replacing fuses The arrow indicates the location of the power supply inputs The battery connections are marked EXT BATT G and Observe polarity with the G as ground and as the 12V positive Be careful to disconnect the cable from the battery while making connections Connecting the battery in reverse will not damage the 8210 Note that if a GOES Transmitter is installed the fuse located in the power cable will blow Do not connect more than one battery to the 8210 as both batteries will not charge equally a Battery Connections BATT RS 485 SDI SDI DIGITAL OUTPUT A B 2 G amp G DG 1 2 3 4 5 RS 232 CHASSIS GND D DO DO D D OD D D D
189. es 7 12 Samples Set 4 76 TX Alarm RR 4 28 A ACK Delay 4 54 Alarm 4 2 possible values 4 2 Alarm Interval RR 4 29 Alarm Options 4 58 Alarm Status 4 82 Alarms 7 9 Alerts 7 9 AlmInRR 4 29 AnalgDelay 4 15 Analog Delay 4 15 Answer Mode 4 41 AnswerMode 4 41 Application Menu 4 2 Auto Dump 4 8 Auto Startup Keys 4 15 AutoKey 4 15 Average 4 69 INDEX B Basic initiating a basic program 4 80 setting memory allocation 4 16 tiny basic subset 10 1 command set 10 16 function set 10 22 transferring a basic program 4 12 uploading a basic program 7 13 Basic Prog Size 4 16 Basic Program 4 80 Basic Run Interval 4 76 Basic Run Time 4 76 BasicSize 4 16 BasInt 4 76 BasTim 4 76 Battery maintenance and testing of 11 1 Bert LOS Radio 4 31 C Cable maintenance of 11 1 proper site cabling 8 3 specifications for interface cable 7 14 7 15 Carrier 4 23 Carrier Delay 4 54 Carrier ST 4 23 CarrierDly 4 54 Change Password 4 80 Channel 4 23 Channel RR 4 29 Channel RR 4 29 Channel ST 4 23 Clear Alarm 4 2 Clear Status 4 32 Com Baud Rate 4 16 Com Rate 4 16 Communicating with RS 485 sensors 10 14 CONFIG SENSOR 4 68 Configure Sensors 4 68 Index 1 Control 4 60 Custom GOES formatting with Tiny Basic 10 11 D Data also see Serial Port controlling data dump variables 4 17 converting to ASCII 9 5 GOES supported retrieval of 9 8 RADIO supported retrie
190. es consist of the first four characters of the Unit ID and the numeric representation of the start date of the data as mmdd month day Converting Data To ASCII Spreadsheet Usable Form The file name extension LOG indicates that the data in the file are binary data from the 8200 s Log memory If you attempt to TYPE one of the files you will turn your screen into colored hash or strange symbols You must now use a program to convert the data to readable form Refer to the end of this chapter Converting Data to ASCII Converting Data To ASCII Spreadsheet Usable Form Conversion of LOG files to spreadsheet usable ASCII files is done using the LOGPRN program You should have received the LOGPRN program on a diskette with your RAM Card Reader LOGPRN can either be executed directly from the diskette or loaded on to a hard disk When you execute the LOGPRN program you will see the following screen display LOGPRN Convert V1 6 Log to Prn Options X exclude non recorded data items Zero non recorded data items display Seconds display Julian day number fixed column output insert Blank line between days output in HYDATA format output Today s data output Yesterday data SYYMMDD specifies start date EYYMMDD specifies end date Input File At this point LOGPRN is expecting you to type in the name of an existing LOG file followed by a carriage return for example DEM
191. esignated by placing a group number a digit 0 9 in one of the positions of Groups A sensor can belong to as many as 4 different groups by using all 4 positions in the field The first position of the Groups field is special When a group number is placed in the first position of a sensor s Groups field it indicates that the sensor is the trigger for that group If the sensor s Enable field is set to TX when the sensor goes into alarm state the 8200 will schedule a random transmission for the group in the first position All of the members of a group can be designated as triggers if desired The remaining three fields are not positional but by convention the second one is used to designate membership in the self timed group Place a one 1 in the second position if the sensor is to be included in self timed messages The remaining two fields should be 0 blank or a group number The user is free to select his own group numbers for random reporting You may have a single reporting group called 7 or three groups numbered 3 4 and 8 That is there is no importance attached to any specific number other than 1 SYSTEM SETUP ALARM OPTIONS MHigh Alarm The following example illustrates the use of two overlapping random reporting groups along with self timed reporting In this example the two random reporting groups are 3 and 4 Group three contains water level dissolved oxygen and water temperature Group four contains dissolved oxygen
192. ess the left arrow button to exit the option When working with fields with pre defined values the 8200 remembers only the value that was displayed when you exited the field So if you press kJ and change the EEROM SETUP Serial option from USER to PROTOCOL and then press 4J or let the display time out the next time you view Serial 1t will be set to PROTOCOL PC Control of the 8200 Those users wishing to take advantage of the 8200 s powerful interfacing capabilities may choose to set up their unit with a PC instead of with the front control panel Although using a PC to set up the 8200 requires a different method of value setting the process is much simpler and less time consuming The first step is to hook up the 8200 and the computer together and get the communications software up and running Starting the PC Software Any PC can be used as a test set as long as it has a serial port and a communications program such as the Sutron designed TS8210 Note if using a commercial communications program set it for 9600 baud 8 bits no parity 1 stop bit To link the two machines together connect a standard 9 pin straight cable from the COM port to the 8200 Serial RS 232 port Should you need to make a cable yourself refer to the information on page 7 13 Start the TS8210 program by typing TS8210 at the C prompt of your computer or whatever subdirectory the TS8210 program happens to be in The 8200 should display the main men
193. ext scheduled self timed transmission and the Time of the last self timed transmission are provided These two items help determine if the unit is properly scheduled Note if you see the time of last transmission set to 3 seconds before the scheduled transmission time the 8200 aborted the transmission because of the battery voltage being out of limits 4 34 INSPECT SYSTEM Enter SDI 12 Cmd INSPECT SYSTEM Enter SDI 12 Cmd Enter SDI 12 Cmd E Enter SDI 12 Commands This option allows you to send commands to SDI 12 sensors The commands you can use depend on the type of sensor All SDI 12 sensors will respond with an identification string when the OI zero letter I exclamation point command is used This works for sensors at address zero for a sensor at another address replace the 0 with the correct address Other general commands include 0M to initiate a measurement and 0D0 0D1 0Dn to read the measured data From the terminal you must enter the at the end of the command With the front panel it is automatically added Other commands specific to the sensor may include the ability to change calibration settings set the address or load readings INSPECT SYSTEM GOES RADIO TEST GOES Radio Test G GOES RADIO TEST The GOES Radio Test function allows you to send a test GOES transmission in either the random or self timed mode These transmissions are usually transmitted in to a dummy load and a watt mete
194. external alarm is one directed to an ClearAlarm Ack Both external LOS Radio connected to the RS 232 port CHECKALARM SensorName Compares a sensor s current value to the user defined alarm limits from the system setup alarm options ex measure battery check high limit menu updates the alarm conditions and signals 10 Battery Measure Battery transmissions as appropriate Three types of alarm 20 CheckAlarm Battery checks are performed high limit low limit and rate of 30 If nAlarm H Battery Then Goto 50 change The high and low limit checks will only trigger 40 Not in high limit alarm Stop a transmission if the alarm state changes whereas the 50 High limit exceeded Stop rate of change check can trigger a transmission whenever the limit is exceeded DATE year month day Sets the system date 10 16 Tiny Basic Command Set Command Syntax DQAP sensor Allows another sensor other than WaterLevel to have the DQAP average and correction algorithm performed on it GOTO LineNumber Branches to a line in the program starting at LineNumber ex endless loop 10 Print Press ESC to stop this 20 Goto 10 GOSUB LineNumber Executes a subroutine in the program starting at LineNumber until a RETURN statement passes control ex call a subroutine to increment A back to the point after the GOSUB 10 A 0 A GOSUB 100 A 20 Stop note Subroutines may not be nested 100 A A 1 RETURN IF expression THEN statement Co
195. ey do Z 0 Take default action send alarm message Z 1 Just hang up Basic program handled everything Tiny BASIC 10 9 10 10 Canadian bilingual speech program 8200 Tiny Basic 20 March 10 1992 Sutron Corporation 30 100 Calculate Mins amp Maxs should be run after each log 105 If Hours 0 Then Hours 12 Default hours to go back when ting 106 If Interval 0 Then Interval 15 Default minutes between log 107 If Chart 0 Then Chart 100 0 Default chart datum value 110 P InAlarm H Stage Or InAlarm L Stage Or InAlarm R Stage 120 If P Then Stop Detected a problem with the stage 130 N 1000 X 1000 Initialize min amp max 140 For T Time Hours 3600 To Time Step Interval 60 150 R ReadLog T Stage If Err Or Null Then Goto 180 160 If R gt X Then X R If Reading gt Max then Max Reading 170 If R lt N Then N R If Reading gt Min then Min Reading 180 Next T 190 If N 1000 Or X 1000 Then P 1 Found a problem 200 Min N Max X 210 Stop 300 Subroutine to output the value in English 310 Print 42 95 Canadian Hydrographic Water level announcing 320 Print 91 94 60 58 The water level is 330 Print S 1 2 Output current stage to 2 decimal points 340 Print 66 meters 350 Print 33 65 74 a maximum of 360 Print Max 1 2 Output max reading to 2 decimal points 370 Print 66 37 33 68 74 meters and a minimum of
196. fer defaults to Receive File If you want to receive the setup press ENTER The 8200 will automatically begin a Y MODEM transfer to send the setup It will name the setup as unitid SET TS8210 will receive the file and store it in the default directory However if the file already exists it will prompt you to either overwrite the file or enter a new file name When receiving the BASIC program the 8210 will name the file unitid BAS You will be prompted to overwrite or enter a new file name if the file already exists When receiving the LOG file the 8200 will name the file unitidMMDD LOG You will be prompted to overwrite or enter a new file name if the file already exists Watch the message box that tracks the progress of the file transfer When the transfer is complete a complete message is displayed and the software waits for you to press OK IF the transfer fails a message will be displayed and you must press OK to proceed XMODEM Transmit Hi L 82621651 UNDERREU SOURCE 8266 SET ode Blocks Transmitted Bytes Transmitted Block Number Status Timeout Waiting for Receiver Transmit Time CPS Number of Errors File Size 6144 Percent Complete 0z ma eo If you want to send a file setup or basic program to the 8200 you must select Send File use mouse ALT S or TAB and arrows to select it The program will set the default protocol to XMODEM XMODEM will work fine for all transfers to 8200s When you pre
197. final units because TINY BASIC is not running You must calibrate the sensor only in the units available prior to the TINY BASIC equation SYSTEM SETUP ENABLE SENSOR 4 72 ENABLE SENSOR E Enable Sensors This Sub menu displays a list of all the sensors supported by the 8200 and allows each sensor to be enabled ON disabled OFF or renamed Sensors that are enabled can be configured see the CONFIG SENSOR menu on the next page A sensor that is disabled OFF cannot be configured and will be ignored by the 8200 If you disable a sensor after configuring it the 8200 will preserve the configuration information but will not apply it since the sensor is disabled When the sensor is re enabled the previous configuration information will be restored To enable or disable a sensor from the front panel use the up down arrow keys to display the name of the desired sensor and press the J key front panel The value for enable will change from OFF to ON each Time 1 is pressed If you are using a PC the 8200 will create a display similar to the one that follows Note the menu displayed at the top of the screen To enable or disable a sensor from the keyboard use the arrow keys to move the gt pointer to the desired sensor and press ENTER Sensors with in front of the name are enabled and those without the are disabled SYSTEM SETUPIMEASMNT SCHEDULE SELECT SENSORS
198. fit onto a RAM Card Data will be transferred beginning from the start date either up to but not including the current date or through the end of the log depending on the setting of the Log Dump field in the EEROM Setup sub menu see below page 4 16 If Log Dump is set to ALLBIN the dump will include all of the data in the log If Log Dump is set to DAYBIN the dump will terminate at the end of yesterday The following are some of the status messages that may be displayed after the 8200 attempts a data transfer to the ram card Complete XXXK Transfer was successful K 1024 bytes data More Data XXXK Transfer complete more data available Insert another RAM Card and press E again Ram Failure Could not read or write the ram card End of Data No more data to dump Change Start Date No Ram Card 8200 cannot detect the ram card Need Ram gt XXXK Ram card is not large enough to hold even one days worth of data The Ram card is already full you will need to erase it first before you can reuse the card WriteProtect The card cannot be written without changing the write protected switch on the card NeedErase The card has not been formatted by an 8210 and cannot be written Use the Erase Ram Card to erase and format the card DUMP DATA Read Card Setup Read Card Setup R Read Setup from Ram Card Read Card Setup is used to restore a complete EEROM setup from a RAM Card which had a setup saved on it with the Write Card Setup
199. g a PC the letter in front of each option indicates the key that must be pressed in order to select the item and move around the menu For example pressing V will bring up the VIEW DATA menu Pressing A from within this submenu will bring up the Alarm Status display The ESC key on the PC is used to return to the previous menu Practice using the menus by selecting some of the keys such as E to select EEROM Setup or S for System Setup Press ESC to return to the main menu Note that when you press R from the main menu a submenu does not appear Instead the 8200 will change or scroll through the state of Recording options ON and OFF This is an example of a field that you can set 1t is not a menu that can be displayed MAIN MENU N Unit Name D Set Date T Set Time R Recording Status C Clear Alarm V View Sensor Data S System Setup Options U Upload Download Data E EEROM Setup Options P Protocol Setup Options M Modem Setup Options G GOES Radio Setup Inspect System A Application Menu X Exit Choose View Sensor Data Menu L Live Data N Newest Data O Oldest Data A Alarm Status Choose System Setup Menu M Measurement Schedules E Enable Sensors C Configure Sensors A Alarm Options B Basic Program P Change Password Init Setup Z Zero Counters Choose Measurement Schedules M Measurement Interval Sampling Interval T Measurement Time S Sampling Time P Swit
200. gative and positive values in the log For more on LIVE READINGS see 4 80 If the 8200 appears to be skipping recording cycles then the problem is probably in the setup of the MEASUREMENT SCHEDULE sub menu When you develop a schedule you must remember that one complete processing cycle should complete before another begins That is the 8200 must be able to turn on power collect all samples for averages take individual measurements log measurements and averages and turn off power before starting over If you specify a Measurement Interval which is less than Samples Set times SampInt then you may cause cycle skipping For more on MEASUREMENT SCHEDULE see 4 73 LOS Radio Communications Problems LOS radio communications problems are difficult to solve because of the number of factors that can cause problems This list includes Troubleshooting 12 3 LOS Radio Communications Problems 12 4 setup errors radio frequency off radio transmitter deviation too high low radio modem mismatch antenna cable problems path problems interference problems RR RKKEKRKK The place to start to troubleshoot radios is the 8200 itself The 8200 maintains communications statistics giving the number of messages received and transmitted and the number of failures A typical report will be Radio RX 155 541 15 bad TX 155 10 bad The first number following RX the 155 in the example is the number of messages the 8200 received that were dir
201. ge Averaging XX PreMeasure Measuring or Logging Shows alarm status transmission status time of next and last transmissions for the device Shows good Bert packets total Bert packets and error distribution Last mail message received Battery status size and amount free Min and max battery voltage based on any measurement whether through live reading GOES transmission or scheduled logging Use Clear Status to re initialize the min and max values A Tiny Basic program can display custom status messages Line 65110 will be branched to for messages to be displayed to a terminal or modem line 65111 is used for the front panel Status information appears in groups Depending on your model the groups may include SYSTEM STATUS Modem Status Recording Status GOES Status Transmit Status The SYSTEM STATUS group contains information related to all 8200 operations Normally you will receive the message No System Errors If either of the messages GOES Clock Stopped or GOES Clock Error appears then contact customer service immediately your GOES card might be in need of repair Menu Tree Reference 4 33 INSPECT SYSTEM Display Status The Recording Status group contains information on logging operations If recording is OFF the status will show as Disabled If the 8200 is performing a logging operation the status may appear as one of the following Waiting PreAverage Averaging PreMeasure Measu
202. gram Option gt NEW gt 10 A Measure Analog1 gt 20 Analog 1 2 A72 0 5 A 2 Line 10 takes a measurement from Analog and stores it in to the variable A Line 20 applies a polynomial to A and stores the result in to the current value of Analogl When the 8200 tries to log Analog it will retrieve the last value stored by the program so you should set your Basic Run Time and Interval so that the program will be run before the 8200 logs Alternatively you could add line 30 which would make sure that the correct value is always logged either way gt 30 Log Time Analogl A If the 8200 has already logged data before the Basic program has been run then line 30 will overwrite the value for Analog with the correct data After your program has been entered you should exit from Basic with the QUIT command Set your Basic Run Time and Interval and turn Recording ON to start the program Connect a sensor to Analog and observe how the converted value is logged You might notice that when you observe the live reading of Ana log it is not converted but still reads in raw volts you will see how you might use sensor variables to correct this in the next example Example2 How to create a new sensor from a combination of two other sensors In this example we will create a new sensor variable which will compute the percentage ratio of Analog to Analog2 In the System Setup Enable Sensors menu rename one of the sensors you do not intend
203. h the setup information and basic program in a form that is compatible with Sutron s Base Station and LOS Radio software You may be interested in using this option if you want to capture a setup for future downloading over a LOS radio system Otherwise the XMODEM method is recommended Upload Download Data View Ram Card Directory PC Only V View Ram Card Directory Display a list of all the files stored on the RAM Card and their status Each file on the RAM Card has a checksum If a file has become corrupted the file will be marked as BAD In addition a message will be displayed if the battery on the RAM Card is low or the card is write protected Menu Tree Reference 4 13 Upload Download DatalYmodem Ram Card File s PC Only Upload Download DatalYmodem Ram Card File s PC Only Y Ymodem Ram Card File s Allows the 8210 to be used as a card reader or writer All the files on a RAM Card can be downloaded to a PC or selected file s can be appended to the RAM Card Xmodem is not supported because it can not automatically handle file naming EEROM SETUP EEROM SETUP EEROM SETUP E EEROM Setup Options EEROM SETUP is a menu item These items affect some EEROM values that control the way the 8200 communicates and also contains some calibration and timing values EEROM SETUP AnalgDelay AnalgDelay A Analog Delay 10 ms AnalgDelay sets the amount of time in ms 10 that the 8200 will pause after applying power to the
204. he BASIC program When this is selected the 8200 will display the basic prompt gt It will then accept any of the Basic commands Note that the 8200 will turn recording OFF when you select this option At the gt prompt programs can be listed entered altered and run Statements can be executed immediately to view variables or perform another function See Chapter 10 for further information SYSTEM SETUP Change Password SYSTEM SETUP Change Password Change Password P Change Password Change Password is used to set an access password for the 8200 setup Up to 5 letters may be entered to specify the password When the password is blank it is disabled and the system will not prompt for the password to when you try to use one of the setup menus SYSTEM SETUP etc When the password is not blank the 8200 will prompt for the password when you first try to use a setup menu If the password is entered correctly you will have access to all 8200 setup menus You will not need to enter the password again until the display is turned off or you log off if using a modem If you do not enter a correct password the 8200 display the message Bad Password and not allow you access to the setup If you forget the password it can be initialized to blank disabled by pressing the down arrow key while powering up the 8200 The message Password Init will flash on the screen if the operation is done correctly SYSTEM SETUP Init Setup Init
205. he Unit ID press the up or down arrow to scroll through the alphanumeric list until the desired letter or number is showing Pressing the gt right arrow locks this value and moves you to the next item The following table is a comprehensive list of all of the available sensor inputs of the 8200 The Value heading listed in the chart gives the units for the measurement when slope is 1 and offset is 0 The slope and offset must be changed for the value to read in other units such as degrees or feet Name Connection Connection 0 to 5 volt 8200A with J11 2 3 8210 J19 A5 0 to 5 volt 8200A with J13 2 3 8210 J14 A6 0 to 5 volt 8200A with J14 2 3 8210 J15 A7 0 to 5 volt 8200A with J12 2 3 8210 J20 A8 8200A with J11 1 2 8210 J19 5VDIFF 8200A with J13 1 2 8210 J14 DIFFIN 8200A with J14 1 2 8210 J15 DIFFIN 8200A with J12 1 2 8210 J20 5VDIFF Auxa Pressures 5 volt feedback used only if internal jumperis on Encoder Penor2 enor2 Quadraturelmpui2 Encoder Pencz2 fencz2 Quadrature Input CS Counter Counter Counter2 Counters Counter Frequency Frequency Frequency Frequency3 Frequency4 WindSpeedt WindSpeed2 WindSpeed3 WindSpeed4 WindDir1 WindDir2 WindDir3 WindDir 8200A with J11 1 2 8210 J19 5VDIFF 8200A with J13 1 2 8210 J14 DIFFIN 8200A with J14 1 2 8210 J15 DIFFIN 8200A with J12 1 2 8210 J20 5VDIFF
206. he brightness to full If the battery is charged the voltage should not drop any more than 0 5 volts when current is being drawn by the system If the drop is more than this the battery is not fully charged and may be defective Antenna and Cable Check the antenna cable making sure the ends are securely fastened Since the ends are handled most frequently they are the main source of problems with the cable Make sure there is sufficient weather proof tape coating the ends not allowing water to find it s way to the connections Inspect the positioning of the GOES antenna and reposition if necessary Sometimes high winds or large birds roosting can cause them to be moved thus lowering the signal level going to the satellite Make sure there is no corrosion or other foreign material on the outside of the antenna since any material on it could cause reflected power and further signal loss 8200 Status A very useful feature of the 8200 is the Inspect System main menu then to the Display Status sub menu This screen is a tool to aid in determining if anything undesirable has happened to the 8200 since the last time the site was visited There should be no error messages recorded Recordings should read Waiting unless a measurement is currently being taken the fail safe is not tripped and the schedules displayed agree with what is supposed to happen next If error messages do appear consult the Troubleshooting section of this manual for
207. he internal modem or radio TX d e bad recieved good on the internal modem or radio TX d e bad modem or radio TX D e bad radio TX d E bad retried on the internal modem or radio Ext Rx Count TERM RX A b c bad SSP messages addressed to the unit and ee TX d e bad received good on an external modem radio or direct connect Ext Rx Total TERM RX a B c bad SSP messages addressed to any unit and TX d e bad recieved good on an external modem radio or direct connect TX d e bad modem radio or direct connect TX D e bad or direct connect Ext Tx Bad TERM RX a b c bad SSP messages which timed out and had to be a TX d E bad retried on an external modem radio or direct connect 14 Goes Tx Count Goes Tx Goes transmissions attempted Rom Checksum ROM CheckSum EPROM Checksum Peis me ee ee eee Address at XXxx Averaging n 118 D NMI Glitch Count _ NMI Glitches Number of unexpected NMI signals Count Count Count conversion Count range 3 F 5 Appendix F 8200 Sutron Standard Protocol Capabilities Field Code Tx Truncated Tx Truncated Goes Tx where the amount of data would had ere Count resulting in tripping the failsafe if it was not truncated by software Basic Current Line Basic Status Running Current line number Tiny Basic is executing Number Line xxx 25 K Basic Error Code Basic Status Last Last Basic error code 0 Syntax Error 1 Math Error X at line y Error
208. he same steps to change the minutes and seconds Setting the time is an important operation Many data collection activities depend on the accurate synchronization of times between numerous data collection devices The correct and most accurate method for setting the time in the 8200 is to select the Time display and key in a full time up to the seconds value that is one or two minutes in advance of the current time After keying in the correct value for the last field seconds wait to press ENTER only when the time on the display coincides exactly with the time on an accurate source Digital wrist watch radio time signal etc From that point on the display should be in synchronization with the reference time This can be verified by watching the display for a few seconds Changing Pre Defined Values If an item has a pre set value the 8200 will change the value each time the item is selected For example go to the main menu and press R If the current status is Recording OFF the 8200 will try to set it to next available option of ON and vice versa The Setup Sheet Go to the EEROM Setup Options menu and note the value for Dump Rate also known as the Transfer Baud rate Press T several times and watch the display cycle though the available values for the baud rate Note that each time you press T you are scrolling to the next available value for the item The only way to set 1t back to its original value is to repeatedly press
209. he sensor will be in High Alarm if the value is greater than or equal to HiLev plus the deadband The same test is done regardless of whether High Alarm is set to ABOVE BELOW or BOTH These different settings control when to notify you of the alarm not how the data is tested For High Alarm you should interpret the settings as follows OFF don t do any high alarm tests ABOVE do the high alarm test and give me an alarm transmission when the sensor goes above HiLev plus DeadBnd into alarm BELOW do the high alarm test and give me a transmission when the sensor goes below Hilev minus DeadBnd out of alarm BOTH do the high alarm test and give me a transmission when the sensor goes into or out of alarm How To 7 9 Make an Event Driven System Using Alarms In a similar manner if you have Low Alarm on the 8200 will use its low alarm test on the sensor value The sensor will be in Low Alarm if the value is less than or equal to the LoLev minus the deadband The same test is done regardless of whether Low Alarm is set to ABOVE BELOW or BOTH These different settings control when to notify you of the alarm not how the data is tested For High Alarm and Low Alarm ABOVE means transmit when the value goes above the level plus the deadband and BELOW means transmit when the value goes below the level minus the dead band ABOVE and BELOW do not control whether the sensor is in alarm when ABOVE or BELOW the value that is done b
210. hether Low Alarm is set to ABOVE BELOW or BOTH These different settings control when to notify you of the alarm not how the data is tested See Understanding Alarms and Alerts in Chapter 7 for more information SYSTEM SETUP ALARM OPTIONS Prefix Name Prefix Name P Prefix Speech Modem Only The Prefix provides the 8200 with the number of a word or phrase to speak to identify the sensor data value When the prefix is non zero the 8200 will speak the prefix followed by the value The number for the prefix can be any of the words or phrases defined for Menu Tree Reference 4 63 SYSTEM SETUP ALARM OPTIONSIROC Alarm the speech module see table 1 page 4 43 for a complete listing of the 8200 words and phrases It can also be one of the following phrases specifically prepared for the prefix 200 Air Temperature 201 Barometric Pressure 202 Gauge Height 203 Relative Humidity 204 Reservoir Level 205 Snow Level 206 Solar Radiation 207 Valve Position 208 Water Level 209 Wind Direction 210 Wind Run 211 Wind Speed Example With Prefix set to 208 and a Suffix set to 113 the 8200 will speak the following for a sensor value of 1 56 Water Level is one point five six feet SYSTEM SETUP ALARM OPTIONS ROC Alarm ROC Alarm 3 ROC Alarm The ROC Rate of Change Alarm controls whether the 8200 will generate an alarm based on the rate of change of a sensor ROC Alarm has the following options OFF Rate of Change alarm
211. hough the 8200 is not logging every value measured GOES USERS Measurements per log has a direct affect on the data sent in a GOES random transmission When it is set to one 1 the binary transmission will contain data from the log If Measurements per log is set to a value other than one the first data record of a random transmission will contain current data current data is the last data measured followed by data from the log This provides the data which may have caused an alarm to be sent in the random transmission SYSTEM SETUP MEASMNT SCHEDULE Samples Set Samples Set A Samples to Average Samples per set Samples Set controls the number of individual readings which will be collected from each sensor configured with AVERAGE ON prior to computing an average SYSTEM SETUP CONFIG SENSORS The sampling stops when Samples set number of values have been collected or when the next measurement Time is reached SYSTEM SETUP MEASMNT SCHEDULE Basint 4 74 Basint B Basic Run Interval Bas Int sets the interval at which the Tiny BASIC program is run A BasInt of 00 00 05 would cause the basic program to run once every 5 seconds BasInt of 00 15 00 would cause the basic program to run once every 15 minutes and so on If Bas nt is set to a shorter amount of Time than the Time it takes to run the program intervals will be SYSTEM SETUPIMEASMNT SCHEDULE BasTim missed For example if Bas nt is set to 00 00 01 and the basic
212. ify is used to change or erase readings on the screen VIEW DATA OLDEST READINGS AirTemp BaroPress SolarRad RainFall WindSpeed 09 24 1992 03 45 00 41 96 16 00 0 20 33 4 94 3 8 04 00 00 41 84 15 64 0 00 4 94 330 04 15 00 41 53 Ea he 0 03 4 94 37 04 30 00 41 53 15 45 0 02 4 94 4 1 04 45 00 41 33 15 64 0 05 4 94 3 6 05 00 00 41 27 15 58 0 05 4 94 3 98 05 15 00 41 09 15 67 0 34 4 94 4 0 05 30 00 41 57 15 60 0 88 4 94 4 0 05 45 00 42 35 To 67 1 74 4 94 4 3 06 00 00 43 10 VO 36 3 Len 4 94 4 9 06 15 00 44 22 15 60 3 46 4 94 5 8 06 30 00 A sity Me fae SSS See aS gE 06 45 00 SSaRSa PSR SS ESR Sea SSS so RS 07 00 00 AR aa S2 sae A E RAS 07 15 00 SH SSS a ES i ES Yes fees 07 30 00 SESTAS SES fea SSE SSS SRS SSS SSS 07 45 00 Sy SS ao po fer oS oe a AS ay 08 00 00 a RAR oe DESS a ee eee SS 08 15 00 HE SS sTo A pT SES eS SS ws 08 30 00 Boe EE E SAS wate MA ae E 5 VIEW DATA OLDEST READINGS OLDEST READINGS O Oldest Data OLDEST READINGS can be used to take you into the log at a point of the oldest data entry The date of this data depends on the size of the log To go to the oldest readings press the gt right arrow key to display a list of enabled sensors Use the a up and YY down arrow keys to select the sensor of interest and press the gt right arrow key Once in the log the display operates as explained under the NEWEST READINGS heading Menu Tree Reference 4 83 Chapter 5 Qui
213. ilable BASIC In this mode the BASIC program has control over how the phone is answered and what is spoken See Chapter 10 for more information MODEM SETUP Dial In Dial In Dial In Message This field represents the message the 8200 will speak when it is called and answers in the VOICE mode This message is actually a coded sequence of numbers and characters that controls what the 8200 speaks and what it does When you look at this string it will make little sense to you unless you understand the basic rules needed to construct the message The maximum length of the dial in message is 128 characters Standard Messages There is a way however to construct a Dial In message without knowing the details of these message strings Sutron has canned several Standard Messages into the 8200 which can be selected from the front panel To use them you press the set key followed by the up arrow while the Dial In prompt is displayed on the front panel Each time you press the up arrow the 8200 will display an abbreviation for a standard message Pressing up arrow repeatedly will let you cycle through the messages When you have the message you desire press the SET key The display will revert to its standard form displaying the message you selected in coded form The available Standard Messages are Arc Speak archived or logged data for each of the sensors Liv Speak live data for each of the sensors ArcMen Speak archived data followed by the
214. ill be changed to a blank With the _ missing the software will not extract the pMm portion of the name or use it to control the measurement The 8210 has three different grounds on the protection termination board analog digital and chassis The analog grounds are Al AG A2 AG A3 AG and A4 AG The analog grounds are tied together on the protection termination board and then the signal takes a separate path to the A D converter where it is tied to digital ground The digital grounds are CNT G ENC1 G ENC2 G SW D PWR G SOLAR PANEL G EXT BATT G SDI 12 G SDI 12 G These digital grounds are connected together on the protection termination board The Chassis Ground is a lug or wire that comes off the protection termination board All the surge protection devices connect to the Chassis Ground The internal metal plates are also connected to the Chassis Ground There is a 100 ohm resistor between the Chassis Ground and digital ground Sensor Setup Examples The following examples show the details of the 8200 setup for some common sensors Consult Sutron Application Notes for additional examples This document is available separately from Sutron Hooking Up Sensors 6 7 Tipping Bucket Tipping Bucket Sensors Connection Slope RightDigits Measurement Interval Counter Counter1 Counter4 One wire to the counter channel the other to GND 0 01 for U S 0 25 for metric 2 for U S 1 for metric 00 15 00 typi
215. imit 4 63 HiLev 4 63 HW Handshake 4 55 I I Init Setup 4 80 Init Setup 4 80 Inspect System 4 4 4 31 perform selftest 4 37 Inspect System and Test 4 4 4 31 International 4 26 Internatl 4 26 Interval 4 70 Intrvl 4 70 L Live Data 4 82 Log 4 70 Log Dump Mode 4 17 LogDump 4 17 LoLev 4 64 Long Packets 4 55 Long SSP Packets 4 55 LOS Radio setup for 7 7 Low Alarm 4 64 7 10 Low Limit 4 64 M M Master Name 4 55 MAIN MENU 3 6 Master 4 55 MeasInt 4 77 MEASMNT SCHEDULE 4 74 MeasTim 4 77 Measure 4 71 Measurement Interval 4 77 Measurement Schedules 4 74 Measurement Time 4 77 Measurements per Log 4 75 Menu 3 6 Menu Path 3 7 Menu Tree 3 3 changing values 3 7 Conventions of 3 6 executing functions 3 7 graphic chart of 3 5 naming conventions 4 1 positioning within 3 6 pre defined values 3 9 reference 4 1 using the keypad 3 1 Modem answer mode options 4 41 setting dial in messages 4 42 4 43 setup 4 4 4 40 MODEM SETUP 4 4 4 40 Modem Setup Menu 4 4 4 40 Monitor SSP Communications 4 36 N Newest Data 4 84 NEWEST READINGS 4 84 Number of Retries 4 54 Number of Rings 4 52 Number Rings 4 52 O Offset 4 71 Oldest Data 4 85 OLDEST READINGS 4 85 P Perform Selftest 4 37 Phone n 4 40 Phone Password 4 52 PhonePass 4 52 Power On Delay 4 17 PowerDelay 4 17 Prefix 4 65 Prefix Name 4 65 PressDelay 4 18 Pressure
216. ing interval All random transmissions are binary format The number of bytes in a message 1s determined by HData TX RR number of parameters in a group Recall that three bytes are required for each number parameter value A random message can hold 25 3 or approximately 8 or 9 values Data TX RR times the number of parameters assigned to a group should not exceed 9 on the average Menu Tree Reference 4 27 GOES RADIO SETUP Random Setup Menu TX Alarm RR For example if a random reporting group contains both water level and cumulative rainfall 2 parameters and the Data TX RR is 1 then a random message will contain one water level and one rainfall value If Data TX RR is 4 then 4 values of water level and 4 values of rainfall will be sent A value of Data TX RR of 5 would become too large and would result in truncated messages GOES RADIO SETUP Random Setup Menu TX Alarm RR TX Alarm RR 4 TX Alarm RR Number of transmissions per alarm The 7X Alarm RR field determines the number of transmissions burst made after a group s alarm trigger first goes into alarm state The purpose of this burst of transmissions is to ensure that an alarm triggered random transmission will get through The transmissions will be separated by AlmInt next paragraph A value of 2 or 3 transmissions should be adequate for most applications Use the FJ key and the arrow keys to change the value of this field 7X Alarm RR applies only to the
217. ion and serial This is a quick way to see if the sensor is responding properly A way to verify data collection manual data collection is issue the aM command For example 7M would collect data from the sensor at address 7 The sensor will respond with a 5 digit code the first digit is the address the next 3 digits are the required time for measurement in seconds and the last digit is the no of data values returned Wait for the number of seconds Then issue the aDO address D zero the sensor should respond with one or more data values You may issue further aD1 aDn till you get all of the data This is the same sequence the 8200 automates for you If this doesn t work by hand the 8200 can t do it for you either CAUTION On the 8200A don t short the 12v line to a ground when working with bare wires it is easy to do this but it blow the front panel fuse Make the connection to the 8200 LAST wire multiple sensors together first The 8210 uses a thermal fuse to protect the 12v line so shorts do not blow a fuse Power Consumption On the 8210 the 12V line is protected by a thermal fuse If you short the 12V line the thermal fuse will interrupt the power to the line Power will be restored when the short is removed On the 8200A the 12V line is protected by a standard fuse If you short the 12v to a ground when working with bare wires it is easy to do this you will blow the front panel fuse Make the
218. ion designed to conserve battery power and lengthen battery life Connecting the Charging Voltage The next step is to connect a charging voltage to the 8200 The 8200 can accomodate a charging voltage from 13 to 18 volts that is common from a solar panel or DC power supply On the 8210 connect the charging voltage to the two pins labeled SOLAR PANEL G On the 8200A connect the charging voltage to the two pins labeled PWR IN G and on the far right of the terminal strip This voltage passes through an internal regulator that keeps the battery fully charged The internal regulator is limited to 1 25 amp 3 4 amp on 8200A Without a charging voltage the 8200 will run using the power from the main battery When the battery voltage drops the 8200 may stop operating until it is charged again Remember that if no internal or external battery is installed the use of the solar panel alone will not allow the 8210 to power on If this application is desired change the jumper J7 to position 1 2 on the interconnect board as described in the link table in Chapter 11 Quick Test The 8200 is running whenever the battery is connected To verify that the 8200 is running press on the front panel The 8200 display should light up with a message displaying the version of the software If not check your connections If you have an 8200A with internal battery try pressing the power switch at the back of the enclosure If the 8200 still does not light
219. ion Board Definition Switch swl SW2 Slot 1 J4 C O SpeechModem 051 765 Gon 1 oO O 3 Notes O C O Speech Modem Q5 O C External Modem or Terminal 93 o ES O OPEN C CLOSE CPU Module Jumpers SDI 12 SDI 142 S ON OFF Maintenance and Service 11 5 Jumpers and Connectors 8210 O Default Jumper position Protection Termination Module Jumpers J7 J7 1 2 Charger high current mode allows charger to output full current with a normal or missing battery Allows unit to operate without battery however high current transmissions will cause the unit to reset J7 J7 2 3 Normal charger mode limits charger current when battery has a low terminal voltage from a shorted cell preventing overheating conditions Oo Default Jumper position Jumpers and Connectors 8210 CPU Module Connectors Connector Purpose Pin Number Aux 12 V DC 1 2 Opto 22 Interface Connector J Gnd 1 49 2 4 6 50 3 5 7 5 I I I I I I I I I I 1 J2 S P06 Module 6 P07 Module 7 P10 Module 8 0 O 0 O 0 O 0 O 0 O 0 JO 0 0 O 0 0 O 0 N Q Aaju n _ R ij gt o Nin nn N Ww GW O QW O AJA E Rua SO re Go Ole WIN woyrRe w N 7 5 BRE C J3 Internal COM Port DB 9 Female TXD Ribbon Cable to 1 30 GOES Transmitter LOS Option Board radio modems speech SLOT 1 and tel
220. ions P Production Test Choose FRONTPANEL ONLY Test LOS Radio Transmit Status GOES Radio Setup Menu T Transmit Mode S Satellite ID International F Format ST C Carrier ST 1 Channel ST 2 TX Time ST 3 TX Rate ST 4 Data Items TX ST 5 Data Time ST 6 Data Interval ST R Random Setup Menu PC Control of the 8200 GOES Radio Random Setup Menu 1 Channel RR 2 TX Normal Rate RR 3 TX Alarm Rate RR 4 TX Alarm RR 5 Alarm Interval RR 6 Data Items TX RR 7 Data Time RR 8 Data Interval RR Choose Alarm Options E Enable G Groups C Control 1 High Alarm 2 Low Alarm 3 ROC Alarm Alarm Limits H High Limit L Low Limit R ROC Level B Deadband Alarm Phrases P Prefix Name S Suffix Units Modem Setup Menu D Dial Out Enable A Answer Mode N Number of Rings P Phone Password Dial lIn Message O Dial Out Message 1 Phone 1 2 Phone 2 3 Phone 3 R Redial Delay Choose Getting To Know The 8200 3 11 PC Control of the 8200 3 12 Selecting options and changing values To change the value for a field press the key identified for the field Ifthe field has predefined options the value will change to one of the predefined values If the field has a user entered value the cursor will move to the place where the value is displayed and let you key in the value The following paragraphs illustrate how
221. is based on a powerful 16 bit microprocessor allowing users to set up the 8200 in any one of several easy ways e Front Panel setup information can be entered using the 6 keys built into the front panel The keypad is used to select or modify items in a variety of setup menus e Portable PC Those users with access to a portable PC may find it easier to set up the 8200 through the unit s serial port by using Sutron s TS8210 PC based software or standard commercial communications packages such as PROCOMM e Remote PC 8200s with telephone and LOS modems can be set up remotely by means of a computer terminal or PC Easy Wiring To further ease the process of setup the 8200s were designed to be easy to hook up in the field All connections are made through a terminal strip For the 8200 the terminal strip is on the front panel For the 8210 the terminal strip is either on the side panel or inside the enclosure depending on the enclosure selected When all wiring is complete the entire terminal strip can be unplugged This feature greatly simplifies unit swapping should the occasion arise Sealed Units 8200s are designed to operate without additional packaging They can be placed on a shelf in a gauge house or weather station with no additional protection Custom NEMA 4 and IP66 housings are available for stand alone outside applications or where all wiring must be in conduits The 2 version of the 8210 is a modular mount version
222. is very high humidity desiccant bags may be put inside the enclosure to absorb excess moisture Desiccant bags do loose their ability to absorb water over time so they should be replaced at each maintenance visit Check the accuracy of the value the 8200 has measured for each sensor If possible take with you a calibrated instrument for making an independent reading Note that measurements such as temperature vary significantly depending on where the sensor is placed Check all the sensors for signs of wear and tear If shaft encoders are used make sure the shaft spins freely with no signs of binding or wobbling For wind speed direction sensors make sure it is able to rotate 360 degrees and the prop spins freely without binding Tipping buckets should be checked for anything which may clog up the funneling mechanism and obstruct water flow into the buckets Manually tip the mechanism 10 or so times and verify the 8200 counts the correct number of tips If not the mercury switch may need adjustment Inspect the ends of the cables coming from the sensors If they were tinned properly they should not need servicing If they were not tinned they may be starting to fray in which case the ends should be cut restripped and properly tinned It is very important to maintain good clean connections between the 8200 and the sensors being used If external batteries are being used there may be an in line fuse between the battery and the 8200 Many u
223. is will result in logging the offset as the value You can use the guidelines given in Chapter 7 page 7 3 to come up with some Quick Setup 5 1 Telephone With Speech Modem different values for the slope and offset or use the auto calibrate feature built into the Value field Right digits controls the range of data that is logged Be sure your sensor value will not exceed the range called for by Right digits 4 Measurement Schedule The measurement interval is the basic data collection and logging interval If you want to collect and log data every 15 minutes set measurement interval to 00 15 00 If you have no averaging planned you can leave the sampling interval measurement time sampling time all at 0 Set a time for Switched Power if you need to turn on a sensor for a few seconds before taking a measurement If the power is to be on all the time or off all the time leave it at 0 and set the Switched Power Option to ON or OFF 5 EEROM Setup You can use the default values for most all the EEROM fields Don t bother filling in the blanks when you are using the defaults One field you may want to change is the TimeLimit With TimeLimit at 60 the 8200 will turn off the display after 60 seconds of inactivity If you are using a sensor connected to the PRESSURE port make sure you get the AmpGain for the 8200 8200A models to not need the AmpGain but 8200s do in order to make accurate measurements on the pressure port Since you may no
224. issions 7 6 To set the 8200 up for random transmissions you will add additional information to the GOES setup and use the Alarm setup to define the alarms and data included in the transmission The following example is for a station that will make an alarm transmission when the water level exceeds 5 25 feet The 8200 will make 3 transmissions TX Alarm RR 3 spaced 4 minutes apart AlmInRR 00 04 00 when the alarm is detected Then as long as the water level is gt 5 25 feet and still in alarm the transmissions will be made every hour RA Rate 01 00 00 The setup preserves self timed transmissions with each sensor assigned to Group Num 1 A group 2 is also specified with Encoder1 as the trigger and Counter also assigned to the group This is the random group that gets sent when Encoder goes into alarm Setup for LOS RADIO POLLED GOES SETUP MEASUREMENT SCHEDULE TX Mode TIMED MeasInt 00 15 00 Sat ID 00000000 SamplInt 00 00 00 Internatl OFF MeasTim 00 00 00 Format ST BINARY SampTim 00 00 00 Carrier ST LONG PwrTim 00 00 00 Channel ST TST Samples Set 10 Time ST 00 00 00 Measmnt Log 1 Rate ST 04 00 00 BasInt 00 00 00 Data TX ST 16 BasTim 00 00 00 DatTmST 00 00 00 PwrMode off DatInsT 00 15 00 Channel RR 151 RN Rate 00 00 00 RA Rate 01 00 00 TX Alarm RR 3 AlmInRR 00 04 00 Data TX RR 3 DatTmRR 00 00 00 DatInRR 00 15 00 ENABLE CONFIG ALARM SENSORS Sensor XX XX Name Enc
225. ives 256 four byte mini blocks containing DLE ESC upcount downcount where upcount increments from 0 to 255 and downcount decrements from 255 down to 0 for a total of 1024 bytes When a good 4 byte block is received a good count is incremented Bad or missing blocks are not directly detected instead they are inferrred For instance if the block 100 was just received and the previous block received was 94 then the bad count would be incremented by 5 because blocks 95 96 97 98 99 are missing The BERT software also maintains an error distribution This is a set of 32 bits representing 256 blocks each bit represents 256 32 or 8 blocks where block 0 thru 7 is the most significant bit The error distribution is used to tell whether errors are happening at the beginning of the block the end or randomly distributed The value is reported in hexadecimal by the 8200 such that 8000000 represents an error in block s 0 7 at the beginning of the message 00000001 represents an error in block s 248 255 at the end of the message FFFFFFFF represents errors thru out the message and 0000000 represents no errors Menu Tree Reference 4 31 INSPECT SYSTEM Clear Status ADVANCED BERT INFORMATION Note the BERT message is not an SSP message although it is designed to not be confused with an SSP message This means that a BERT message will be received by all stations who can hear it and that BERT messages cannot be sent thru a SSP stor
226. k fuse Check the baud rate in the EEROM SETUP sub menu Make sure Serial field in EEROM SETUP sub menu is set to PROTOCOL Toggle with the key Check cable wiring Make sure RS 232 TTL jumper on main circuit board is in correct position Check other jumper settings The 8200 does not dump today to the RAM Card If you want today s data on the RAM Card you must reset the Date field in the MAIN menu to fool the software Pressure sensor enabled with no sensor connected to terminal block Possible low battery voltage If problem persists return unit to factory Incorrect setting of Right Digits See Chapter 4 Troubleshooting 12 7 Troubleshooting Guide 12 8 PROBLEM Telephone equipped unit will not answer phone Cannot transfer data from telephone equipp ed unit GOES unit transmits at incorrect time GOES unit will not transmit PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTION Bad connection to telephone line Ring signal not present on line Improper settings of jumpers switches see Chapter 11 for correct settings Check baud rate setting Make sure time is set to correct Universal Coordinated Time GMT Make sure that transmit time is entered properly Check forward power of the transmitter at the antenna Check back at the 8200 itself if there is no or low power at the antenna Make sure the antenna cable is OK Remember that you must have enabled sensors using the Alarm OPTIONS sub menu and entered GROUP information
227. key to display the enabled sensor list Use the up and Y down arrow keys to select the sensor of interest and press the P right arrow key to view the data The data is displayed in the format ddd hh mm value where ddd is the Julian day for the data If you wish to know the calendar day for any entry simply press the P right arrow key and the calendar date will be displayed briefly Once in the log the J up and Y down arrows can be used to view data in both directions Pressing a key will go to the adjacent value You may skip through the log in increments of one day by holding either the 4 up or Y down arrows and then pressing or holding down the gt right arrow You may skip through the log in increments of one hour by holding either the a up or Y down arrows and then pressing or holding down the J left arrow Using these methods the entire log may be spanned in less than two minutes While in the log bs can be used to alter one of the values Remember the l amp key can be used to cancel the data entry if it is done before EJ is pressed to finalize it When using a PC the following menu and data appear when N Newest Data is selected The data will be the most recent data from the LOG Note that the menu lists the keys that can be pressed to move to the top beginning of the log bottom end of the log up back in time down forward in time and so forth S earch can be used to position to any day in the log and M od
228. l wiggle until it comes free The removable connectors make it possible to completely replace an 8200 in a matter of minutes RAM Card Socket RS 232 3 2 8200s can store either data or setups on small RAM Cards which may be purchased from Sutron The 8210 supports PCMCIA Statid RAM cards not Flash with a capacity up to 2MB The 8200A supports RAM cards with a capacity up to 64K bytes The 8200A RAM cards are not PCMCIA Each 8200A RAM Card can hold up to 64k bytes of data approximately 32 000 readings To transfer data from the 8200 s internal RAM to the RAM Card or to transfer a pre programmed set up from a RAM Card to the 8200 the Card is inserted into the RAM Card socket It is possible to store the data from multiple sites on a single card as space permits Further instructions for loading or unloading data are contained on page 9 1 in Chapter 9 Serial I O Port The most common use of the RS 232 port is for connection to a test set portable PC When a test set is used it is possible to see the full setup menus since the computer screen can display an entire menu at one time This can simplify the setup process Experienced users who prefer setting up ahead of time may upload a preprogrammed setup into the 8200 from the test set thereby greatly reducing setup time Conversely the 8200 can also download setups and dump data from its memory to the test set through the same RS 232 port Front Panel Control of the 8200 This m
229. lar item The Main Menu is implied in the menu path The names in the menu path correspond to those seen on the front panel Ifthe PC names were used in the menu path it would be similar but not identical The following are some simple examples menu paths Date This item is in the main menu SYSTEM SETUPIMEASMNT SCHEDULE Samplnt This item SampInt is in the MEASMNT SCHEDULE submenu which is in the SYSTEM SETUP menu which is in the main menu Menu Tree Reference 4 1 MAIN MENU Alarm Alarm Alarm C Clear Alarm Alarm Status is part of the MAIN MENU display when using a terminal The possible values for Alarm status are NORMAL No alarm conditions exist or all alarm conditions have been acknowledged ALARM An alarm condition exists and has not been acknowledged for a sensor that will not cause the 8200 to dial out ALERT An alarm condition exists and has not been acknowledged for a sensor that will cause the 8200 to dial out or transmit To clear an alarm from the front panel press the l key Press C to clear an alarm when using a terminal Application Menu PC only Date 4 2 A Application This selection only works if you are running Sutron s test set software that has special applications support TS9000 supports applications and allows dumping the log using SSP in TS9000 format TS8210 at the current time does not support applications Base Station software can also take advantage of this option to start a
230. lay status or look at Main Menu Recording in order to display the status of the failsafe MODEM SETUP Speech Modem Models Only MODEM SETUP Speech Modem Models Only MODEM SETUP M Modem Setup Menu The MODEM SETUP Menu contains the settings needed to fully configure a modem equipped 8200 for data transmission See Chapter 7 above page 7 12 MODEM SETUP 1 1 2 3 Phone n These fields represent the telephone numbers to be dialed The 8200 will cycle through each of the numbers until the alarms are acknowledged The telephone numbers follow the same meanings as for Hayes AT compatible modems except for the addition of a MODE character If the first character of the phone number is one of the following characters the 8200 will change its telephone mode for the call The default mode is voice mode V VOICE Mode the default mode The 8200 will use the dial out string to determine what it speaks and how it handles the voice phone call S SSP Mode the 8200 will send an SSP packet containing current data for any sensor with LOG ON This is for use in communicating with a Sutron base station If the base station ACKs the packet the ALERT is acknowledged and the status changes to ALARM C Computer Mode the 8200 will send the data out in ASCII in the same format as VIEW ALARMS It will then prompt Press lt ENTER gt to acknowledge alarm and wait up to 10 seconds for enter to be pressed If lt ENTER gt is pressed th
231. leshooting 12 1 8200 turns on but does not work properly If the 8200 will not power up after you have checked and or replaced the battery and fuses then you may have a serious problem and the unit must be returned to the factory for repair 8200 turns on but does not work properly When the 8200 display will come on but you still have problems then you must determine whether you have a hardware problem or a software setup problem Hardware problems occur when sensors quit wires become loose or corroded or things are wired incorrectly Setup problems are those in which signals get to the 8200 but are not properly sampled processed or recorded Sensor problems 12 2 Hardware problems may show up in several ways Two of the most common ways are 1 inability to obtain sensor data at a new installation and 2 data for one or more sensors disappears at a site that has been working properly The first place to begin diagnosing a sensor hardware problem is the 8200 unit Turn the 8200 display on and use the arrow keys to move to the VIEW DATA LIVE READINGS sub menu Refer to Figure 2 2 Move into the LIVE READINGS sub menu and use the up down arrow keys to display each sensor and check to see 1f each is providing a reading For sensors that require switched 12 volts check that the SYSTEM SETUP MEASMNT SCHEDULE PwrMode is set to ON After you have the live readings for the sensor on the display logically work in an outward directi
232. line numbers well before a transmission is scheduled Tiny Basic code can then print any data 1t would like to be transmitted to a special device called BUFFER The program then sets a return code to tell the operating system 1f everything is ok Low level formatting and scheduling is still handled by the operating system Tiny Basic is only responsible for the data part of the transmission Synopsis 1 Selftimed Up to 5 minutes before a self timed transmision the 8200 will branch to line 60010 in Tiny Basic Line 60010 should be programmed to GOTO a lower line number which should open the device BUFFER initialize the size of the buffer turn the device on print characters to the buffer turn the device off set the return code in variable Z and stop Return codes are Z 0 do not transmit Z 1 send the buffer Z 2 send normal Binary Z 3 send normal SHEF ASCII If Basic takes too long to format the message the transmission will be skipped Formatting the BUFFER can be performed long before the transmission in another section of code which would eliminate the time constraint but this does not allow for different random amp self timed messages and it is usually desirable to place the most recent data in to the transmission Synopsis 2 Random Just before a random transmision the 8200 will branch to line 60011 in Tiny Basic Line 60011 should be programmed to GOTO a lower line number which should open the device BUFFER initializ
233. ll appear By monitoring this count you can make sure the 8200 takes all the samples you expected and is not missing any because the Sampling Interval is shorter than the time the hardware needs to take all of the samples Menu Tree Reference 4 77 SYSTEM SETUP MEASMNT SCHEDULE SampTim SYSTEM SETUP MEASMNT SCHEDULE SampTim SampTim S Sampling Time Sample Time SampTim is the Time at which the 8200 will begin collecting a set of samples for the purpose of computing an average Sample Time applies to all sensors with Average enabled SYSTEM SETUP CONFIG SENSORS SampTim can be left at the default value of 00 00 00 for many applications SampTim should not be treated as an absolute Time but as a synchronization Time A SampTim of 00 00 00 causes the start of sampling to be synchronized to the hour Example The following setup will sample every second for 60 samples to compute an average The sampling will start at 00 59 00 00 14 00 00 29 00 The data will be logged at 00 00 00 00 15 00 SampTim 00 59 00 start sampling one minute before the measurement Samplnt 00 00 01 sample once a second Samples Set 60 take up to 60 samples MeasTim 00 00 00 measure other sensors and log data synchronized to the hour MeasInt 00 15 00 repeat every 15 minutes SYSTEM SETUP Basic Program PC Only 4 78 B Basic Program When using the Test Set this option from the System Setup Menu gives you the ability to work with t
234. ln Retries Use RS 485 Long Packets HW Handshake MODEM SETUP MODEM Dial Out AnswerMode Number Rings PhonePass Dialln DialOut 1 GOES Radio Setup GOES Tx Mode SatID Internatl Format ST Carrier ST Channel ST Time ST Rate ST Data TX ST DatTmST DatInST Channel RR RN Rate RA Rate TX Alarm RR AlmInRR Data TX RR DatTmRR DatInRR INSPECT SYSTEM Perform Selftest Display Status Clear Status Enter SDI 12 Cmd Production Test Select Radio Test LOS Radio Bert LOS Radio Transmit Status GOES RADIO TEST GOES Send Selftimed Send Random Send to Sutron Getting To Know The 8200 3 5 Front Panel Control of the 8200 3 6 Positioning within the menu tree Positioning within the menu tree is controlled by the 4 keypad keys marked with black triangles Pressing the Y down arrow key causes the display window to move one step down in the menu Similarly the la up arrow key causes the display window to move up within a menu The P right arrow key is used to select or move into a menu heading For example when the display window has been moved down the main menu until VIEW DATA is shown pressing gt will shift the display to show LIVE READINGS the first item of the VIEW DATA sub menu If the menu item has no sub menu pressing gt will have no affect The 4 key moves you left or up one menu level each time it is pressed If you are in a sub menu pressing 4 will return you to
235. log inputs If you want to use a pressure sensor at the site you may need to change the jumper settings If you still need to make a millivolt measurement but do not need the 5V and 5V reference voltages you can use Analog Press 5 and 8 for analog measurements and leave Analog Press 6 and 7 for the millivolt input An example of this type of sensor would be a pyranometer that has a millivolt output but does not use the reference voltages Counter Frequency Sensors The 8200 counter circuits can be programmed to be either event counters totalizing the counts that are received or frequency counters In either case the 8200 expects to see a 0 to 5 volt signal from the sensor Sensors compatible with the 8200 counter frequency circuits are tipping buckets wind sensors with amplified speed output Tipping buckets have a simple switch inside that closes momentarily when the collector is emptied This works with the 8200 because the counter frequency inputs have a pull up resistor When the switch closes the circuit is pulled to ground which causes the swing from 5 volts to 0 and back to 5 When used as counters the circuits count up to 32767 and then roll over to 0 A clear counter command will also cause the accumulator to reset to 0 When used to make frequency measurements the 8200 counts the number of pulses it sees in a one second period to determine the frequency Because it uses a one second interval the accuracy is 1 Hz If you need higher
236. lts during the maximum sensor current drain Failure to observe this specification will cause bad communications and or bad data Connector type The connector type is not part of the SDI specification On the 8210 there are two interconnected sets of SDI 12 connections The 8200A uses a DB 9 labeled SDI 12 with the following pinouts 1 Data 7 Ground 9 12V Communications Communications rate is 1200 baud ASCII printable characters or Data can be viewed on most terminals though not all some terminals will not read SDI because the standard does not make use of voltages In order to view SDI data connect the data line to the RX data line of the receiving device This will normally be pin 3 for DB 25 inputs on terminals and IBM PC s or compatibles For PC AT s or laptop PC s this will normally be pin 2 of the DB 9 connectors Ground must also be connected most likely to pin 7 on DB 25 pin 5 of a DB 9 SETUP of SDI sensors Each SDI 12 sensor has an address from 0 to 9 This address differentiates one sensor from another As they are shipped they are almost always set to address zero 0 If when you are interfacing more than one sensor to the 8200 you must set each sensor to a unique address This is normally done by setting dip switches on the sensor or by software commands via the front panel of the 8200 or the programming terminal being used Failure to set unique addresses for each sensor will result in failure of the communications i
237. lysis of how much power the 8200 requires The analysis is required to determine how long the 8200 will operate from the battery without recharging and what size solar panel or charging source should be used The 8200 uses different amounts of power depending on what it is doing The only way to come up with the power budget is to determine how much time the 8200 spends in each of its tasks and how much power is used doing each task The following list shows the power used by the 8200 in some typical tasks Please note that the consumption is approximate Quiescent basic model 0 25 ma Quiescent GOES 10ma Quiescent LOS 30ma Measuring 5 30ma Transmitting GOES 3500 ma Installation 8 1 Power Budget 8 2 Transmitting LOS 2500 ma Telephone OFF HOOK 50ma Display ON 300 ma To find the power needed by a site add up all the power required by each of the tasks taking into account the percent of time spent in each task The best way to do this is to make a table or spreadsheet listing each of the tasks current and times as shown below for a GOES 8200 that collects data every 15 minutes and transmits once every 4 hours Task Current Percent Time Average Current Collecting 30ma 5sec 900 sec 0 2 5 seconds to collect every 15 minutes Transmitting 3500 45sec 14400 sec 10 9 45 second tx every 4 hours Quiescent 10ma 100 10 always Total Average 21 1 ma Current Total Average 253 milliwatts Power current 12VDC Reme
238. m Menu starts the status report You will see a variety of system status information scroll across the display To increase the scrolling rate press the P right arrow key To decrease the scrolling rate press the 4 left arrow key To return to the normal scroll rate press the l button 4 32 INSPECT SYSTEM Display Status If using a Test Set initiate the Display Status to view the system status information This option may report one or more of the following No System Errors Rom Error Ram R W Error at XX XX EEROM Write Error at XXXX EEROM CheckSum Error TERM MODEM RADIO Resets XXXX ROM CheckSum XXXX EEROM CheckSum XXXX LOG Size XXXK Recording Status XXXXXX Modem Status Serial Status Radio Status Radiol Status Radio2 Status Serial Status Goes Status Local Bert Stats Remote Bert Stats Mail Ram Card Battery Status min XXX max XXX programmable No errors detected ROM Error uninitialized or very serious Address of bad RAM byte Address of bad EEROM byte Bad EEROM or system error RX 5 5 0 bad Protocol information includes device name number of messages received number of messages seen number bad number of transmissions number of attempts and number failed TX 10 10 0 bad Number of system resets CheckSum of the ROM should not change CheckSum of the EEROM Size of the log in K bytes Recording can be Disabled Waiting PreAvera
239. mber to add in the power required by sensors You can see that we had to estimate the amount of time spent collecting transmitting as well as the power required for collecting It is best if you come up with these numbers yourself using actual measurements of the power consumption for an operating 8200 Once you have a value for the average consumption record it and use it as a reference when troubleshooting a station A site that shows a marked change in power consumption warrants a closer look Note Remember and use the simple equation Power current voltage and keep the units straight If current is in milliamps than power is in milliwatts Once you have the average power required by the 8200 you are able to make two important calculations First compute the battery capacity To do this divide the battery capacity by the average power needed by the 8200 as follows battery duration battery capacity 8200 Average Current Example Compute the battery duration for a 24 amp hr battery powering an 8200 with average power consumption of 50 ma battery duration 24000ma hr 50ma 484 hrs Cabling Cabling Since you cannot use 100 of any battery the actual duration will be less We recommend you only plan on using 75 of the capacity of a battery which reduces the actual duration by 25 In our example the 484 hrs duration would become 363 hours The size of the solar panel needed for the site depends on both the aver
240. mbers functions operators and parenthesis and follow the normal BASIC syntax including order of operation Following is a list of operators which Tiny Basic supports inside expressions A gt B True 1 if A Greater than B otherwise False 0 A gt B True 1 if A Greater than or equal to B otherwise False 0 A lt B True 1 if A Less than B otherwise False 0 lt True 1 if A Less than or equal B otherwise False 0 gt True 1 if A Not equal B otherwise False 0 True 1 if A Equal B otherwise False 0 AB Raise A to the power of B Please note that negative values of the variable A raised to odd integer powers are not handled by this function and this may affect some polynomial equations For instance 2 3 will return 8 instead of 8 If you need to cube a variable X you could use either 1 X X X or 2 SGN X X43 The first example is actually faster for a small power like 3 A B Multiply A by B A B Divide A by B A B Add A plus B A B Subtract B from A A Negate A A Mod B Modulas Remainder of A divided by B A And B Logical Boolean And of A and B AOrB Logical Boolean Or of A and B Examples Not A Logical Boolean Not of A A Xor B Exclusive or of A and B Examples The following examples show Tiny BASIC at work and suggest codes to handle common programming problems The 8200 setup is given as well as the 8200 Tiny BASIC code Initializing values Tiny basic programs often accumulate
241. n a file named BUOY1012 LOG and save the data as STAT1012 use the following command LOGSTAT BUOY 1012 gt STAT1012 HEADER This program simply displays the header for the LOG file Since a LOG file is binary you cannot know what is in it without a program such as HEADER The header contains information on the start date number of sensors amount of data It does not give the names of the sensors LIST LIST is supplied as a courtesy to our customers the software is copyrighted by Vernon D Buerg and may not be sold The author requests a gift of 15 or any amount if you find the program of value For more information enter LIST filename and press to view a help screen LIST also accepts wildcard filenames so for instance to view all the PRN files enter LIST PRN To view the next file press CTRL PGDN or to see the previous enter CTRL PGUP Also if you are logging a lot of sensors the Appendix E 8200 Test Set Software LOGSTAT output may exceed 80 characters per line In this case you can output the summary to a file with LOGSTAT filename gt SUMMARY TXT Then you can enter LIST SUMMARY TXT and use the LEFT ARROW and RIGHT ARROW keys to view the parts of the line which do not fit on the screen TS8200 TS TS8200 and TS are old versions of the 8200 communications software The programs do not know how to do XMODEM communications TS8200 can do a fast dump of memory which takes less time than the corresponding TS8210
242. n and azimuth 176 true and e compute the magnetic direction e deviation is 5 west for the area determined from a local topographic map such as available from the USGS By following these steps it may be determined that azimuth 176 true 5 181 magnetic Chapter 9 Retreiving Your Data This chapter describes the different ways you can use to retrieve data from an 8200 The different ways include RAM Cards PCs radio communications telephone communications and satellite communications Review this chapter to make sure you know all the ways to retrieve data from the 8200 Introduction Introduction There are many ways to retrieve data from the 8200 This chapter presents all the ways that we know of You may be able to figure out a few of your own There are three basic types of readings that the 8200 can communicate live readings last measured value and logged data The retrieval of each of these three types of data is discussed Live Readings Live readings are available only through the 8200 menu As a result you can only see live readings from the front panel test set or through a telephone speech modem Live readings cannot be transmitted over LOS radio or through the GOES satellite The VIEW DATA LIVE Readings menu is used to view the data Using a speech modem the live data function is selected by pressing 4 in the speech menu see page 4 45 Last Measured Value The last measured value
243. nd Time ST this is the GMT transmit time assigned by NESDIS Add 10 seconds to the time to allow for clock drift e g 02 00 10 not 02 00 00 Specify the Rate ST which is usually 04 00 00 four hour intervals between transmissions Quick Setup 5 3 Satellite Units Random Reporting Specify the Data TX ST the total number of items from the 8200 log which will be encoded and sent in a single transmission for any and every sensor which has been enabled for self timed transmission For example if you are collecting data every 15 minutes and you want data only for the 4 hour period which has just elapsed then you will calculate Data TX ST to be 16 4 logged values hour 4 hours 16 The total number of values sent in the transmission will be dependent on the number of enabled sensors For example if you had three sensors enabled a transmission would contain 3 Data TX ST or 3 16 48 values For 4 hours of redundant data 8 hours total you would double Data TX ST That is set it to 32 Set the DatTim ST to 00 00 00 Set DatInST to the measurement interval in most cases 00 15 00 15 minutes NEVER set this to zero Satellite Units Random Reporting 5 4 1 Alarm Setup You should set the Enable for each of the sensors to ON for all the sensors Decide which sensor s will trigger a random transmission set Enable to GOES for these sensors Decide which sensors will be sent along with the sensor that triggers the alarm Then defin
244. nditionally executes a statement or skips to the next line number if expression is false ex check battery voltage 10 A Measure Battery 20 If A lt 10 Then Goto 40 30 Print Battery OK Stop 40 Print Battery BAD Stop FOR var start TO end STEP inc A FOR NEXT loop performs the following steps l Initialize var to start ex print 1 through 10 2 Execute any statements following until a 10 Fori 1 to 10 NEXT var statement is found 20 Print i 3 Increment var by 1 or inc if specified 30 Next 1 4 If var is less than end then go to step 2 note FOR loops may not be nested LIST linel line2 Lists the whole program or just part of a program starting from linelup to line2 if specfied You can use ex Some different combinations L as an abbreviation for the LIST command LIST List whole program You can press ESC to abort a listing LIST 100 List just line 100 LIST 100 List lines 100 and after L 100 200 List lines 100 to 200 LOG Time SensorName Num Stores Num in to the 8200 LOG under the specified SensorName and Time See the Time function for more ex LOG Time Analog 25 information on how to specify a time MEM index number Stores a number in to the MEM array The MEM array consists of all BASIC memory not consumed by your ex MEM 0 55 2 program lines and can be used for any purpose Valid values of index must range from 0 to FREEMEM 1 Use the MEM function to access a number stored in the MEM array
245. ndix F contains information on Sutron Standard Protocol SSP the protocol used by 8200 in most LOS radio and telephone communications xi Chapter 1 Introduction This chapter introduces you to the Sutron Model 8200 family of data recorders and transmitters and presents the features and capabilities that have made the 8200 the nucleus of data collection systems throughout the world 8200 Family Overview 8200 Family Overview The Sutron 8200 family of data collection products is specifically designed to meet the wide variety of remote data collection needs of the hydrologic and meteorologic communities These needs may range from simple data recording to transmission via satellite or other telemetry links Each 8200 unit has a range of inputs designed to support the most common data collection applications These include Water Level Rainfall Temperature pressure Relative Humidity Wind speed and direction The overall 8200 design utilizes CMOS and low power circuitry to achieve long life battery operation and provide a rugged system for unattended field operation in extreme environments For even more durability each 8200 is tested to operate over the 40 C to 60 C temperature extremes expected in remote environments Full EMI and transient protection are built into each input The 8200 family is divided into two basic units the 8200A and the 8210 The 8210 is a third generation 8200 adding features most asked for by cus
246. nds that can be used to initiate the uploading or downloading of data to or from a RAM Card or other device When using a test set the menu will also contain functions for transferring the setup and basic program between the test set and the 8200 See separate headings under DUMP DATA for complete information EEROM SETUP EEROM SETUP E EEROM Setup Options EEROM SETUP is a menu item These items affect some EEROM values that control the way the 8200 communicates and also contains some calibration and timing values Once these values are set they are already in EEROM and do not need to be saved using SaveSetup See separate headings under EEROM SETUP for complete information Exit PC only X Exit This selection logs you out of the 8200 If you are connected through a modem the 8200 will also hang up the phone GOES SETUP GOES Models Only GOES SETUP GOES Models Only G GOES Radio Setup Basic setup for self timed reporting is controlled through the GOES Radio Setup sub menu Eleven fields must be defined in order to make self timed transmissions The fields are Menu Tree Reference 4 3 MAIN MENU INSPECT SYSTEM TX Mode Transmission mode self timed random reporting or both Format ST Data message format Internatl Enable selection of international channels for 8200s used outside of the USA Carrier ST Message carrier length short or long SatID Assigned ID code for this station from NOAA NESDIS Chann
247. ng software on the test set that supports XMODEM or YMODEM such as TS8210 or PROCOMM When this function is selected the 8200 will prompt Ready for X Ymodem Upload Download press ESC to abort If you are running TS8210 the transfer program menu will also be displayed This menu allows you to select between Receive and Send You will also be able to specify a file name if you are sending to the 8210 If you are receiving the setup and using YMODEM the program will automatically name the setup file as unitid SET If this file already exists on disk you will be prompted to either replace the file or enter a unique file name If you are running a different communications program you will need to instruct your program to upload or download the setup For example when running PROCOMM this is done by pressing PGUP to perform an upload send setup to the 8200 or PGDN to perform a download receive setup from the 8200 Other software will have a similar function If you are downloading the setup select the YMODEM protocol so the software will be able to automatically name the file for you If sending a file you may use either XMODEM or YMODEM Sutron s TS9000 software can also be used to send and receive 8200 setups By selecting the transfer setup option in TS9000 the Transfer Program Menu will automatically pop up and you can either send a program setup to or get one from the RTU 8200 In one transmission this method captures bot
248. no telemetry 3 8200 3000 Speech Modem 4 8200 4000 LOS Modem for external radio 5 8200 5000 GOES Transmitter 6 8200 6000 LOS 4 Watt Radio Modem 7 8200 7000 Cellular Modem The following are some examples of models that can be ordered 8200 0014 1 8200A no telemetry 8200 5014 1 8200A with GOES transmitter 8210 5014 1 8210 with GOES transmitter 8210 5014 2 8210 with GOES transmitter modular mount 8210 5314 1 8210 with Speech Modem and GOES Transmitter 8210 3614 1 8210 with Speech Modem and LOS 4 Watt Radio Modem Note the 8200A can have only one telemetry option Wide Range of Applications 1 2 8200s may be used to collect basic information from sensors to support a variety of different systems Typical applications may include Flood Warning Weather Stations General stage and precipitation networks Dam safety monitoring Store and forward to Sutron 9000 series SCADA systems On site recording of many kinds of digital or analog data Irrigation control Inputs Specifically Designed for HYDROMET Applications Inputs Specifically Designed for HYDROMET Applications The 8200 family was designed from the ground up for the low cost acquisition of data from a wide assortment of sensors By limiting the number of inputs and by specifically tailoring the design towards measurement of precipitation wind speed direction and water level Sutron has provided an economical way to obtain needed information Simple Setup The 8200
249. nowledge air alarm alert analog any at average bars barometric battery cancel Celsius centi change command continue dam data degrees direction disable ed make words past tense enable enter error Fahrenheit falling feet flood gate gage height ing add ing suffix hertz high hour Menu Tree Reference 4 43 MODEM SETUP Dial In 122 humidity 123 in 124 inches 125 incorrect 126 internal 127 is 128 kilometers 129 knots 130 Langleys 131 limit 132 level 133 low 134 mercury 135 meters 136 miles 137 mili 138 no 139 normal 140 not 141 number 142 of 143 off 144 OK 145 on 146 out 147 outliers 148 password 149 per 150 percent 151 position 152 precipitation 153 pressure 154 radiation 155 rate 156 relative 157 reservoir 158 rising 159 run 160 s make words plural 161 second 162 sensor 163 snow 164 solar 165 speed 166 stage 167 standard deviation 168 station 169 steady 170 Sutron 171 telephone 172 temperature 173 the 4 44 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 this time valve Volts warning was water Watts welcome wind ed make words past tense 107 ing add ing suffix 118 s make words plural 160 1 2 second of silence 0 a 56 account 55 acknowledge 57 air 58 alarm 59 alert 60 analog 61 any 62 at 63 average 64 barometric 66 bars 65 battery 67 cancel 68 Celsius 69 centi 70 change 71 c
250. nsible protocol each message has an operation code and a length which is capable of much more than just file transfer SSP can be used for collecting real time and logged data from an 8200 modifying setup and real time variables transmitting alarms uploading downloading setups and programs setting the time sending messages and getting statuses SSP is designed for half duplex communication with multiple listeners and uses CSMA for collision prevention and CRC 16 for error detection The 8200 s SSP capabilities are fully exploited by Sutron s PC Base 2 master station software and specific comments regarding how PC Base 2 supports the 8200 have been added to this document The general format for an SSP message is as follows DLE SOH to n from n DLE STX flagseq 4 opcode len 2 data len DLE ETX crc16 2 Numbers in parenthesis indicate the byte length of a field n indicates a variable length field In addition over a direct connect or a telephone connection SSP supports a s w handshake to make sure that the receiver is ready before the transmitter sends a message The sender first sends out a RTS character and waits for a CTS character before sending a packet Usually the receiver sends a CTS character as soon as it is ready to receive which allows the sender to progress without delay Special characters used by SSP and their decimal ASCII values RTS 17 Q CTS 6 F DLE 16 P SOH 01 A STX 02 B ETX 03 C Opcodes used b
251. nsor variable POWER is set to 1 Set the basic run interval to the minimum response time to the command that you require 100 If Power 1 Then Power 1 Goto 120 If 1 Turn the power on 110 Power 0 else turn the power off 120 All Done You can ask for a sensor value to be entered with the speech modem by using the nnn command in a dial message This will wait for the user to enter a value for sensor number nnn A simpler method is to enable the speech menus by placing the m command in the dial message Using this method the user can then select menu option 8 to enter a sensor number and a new value for the sensor The operating system will prevent the user from changing anything other than a programmable sensor Creating States to control execution One problem you may have been wondering about is how to perform a variety of tasks under different conditions all the while using only one basic program The answer is to Tiny BASIC 10 7 create different states A state is a variable which contains a number indicating what your program should currently be doing For instance if your program must perform 5 different steps in order a shell of the program might look like this 10 If S 0 Then Goto 100 0 is always the initial value of a variable 20 If S 1 Then Goto 200 30 If S 2 Then Goto 300 40 If S 3 Then Goto 400 50 If S 4 Then Goto 500 60 Stop Illegal State 10
252. nstead of the bare wire rusulting in a bad connection Surge and Lightning Protection A major factor in keeping a site fully operational for extended periods of time is proper grounding Static electricity and other transients from nearby storms or high voltage power lines can cause a variety of problems in the 8200 if the site is not grounded properly Good grounding is the most important way to protect a site from damage caused by transients and to insure its long term operation The guidelines listed should be followed when an installation is performed Installation 8 3 Bench Testing 1 Use long ground rods The idea behind earth grounding is to drive the rods far enough into the ground so the metal comes in contact with the grounds own moisture Because of this exact lenghts of the rods may vary therefore you must have a good idea of current conditions such as precipitation amounts and ground moisture levels to make the best judgement on the length of the rods As a general rule of thumb the longer the better 2 Use more than one rod In some instances it may be necessary to create a grounding array of up to four rods all of which are tied together by a heavy gage copper wire 10 12 AWG Remember to not compromise length for numbers It is far better to have one 8 ft grounding rod than four 2 ft rods 3 After tying the rods together with copper cable connect another piece of the copper wire to a rod and bring it inside to be conn
253. nterface i e no data logged Consult the sensor manufacturers data for information on your particular sensor s Issuing SDI commands From the front panel go to the Inspect System menu go down to enter SDI 12 command press set get ENTER use arrow keys to set the characters the is done for you press set when done Result reply from the sensor will be displayed press set to continue From a terminal go to same place in menu tree type in the SDI command here you have to enter the yourself Useful SDI commands Resetting the address by software some sensors is normally done by sending the aAb command a A b where a is the current address of the sensor you want to change and b is the address you want to change to e g 0A5 changes the address of sensor 0 to address 5 Use the enter SDI 12 command option of the inspect system menu in the 8200 for the above operation or any SDI 12 command operation Other initialization may be required for your sensor including calibration sample interval etc You may be required to use the sensor manufacturer s test set for such operations Troubleshooting 12 9 SDI 12 Interface Standard 12 10 Another useful SDI 12 command is the al where a is the address of the sensor e g 3I for sensor at address 3 command 41 will return an identification string from the sensor at address 4 which includes the SDI version no the vendor s name and the sensor model sensor vers
254. nterval allows you to omit data from the log the size of the log remains the same The effect of Interval is to prevent certain values from being written to the log These missing values are skipped during a transmission of the data which can greatly reduce the amount of time it takes to transmit a full day s worth of data Both the self timed and random transmissions for GOES are also affected as sensors not logged are not transmitted vs transmitting missing values Sutron standard protocol does not take advantage of this option hence transmissions over LOS Radio or telephone using SSP will still include some overhead for missing data Yet there is some improvement because missing data requires 1 byte to send whereas a data value needs 5 bytes SYSTEM SETUP CONFIG SENSORS Log Log L Log The Log field can have a value of either ON or OFF When ON the 8200 reserves space in its log for the data of that particular sensor At the end of taking its measurements and computations the 8200 will check each individual sensor to see which ones have the Log function switched on If Log is OFF no space is reserved for the sensor and the data cannot be stored in the log Menu Tree Reference 4 69 SYSTEM SETUPICONFIG SENSORS Measure The amount of space taken up by a sensor in the log is controlled by MeasInt and Measurements per Log With Meas nt set to 00 15 00 and Measurement per Log set to 1 the log will be prepared for 15 minute data If
255. o 15 minutes then in a standard 4 hour cycle you would want to set Data TX ST to 16 and accumulate 48 values for transmission 3 designated parameters 4 values hour 4 hours The 48 values would require 48 3 144 bytes Thus a Data TX ST of 16 is acceptable 144 bytes is less than 1 3 of the available message length of 500 to 560 bytes Estimating the number of bytes in a SHEF format message Estimating the number of bytes in a SHEF format message is considerably more complicated than for the BINARY format Messages are composed of readable ASCII characters each of which requires one byte Message length is a function of the interval between self timed transmissions Data TX ST number of designated parameters no of characters used in each SHEF code no of characters used for each parameter value The number of bytes per designated parameter must now be computed depending on the logging setup Consider again the example of 3 designated parameters logged at 15 minute intervals for a 4 hour period Assume that the SHEF code for each parameter requires two bytes Allow two additional bytes for spaces and separators Allow 1 byte for sign and one byte for a decimal point if required presence or absence of a decimal point is determined by the number of right digits used for logging a parameter Add an additional byte for each digit in the number you will transmit For example a single water level reading might appear
256. o disable the RS 485 transmitter use with on mode 3 Control 26 0 To enable the RS 485 receiver use with on mode 3 Control 25 2 To disable the RS 485 receiver use with on mode 3 Control 25 0 To output the rest of the transmit buffer and disable the transmitter with on mode 5 Control 10 Example 1 Here is a short sample program which uses RS 485 on mode 4 to send a string HELLO out the RS 485 port and reads in a number Warning This program cannot be run interactively on the RS 232 port because the TERM port will not be available for use It can be run on a scheduled basis or it can be run while logged in thru a modem or connected with a null modem connector to the internal COM port with slot 2 set to COM MODEM 10 Open TERM 20 Control 1 4 purn port on in mode 4 30 Control 11 9600 set port speed to 9600 baud 40 Print Hello send a test message 50 SetTimeout 2 wait two seconds for data 60 A Input 0 read in a number 70 SetTimeout 0 disable timeouts 80 Control 2 4 turn the port off 90 Close 100 RS485 A save input value in a basic sensor Communicating with RS 485 sensors Example 2 Here is a program which will read an SDI 12 sensor thru the SDI 12 interface and then read another sensor thru the RS 485 interface 10 Open TERM 20 Control 12 0 set PROTOCOL SETUP Use RS 485 to no 30 Close 40 SDI1_1 Measure SDI1_1 measure SDI1_1 using SD
257. o send the lt ENTER gt key after accepting the data Example The phone number C5551212 12 will dial up a paging service and enter the message 12 to be sent to the pager Note the number of commas will depend on the paging service Example The phone number 5551212 will cause the 8200 to dial the phone number and use the dial out string to control what is spoken done over the phone MODEM SETUP AnswerMode 4 40 AnswerMode A Answer Mode DATA When this option is selected the 8200 will answer the phone in the data mode that is it sends the answer tone to allow connection to a modem VOICE When this option is selected the 8200 will answer the telephone and begin speaking the Dial In Message MODEM SETUP Dial In VOICE amp In this mode the 8200 supports both voice and data DATA communications When the 8200 answers the telephone it speaks the phrase Please press pound If you press the key on the telephone the 8200 will begin speaking the Dial In Message If you press the key the 8200 will immediately send the modem answer tone If you do not press either key the 8200 will wait for a pre determined amount of time and then send the modem answer tone DATA amp In this mode the 8200 answers with data carrier first for 5 seconds VOICE and then if a modem originate tone is not detected the 8200 will switch to voice mode This feature allows dual operation in situations where touch tone phones are not ava
258. oderl Counter Enable on on Measure on on Average off off Log on on Intrvl 00 00 00 00 00 00 Slope 1 00 1 00 Offset 0 00 0 00 Elevation 0 0 Right Digits 2 2 Alarm Setup Enabled for GOES on High Alarm on off High Level 525 0 00 Low Alarm off off Low Level 0 00 0 00 ROC Alarm off off ROC Level 0 00 0 00 Deadband 0 00 0 00 Group Num 2100 0120 Setup for LOS RADIO POLLED You do not need a special setup to use an 8200 in a Radio system Simply set up the 8200 as normal to make its measurements and log the data Then at the base station set up the software to poll the station using its UNIT ID as the path name You may poll for current data or logged data See Chapter 9 for more information on data retrieval Setup for Telephone Speech Modem To set up the 8200 for use on phone systems with both speech and modem capabilities first set up the 8200 for its measurements and logging Then use the Modem Setup and Alarm Setup to control its operation over the phone Remember that the Alarm setup allows you to assign phrases to each sensor value so you must use it even though your station may not have alarms The following setup is for an 8200 that operates in either voice or data modes AnswerMode VO amp DA The Dialln message says phrase 48 welcome to the How To 7 7 Setup for Telephone Alarms SUTRON 8200 function II speak live data for sensors and function m speak the main menu Each sensor has th
259. of KB 1024 bytes to hold your program 64 is the maximum size the default is 1 KB see Chapter 4 page 4 16 for more information 2 Download the program using the Upload Download Data Menu Transfer Basic Program option or enter the program interactively using the System Setup Basic Program option see 4 78 for more information 3 Use the System Setup Enable Sensors menu to change the name of any sensors to the names used in the program Remember to place a in the beginning of the name of any programmable sensors used in the program Tiny BASIC 10 1 4 In the System Setup Measurement Schedules menu set the Basic Run Interval according to how often you wish to run the program and set the Basic Run Time if you want to add an offset to when the program runs see 7 44 for more 5 Turn Recording ON to start your program Creating a Simple Program 10 2 Most of the you will just need a very simple program which does not require the full power of Tiny Basic The following are a couple examples of such an application Examplel How you can transform an Analog input using an equation Let s say you have a sensor connected to Analog which must be linearized by applying a polynomial First you should enable Analog and configure it with LOG ON but MEASURE and AVERAGE OFF This will allow Tiny Basic to make the measurements Next enter the following program or your adaptation of it using the System Setup Basic Pro
260. of the connections for Analog sensors 5 6 7 and 8 Refer to the beginning of this chapter to see how to set these jumpers SDI 12 sensors can be renamed to allow any SDI 12 address or measurement number to be specified This allows the 8200 to support devices which have addresses beyond the basic 10 or require alternate measurement commands To remap an SDI 12 sensor from its default name address and parameter number you can use the form SENSOR7a_p where SENSOR7 is the name you wish to give the sensor Grounds Grounds up to 7 characters a is the address of the sensor 0 through and p is the parameter number 1 through 9 Example airtempA_1 would read parameter 1 from the SDI 12 device at address A If you wish to use a measurement command other than the default aM then you can use the form SENSS5a_pMm where SENSS is the name you wish to give the sensor up to 5 characters a is the address of the sensor 0 through p is the parameter number 1 through 9 and m is the measurement command to use Example stage0_1M3 would use measurement command 3 to read parameter 1 from the SDI 12 device at address 0 Another feature is that you can define multiple sensors for the same SDI 12 parameter which will allow you to define separate slopes offsets and other processing for the same parameter Note this renaming can only be done from a PC If you try to change the name using the front panel the underscore _ w
261. of the following Satellite Radio LOS Radio earned w Modem and Speech Synthesis cellular radio Note if the cellular radio is mounted internally to the 8210 the second internal communication slot is not available Internal Battery 0014 and 3014 models only 12V 6 5 aH operates the 8210 for 90 days at 15 minute sampling Internal charger regulator provides 1 25 Amps max for solar panel input or DC voltage Regulator utilizes different charge rates depending on the state of battery resulting in float charging the battery at 13 8 Vdc Quiescent 270 uA Typ 500 uA Mx TypAvg 2 mA 15 minute intervals of shaft encoder sample 20 internal to the enclosure software controlled I O lines with connector pinouts compatible with OPTO 22 interface equipment 12 lines defined as inputs and 8 lines defined as open collector outputs 5 of these outputs are provided to the outside of the 210 enclosure see ECN 4607 Software Control of switched external 12VDC power 12 VDC Power is polyfused No fuse replacement required Switch closure w quadrature inputs 2 quadrature S E max Input Levels 0 5V Switch closure 5 Max 5 Max Resolution 16 bits Max Input Frequency 32 kHz 0 1 wo rollover 1 MHz max w rollover 8 Standard Not using differential ort inon 13 bits Accuracy 0 02 of full scale over temperature range Input Range 0 5V Standard De Excitation Output 5V 12V Pwr Consumption A D 30 m
262. offset for sensor 7 3 downloading of 7 13 for GOES transmissions 7 6 printing 7 4 typical field setups 7 1 7 4 uploading of 7 13 variety of examples 7 1 7 13 7 1 7 13 Slope 4 72 Speech assigning special characters 4 49 menu possible operations 4 51 speech phrases 4 51 numeric list of phrases 4 44 4 45 prefixes 4 65 suffixes 4 67 Speech Phrases alphabetic list of phrases 4 46 4 47 Start 4 11 Start Date 4 11 Sub Menu 3 6 Suffix 4 67 Suffix Units 4 67 Switched Power Options 4 78 Switched Power Time 4 78 System setup 4 6 4 58 T TA Rate 4 56 Talk to Modem or Terminal 4 38 Telephone setup for 7 7 Test EXT Radio 4 38 Test Set 8200 menu tree 3 10 controlling the 8200 3 9 linking to 8200 3 9 menu layouts GOES radio 3 10 starting the software 3 9 The 8200 bench testing 8 4 changing pre defined values 3 13 configuration of jumpers 11 8 configuring sensors 4 68 connecting the charging voltage 2 3 connecting the main battery 2 1 disassembly reassembly 11 3 display 3 1 activating 3 3 setting shut off time limit 4 20 enabling sensors 4 73 front panel graphic 3 2 hooking up sensors to 6 1 6 7 initialization 2 1 11 11 keypad 3 1 location of fuses 11 4 operating the unit 3 19 Password 4 80 password setting 11 11 power budget 8 1 providing a suitable enclosure 8 1 11 1 resetting 11 12 sensor numbers list 4 50 seting the date display f
263. ol alarm levels on Timer or Timer2 This would allow a cellular phone to be turned on during certain times during the day to allow dial in A delay Time called PowerDelay analogous to the AnalgDelay and PressDelay is provided in the EEROM SETUP sub menu see page 4 17 SYSTEM SETUPIMEASMNT SCHEDULE PwrTim PwrTim P Switched Power Time If Power Mode in the MEASUREMENT SCHEDULE sub menu is set to ADVANCE Power Time is the Time that the 8200 will turn on the 12v SW PWR on the terminal block In all other cases PwrTim is ignored see PwrMode below page 4 76 for a description of all the power modes SYSTEM SETUP MEASMNT SCHEDULE Sampint Samplnt l Sampling Interval The sample interval Samplnt is the Time HH MM SS which will elapse between sample collections for all sensors configured with AVERAGE ON SYSTEM SETUP CONFIG SENSORS With Samp nt set to 00 00 01 the 8200 will sample the sensors every second The sampling continues until the proper number of samples have been collected or the next measurement Time is reached 00 00 00 is a valid time for the sampling interval which tells the 8200 to take samples as fast as it can After setting up the 8200 you should use the INSPECT SYSTEM Display Status preferably from a test set since it can update the screen much faster than the front panel option to monitor the recording status When the 8200 takes samples the message Averaging 1 Averaging 2 Averaging 3 etc wi
264. ommand 100 continue 101 dam 102 data 103 degrees 104 direction 105 disable 106 eight 9 eighteen 19 eighty 27 eleven 12 enable 108 enter 109 error 110 falling 112 Fahrenheit 111 feet 113 fifteen 16 fifty 24 five 6 flood 114 for 5 For archive data 36 For live data 35 forty 23 four 5 fourteen 15 MODEM SETUP Dial In Alphabetical List of 8200 SPEECH PHRASES gage gate height Hello Welcome to the Sutron 8200 hertz high hour humidity hundred in inches incorrect internal iS is not available kilometers knots Langleys level limit low mercury meters miles mili minus nine nineteen ninety no normal not number o clock of off OK on one out outliers password per percent please Please call again Please enter password Menu Tree Reference 116 115 117 48 119 120 121 122 29 123 124 125 126 127 47 128 129 130 132 131 133 134 135 136 137 32 10 20 28 138 139 140 141 54 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 50 46 34 4 45 MODEM SETUP Dial In 4 46 Please press Please press pound point position pound precipitation press pressure radiation rate relative reservoir rising run second sensor sensor names and numbers sensors in alarm seven seventeen seventy six sixteen sixty snow solar speed stage standard deviation star station steady Sutron telephone tempe
265. on from the 8200 to the sensor Here are some of the questions you should ask M Are the sensor wires properly connected to the terminal block Correct polarity Screws tight M Are the wires from the terminal block to the sensor OK M Is there a connector at the sensor end M If there is is it solid Is there moisture in it M If this is an analog sensor can I measure a voltage output at the terminal block At the sensor end M If this is a switch closure device can I see the switch closure at the terminal block end with the wires disconnected M IfI simulate the input for example hook up a known voltage across an analog input or hook a switch across a counter does the live reading value change properly M Is the 8200 drawing excessive current Use an ammeter inline with the 12VDC positive lead to measure the current Excessive current may be caused by a faulty sensor or wiring In most cases if you can simulate the input you should This will ensure that the 8200 is operating properly If you cannot get live readings off a sensor after checking the terminal block connection the wires and any sensor end connector then you probably have a sensor failure Setup Problems If you can measure output at the instrument but have no live readings then you probably have a corroded or loose connector or broken wire Improper wiring should also be considered polarity reversed If you are certain that signal is reaching the 8200 but the li
266. or some reason If the display does not light as explained the first suspects should a dead main battery or a fuse To check an external battery simply measure the voltage on the battery using a Volt Meter To check an internal battery you must first open the unit in order to reach the battery If the battery voltage is less than 9 5v then the battery is either discharged or faulty and must be replaced or recharged A normal battery will read 11 to 13 VDC without charging and 13 to 14 7 volts under a charge Disconnect the charging voltage if it is present to get a good measure of the batteries condition If the battery is in good condition you should next check the condition of the fuses The unit must be open to check the fuses The 8210 has a single fuse on the protection termination board as a back up to its thermal fuses The 8200A has two fuses located on the front panel board If the a appears to be blown broken wire or black coating inside fuse then replace it If it appears to be good pry it out and check it with a volt ohm meter Blown fuses are normally a sign of shorts in sensor or charging circuit leads If you replace a fuse disconnect all of the wiring from the terminal block plugs replace the plugs and then connect the instruments one at a time with the display on If the fuse blows again during this operation you will know which sensor is at fault Similar reasoning applies to an external charger or power supply Troub
267. ording Alarm status VIEW DATA SYSTEM SETUP and so forth When using a PC all these items appear in a single menu which makes the concept of a MAIN MENU more clear MENU SUBMENU There are also other menus and submenus in the 8200 Like the main menu they contain all the items that appear by pressing only the down arrow The SYSTEM SETUP menu has the items MEASUREMENT SCHEDULE ENABLE SENSORS CONFIG SENSORS ALARM OPTIONS Change Password and SETUP Asa convention any item that is in all capital letters is another menu FIELD We will use the term field to describe any item in the menus that accepts a value You will always see the value displayed next to the name of Front Panel Control of the 8200 the field Time 1s a field which holds the value of the time as is Recording and many others You set the 8200 by changing the values of the fields You will note that the fields have names with both upper case and lower case letters FUNCTION Some items in a menu look like fields but do not have a value displayed These are functions that cause the 8200 to do something An example of a function is Init Setup that causes the 8200 to clear and initialize its setup to default values MENU PATH A final convention that we have developed is what we call the menu path The menu path is a concise way of explaining the menus and sub menus used to go to a specific item You read the menu path from left to right and MAIN MENU is implied
268. ormat 4 16 seting the time display format 4 19 setting the date 3 12 setting the ID 3 12 setting the time 3 12 setting up using the front panel 3 17 setting up using the test set 3 18 terminal strip 3 2 turning on recording 3 19 unpacking 2 1 Time 4 6 setting the 3 8 Time Format 4 19 Time ST 4 26 TimeFmt 4 19 TimeLimit 4 20 TN Rate 4 56 Transfer Basic Program 4 12 Transfer Baud Rate 4 16 Transfer Raw Ram Card Image 4 13 Transfer Setup 4 13 Transmit Mode 4 27 Transmit Status 4 39 Trend 4 67 Trending 4 58 4 67 TX Alarm Rate 4 56 TX Alarm Rate RR 4 30 TX Normal Rate 4 56 TX Normal Rate RR 4 30 TX Rate 4 26 TX Time 4 26 TXMode 4 27 U Unit ID 4 7 setting the 3 7 nit Memory 1 4 nit Name 4 7 pload Download Data 4 3 4 8 se RS 485 4 57 Jse RS 485 w SDI 12 4 57 ser Baud Rate 4 20 Jser Rate 4 20 Jser Time Limit sec 4 20 4 4 4 cGedqcdacCce lt Vv Value 4 73 View Data 4 7 4 82 live data 3 19 logged data 3 20 View Ram Card Directory 4 14 View Sensor Data 4 7 4 82 W Write Setup to Ram Card 4 11 Y Ymodem Ram Card File s 4 14 Z Zero Counters 4 81 Index 5
269. ort provides the following functions transmit last measured data transmit logged data upload download setup recording on off set date time change slope and offset store and forward message to another station All communications with the 8200 are done using Sutron Standard Protocol SSP which insures error free communications The communications can be either with a base station or one of Sutron s model 9000 field stations Other 8200s can also be used as smart repeaters to forward messages to other stations Sutron has several software products that run on PCs and VAX computers to handle communications Sutron also has a driver available so that Windows programs such as INTOUCH can retrieve data from 8200s Consult customer service for details on this software Enabling External Radio Support 9 6 External radio support is enabled through the Serial field in the EEROM Setup sub menu The path to the EEROM Setup sub menu is Menu Path EEROM SETUP Serial RADIO Y down arrow as required to reach EEROM Setup gt right arrow to enter the sub menu and Serial Press the J key to toggle the Serial field to RADIO The baud rate for communications over the external radio is set through the User Rate field of the EEROM Setup sub menu User Rate is the second field in the sub menu Use Connecting To An External Rf Modem the Y own arrow key to move from Serial field to the User Rate field Use the J key to toggle the baud rate to
270. ou are enabling sensors setting schedules and so forth With recording OFF the 8200 will still answer the phone as setup in the Modem setup and will also communicate over a radio You can also view live data for some sensors while recording is OFF However the 8200 may not have turned on the switched power that one of the sensors needs and you may get erroneous readings Quick Setup 5 5 Recording OFF ON When you set Recording ON the 8200 gets to work It will begin to use the schedule information you entered to measure sample and log data The 8200 will check for alarms if enabled and perform alarm actions that have been programmed If the unit has a GOES radio it will use the setup information to make any scheduled and random transmissions specified See the Recording section in Chapter 4 for a complete description of Recording ON 5 6 Chapter 6 Hooking Up Sensors This chapter describes how to hook up sensors to the 8200 It discusses the different kind of sensors that the 8200 can measure analog frequency counter quadrature SDI 12 and RS232 and provides details needed to connect and operate them with the 8200 Concepts Concepts Hooking up sensors is as simple as connecting the wires from the sensor to the terminal strip As a standard practice you should test each new application sensor connections and setup on the bench prior to installing it in the field Then create a complete setup sheet photocopy the one
271. ou press the gt right arrow If you change Value for a sensor which has as the first character in its name See BASIC the 8200 will simply store the value you enter as the last value for the sensor This provides a nice way for you to interact with a BASIC program that is using the values as user input to affect the way the program works Changing the Value for a counter and encoder sensors resets the counter hardware to the value you enter It does not change the slope or offset for the sensor Menu Tree Reference 4 71 SYSTEM SETUPIENABLE SENSOR Changing the Value setting for most other sensors initiates a calibration sequence that can automatically compute and set the slope and offset This is useful for an analog sensor such as a gate opening that needs to be calibrated on site Perform the following steps for an auto calibration 1 Move the sensor input at a known value 2 Set Value to the known reading A new offset will be computed 3 Move the sensor input at a different value 4 Set Value to the new known reading A new slope and offset will be computed If you only want to adjust an offset press gt or select another sensor after step 2 Do not press frontpanel or V keyboard again or the software will recompute and set invalid numbers for the slope and offset Note if you have enabled TINY BASIC vectoring for a sensor turn Recording OFF before setting the value You cannot calibrate the sensor in the
272. our change of the Unit ID press amp instead of This causes the 8200 to ignore your selection and restore the original value for the Unit ID Setting the Date The Date is the third entry in the main menu To select the Date press the down arrow key once after setting the Unit ID or twice after the Sutron 8210 xxvv message is displayed The date will normally be displayed in the Month Day Y ear format such as Babes 05 21 199 Getting To Know The 8200 3 7 Front Panel Control of the 8200 3 8 To change the Date press the key When is pressed a flashing cursor will appear on the first character of the month field To change the first character of the month use the up and down arrow keys just as in setting the Unit ID To change the second character press the right arrow key and then use the up down arrow keys to select the proper digit Now try to press the gt key again Notice that the 8200 will not allow you to advance to the day value by using the arrow key You must first save or set your new selection of the month before advancing to the day To do so press Ex When J is pressed the cursor will shift to the first digit of the day field Set the day in the same way as the month and press J to shift to the year field Set the digits in the year using the arrow keys Press a final time to complete the operation of setting the Date Setting the Time The Time is the fourth entry in the main menu To selec
273. owed by the name of the setup file Make sure to include the extension name of the file as the program does not add anything to the file name before opening it For example the command SETMGR 823 SET will cause the contents of the setup file to be displayed on the screen To redirect the output to a file add the gt output_dest to the command For example the command SETMGR 823 SET gt S23 DAT redirects the output from the screen to the file named S23 DAT This file can then be viewed by a conventional program such as EDIT or LIST and then printed Help If you type the command followed by a a help screen will be displayed For example SETMGR will cause the help screen to be displayed Appendix E 8200 Test Set Software C gt SETMGR 8200 Setup Manager C 1996 Sutron Corporation Usage SETMGR input file input file setup file to display or convert output_file file to contain the converted setu version version number to convert input to The following versions are supported V3 V3 x 8200 Basic V3A V3 x 8200A R3 R3 x 8200 LOS Radio R3A R3 x 8200A R38 R3 8 8200 LOS Radio R37 R3 7 8200A S3 S3 x 8200 Speech Modem S3A S3 x 8200A G3 G3 x 8200 GOES Radio G3A G3 x 8200A V40 V4 0 8210 8200A Notes Examples SetMgr lake set SetMgr lake set gt setup dat SetMgr SetMgr lake set G3A set V40 SetMgr lake set lake txt SetMgr lake txt lake set Sample
274. owing steps 1 If PwrMode is ADVANCE wait for PWRTime Turn on 8200 SW 12 2 Wait for Sampling Time Repeat Accumulate Averaged Sensor Values Delay for Sampling Interval seconds Until Samples Set values have been taken or next cycle time has been reached Compute Averages and store into current values 3 Wait for Measurement Time or proceed if Measurement Time Sample Time Read values from all non averaged sensors and SDI 12 sensors and store into current values If PwrMode is ADVANCE turn off SW 12 If needed Log all enabled current data Step 1 only applies if the PwrMode in the 8200 is set to ADVANCE If it is the 8200 uses PwrTim to determine when it should turn on the power for the sensors When that time is reached the switched power is turned on and the 8200 goes on to step 2 If PwrMode is not ADVANCE the 8200 goes straight to step 2 Setup for GOES transmissions In step 2 the 8200 will wait for the next sampling time This time is computed using SampTim and MeasInt With SampTim set to 00 00 00 and MeasInt set to 00 05 00 the sampling times will be 00 00 00 00 05 00 00 10 00 and so forth throughout the day If SampTim is 00 01 00 the sampling times will be 00 01 00 00 06 00 23 56 00 for the day In step 2 when the next sampling time arrives the 8200 goes into a loop to handle all the sensors that need averaging Each sensor with AVERAGE ON is measured and then the 8200 waits for the interval spe
275. pe 0 01 0 01 Offset 0 00 0 00 Elevation 0 0 Right Digits 2 2 Alarm Setup Enabled for radio radio High Alarm off off High Level 0 00 0 00 Low Alarm OFE OET Low Level 0 00 0 00 ROC Alarm above above ROC Level 0 01 0 01 Deadband 0 00 0 00 Notes this example sets up ROCAlarms on each sensor The ROC level is set so that any change in the value causes a transmission The level can be changed to 0 02 or higher to increase the amount of change that must take place for there to be a transmission With Retries set to 0 the station will not repeat the transmission One further improvement on this setup would be to make it so the station would sample the sensors every 30 seconds instead of every 15 minutes Data will still be stored in the log every 15 minutes This way the transmission will be made as soon as the change in the data happens within 30 seconds MEASUREMENT SCHEDULE MeasInt 00 00 30 SampInt 00 00 00 MeasTim 00 00 00 SampTim 00 00 00 PwrTime 00 00 00 Samples Set 10 Measmnt Log 30 BasInt 00 00 00 BasTim 00 00 00 PwrMode on How To 7 11 Use an External Modem with the 8200 Use an External Modem with the 8200 8200 s which are not equipped with internal modems can be used with external modems By connecting an external modem it is possible to call a remote station and recover data and or program the unit It is not possible to support alarms or speech with an external modem To use an 8200
276. plays strings numbers and variables to the screen or the currently open device Multiple items can be displayed by seperating them with commas or semi colons A comma automatically adds a space between the items A comma or semi colon at then end of a print statement will suppress CR LF The number of digits left and right of the decimal point can be controlled when printing numbers by following the number with see line 50 for an example the number of left digits and the number of right digits Placing a dollar sign after a number will display the ASCII code associated with that number A percent sign after a number will display only the integer part of the number Advanced Print Formats 2 amp b Prints the current buffer amp bnn Prints the first nn characters in the buffer amp u Prints the unit id amp unn Prints the unit id padded to nn characters with spaces 2x pn _ Prints x in 6 bit binary format using n digits 1 6 2 x n Prints x using n digits 1 9 2x Prints x as a signed number with a leading blank when x gt 0 2x _ Prints x as a signed number without a leading blank when x gt 0 x t Prints x as a signed number with a leading plus when x gt 0 x z Print x with leading zeros 2 x bnn Prints x in base nn where nn is gt 2 and lt 16 x 8b2z Combine options to print x with 8 digits in base 2 with leading zero
277. port higher lower throughput Do not change this value unless you are connecting an SDI sensor which also supports a baud rate other than 1200 EEROM SETUP Serial Serial M Serial Port Mode The Serial Port is the RS 232 port on the front panel This port can be set to operate in several different modes These modes are USER An PC may be connected to the RS232 port to set up the 8200 using menus SENSOR A smart sensor can wake up the 8200 by asserting request to send and send an ASCII floating point number followed by a carriage return This number will be stored in the database value for the SERIAL sensor and can be logged Most serial sensors are polled such as the AIR barometric pressure sensors and you will only need to use this option in a custom configuration 4 18 EEROM SETUP TimeFmt LOGGER Data are written to the port as they are logged A printer or computer may be connected to accept the data PROTOCOL The port can be connected to a Sutron 9000 either direct or over a radio link and communicate with protocol messages RADIO The port will be used to drive an external radio through an RF Modem The 8200 will expect Sutron Standard Protocol communications Both two way and one way communications are supported Alarm transmissions can be triggered by limits set on any sensor and sent to the external radio MODEM The 8200 will emulate a Hayes compatible modem using the internal telephone modem By connecting a standar
278. ption of every menu item is explained in Chapter 4 For your convenience a menu tree for the standard 8200 is illustrated in full view on the next page Use it as a reference guide both now and when setting up the 8200 Note that Menu trees for different model 8200 s are similar to the standard version only with a few changes appropriate to their different functions these items appear in bold in the tree The 8200 Front Panel Menu Tree Sutron 8210 xxxx UnitlD Date Time Recording Alarm VIEW DATA LIVE READINGS NEWEST READINGS OLDEST READINGS Alarm Status SYSTEM SETUP MEASUREMENT SCHEDULE Measint Samplnt MeasTim SampTim PwrTim Samples Set Measmnt Log Basint BasTim PwrMode ENABLE SENSORS Analog1 Analog2 CONFIG SENSORS Measure Log Average Intrvl Value Slope Offset Elevation Right Digits ALARM OPTIONS Enable Groups GOES Control Trend MODEM High Alarm Low Alarm ROC Alarm HiLev LoLev ROCLev Deadbnd Prefix Name MODEM Suffix Units MODEM Change Password Init Setup Zero Counters DUMP DATA Start Auto Dump Ram Card Serial Port Read Card Setup Write Card Setup Erase Ram Card EEROM SETUP Serial User Rate Radio Rate Com Rate Dump Rate SDI Rate Enter Reqd Log Dump TimeLimit PowerDelay PressDelay AnalgDelay AutoKey TimeFmt DateFmt BasicSize Front Panel Control of the 8200 PROTOCOL SETUP Master CarrierDly ReplyDelay Ack Delay TN Rate TA Rate Retry
279. quite short or long depending on its complexity For improved reliability the 8200 keeps a copy of the setup in a special area of write protected and checked memory called EEROM When you make changes to the setup using the SYSTEM SETUP menu the changes are automatically saved to EEROM when you leave the menu The software only saves values for sensors that are enabled Alarm information will also be saved only for sensors that are alarm enabled The 8200 has room to store up to 70 sensors and their related alarm information in the EEROM When the 8200 is powered on or reset the setup in EEROM is automatically restored to RAM and used by the 8200 The SYSTEM SETUP Init Setup option can be used to clear out a setup from RAM The cleared setup will also be copied to EEROM when you exit the SYSTEM SETUP menu Note previous versions of the 8200 software had separate functions to save and restore the setup This caused confusion and inconsistencencies in the setup This automatic saving and restoring will make the 8200 easier to use Other setup options found in the EEROM SETUP PROTOCOL SETUP GOES SETUP and others saved directly to EEROM as soon as they are changed Setups The 8200 also has the capability to transfer the setup to and from a RAM Card that can be inserted into the front panel and to and from a test set using the Xmodem or Ymodem protocols Refer to Page 9 2 for details Getting To Know The 8200 3 21 Chapter 4 Menu
280. r If it shows another sensor press Y until COUNTER is displayed Getting To Know The 8200 3 17 Exercise Press gt to enter the configuration submenu for the COUNTER The display will show MEASURE xx where xx is ON or OFF Press F to toggle MEASURE ON Press Y to move down the COUNTER submenu The display will show Log xx where xx is ON or OFF Press le to toggle logging recording in memory ON If Log is OFF you will get no recorded data for a sensor regardless of other settings Press 4 and the display will return to the sensor list and will show COUNTER MeLg The Me indicates that Measure is On and Lg indicates that LOG is ON Press Y to select the BATTERY submenu The display will show BATTERY Press gt to enter the submenu and use the same steps as described for the COUNTER to turn on Measurement and Logging for the BATTERY Press 4 missing text AG 3 16 93 should now show BATTERY MeLg _ Steps using the Test Set 3 18 Step 1 Moving to SYSTEM SETUP Menu Path SYSTEM SETUP From the main menu press S to select SYSTEM SETUP You may also need to press ENTER to get the 8200 to accept your menu selection Step 2 Setting the measurement schedule Menu Path SYSTEM SETUP measurement schedule With SYSTEM SETUP Menu displayed press M to select the Measurement Schedule Press M to select the Measurement Interval and then press 0 ENTER 1 ENTER 0 ENTER to set the value 00 01 00 into the
281. r from offset drift If you are using the TINY BASIC RUNLINE command for additional conversions on the sensor you cannot calibrate the sensor in the final units You may only calibrate the sensor to the point before TINY BASIC applies its equation To do this turn Recording OFF before setting the value This will change the offset for the sensor Then turn Recording ON and see the effect of the new offset on the final TINY BASIC computed value Taking LIVE READINGS will not normally interfere with scheduled measurements sampling and transmissions The exception is when a sample may be missed when the time to measure a sensor is very near the measurement and logging time at which the sensor is being recorded For example if you have an SDI 12 sensor which requires 45 seconds to measure and you want to log it every 60 seconds there will not be enough time to take one live reading and one logged reading every minute and samples will be missed Using a test set LIVE READINGS will display a complete list of enabled sensors along with a menu at the top of the screen Use the arrow keys and the ENTER key to select sensors An will be placed in front of sensors that are selected Then press V to view the data and enter the time delay between updates use 10 to cause the display to pause one second between updates The 8200 will then display the selected sensors along with live data updated as selected To exit the live display press ESC Note
282. r to check the GOES radio operation and output power Never send a transmission through the antenna to a self timed channel at a Time outside of your allocated Time slot A 5 line 400 character ASCII message is sent to the channel and satellite ID as selected in the GOES Setup Menus Recording will be turned OFF when sending a test transmission to prevent a conflict with a scheduled transmission The Send to Sutron option MAY ONLY be used upon request of Sutron customer service personel because channel 151 is not a public channel unathorized use is illegal Send to Sutron sends a coded message meant to help Sutron analyze system problems on channel 151 using id 01003438 which contains a status message containing the following satellite id unit id number of resets min battery max battery goes tx count A rom checksum B eerom fail address C average sample D nmi glitch count E analog error count F pressure error count G a d timeout count H refererence error count I tx truncated counts J basic current line number K basic error code L basic error line number M no tx low battery count N no tx lock detect count O no tx goes setup count P goes clock error count Q tx started late count R tx low battery count S tx high battery count lt EOT gt The fields which are prefixed with the letters A thru S will only be sent 1f their value is non zero to reduce transmission size ex BEEFFOOD Site56 5 11 2 13 7 148 A32424 C31 K1 L50 S5
283. rName If the sensor is not enabled to transmit in 10 B Measure Battery the system setup alarm options menu then no 20 If B lt 10 Then RaiseAlarm Battery transmissions will occur Ifthe system is already in alert when RaiseAlarm is called then the system will just remain in alert and no extra transmissions will be scheduled REM or Starts a program remark causing the rest of the program line to be skipped For fastest execution speed remarks ex a remark should be placed at the end of the program so that the 10 REM This is a remark interpreter does not need to skip over them 20 This is a remark also RETURN Return from a subroutine See GOSUB RUN Used interactively to test start a program Once you have completed your program the 8200 will automatically run it based on the Basic Run Interval and Time RUNLINE SensorName LineNumber Causes a sensor to be measured by Tiny Basic RUNLINE for a particular SensorName needs to be ex apply an equation to Analog1 executed only once then each time the operating system 10 normal program goes here or Tiny Basic tries to measure SensorName the 20 65100 is run when recording enabled operating system will branch to Line Number The Basic 30 1000 is run when Analog measured routine sets the return value to Z and returns The 100 Stop routine can measure the sensor if needed because 1000 Z Measure Analog1 recursion is detected and prevented When recording is 1010
284. racters and the number 12345 would be returned If the input stream contained XXX 12 3E2 56 100 0 then INPUT 0 would return 1230 because it would igore the initial XXX and terminate on the first invalid character If a valid number could not be formed then the ERR function will return 1 or true INT Vum Integer portion of a number FREEMEM Amount of extra program memory available for storage in the MEM array ex 1 Print Mem Avail FreeMem 8 Multiply FREEMEM times 8 to get the amount ex 2 Initalize the MEM array to of free memory in bytes zeroes 10 For i 0 To FreeMem 1 20 Mem i 0 30 Next i True 1 if a key is available otherwise False 0 LOG Num Log base 10 of a number LN Vum Natural log base e of a number MAX SensorName The maximum value from the last time SensorName was averaged In addition MAX WindSpeed returns the scalar maximum of speed MEASURE Sensor Takes a reading from a sensors multiplies by the slope adds the offset and returns the value ex Print Measure Battery MEMUndex Fetches a number from available free memory Valid values of Index must range from 0 to ex Print MEM 0 FREEMEM 1 MIN SensorName The minimum value from the last time SensorName was averaged In addition MIN WindSpeed returns the scalar minimum of speed MIN WindDir returns the scalar standard deviation NULL True 1 if last READLOG retrieved null or non recorded data OFFSET sensor
285. rature ten Thank you the thirteen thirty this thousand three time to To acknowledge alarms To disable alarms To enable alarms To enable data modem To hang up To list too 45 31 151 51 152 52 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 161 162 42 43 18 26 17 25 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 172 twelve twenty two valve Volts warning was water Watts welcome wind zero 13 21 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 MODEM SETUP Dial In Special Characters A variety of special characters are available to speak common messages These characters are explained in the following table The sensor number assignments are described in the preceding tables Note that sensors 1 through 9 must be entered as 01 through 09 two digits Example Assuming Sensor is the water level the current water level can be spoken with the following message n01 127r01u01 In the above example the sensor name and units were stored in the Prefix and suffix of the Alarm menu If these values are not programmed the same message could be spoken as 180 132 127r01 113 SPECIAL CHARACTERS iu Speak information about unit ID id Speak information about Date it Speak information about Time ia Speak information 8200 Alarm Status in alarm or normal ir Speak Recording Status On or Off la Speak list of sensors in alarm In Speak list of normal sensors not in alarm Ib
286. re Date Format DMY Term Xmit Delay 0 Basic Size A Amp Gain 1 0 PROTOCOL SETUP Master Name Carrier Delay 7 Reply Delay 0 Ack Delay 100 TX Normal Rate 00 00 00 TX Alarm Rate 00 10 00 Retry Interval 00 01 00 Number of Retries 3 Use RS 485 w SDI 12 No Long SSP Packets H W Handshake on COM Auto Dump to RAM Card SENSOR SETUP Sensor T 4 8 9 12 Name AirTemp BaroPress Precip SolarRad RainFall Enable Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes easure Yes Yes No Yes Yes Log Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Average No No No No No Interval 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Slope 64 373 7 6117 0 01 2000 0 0 01 Offset 9 I 3 4938 0 0 0 0 0 0 Elevation 0 0 0 0 0 Right Digits 2 2 2 2 2 Alarm Enable ON ON ON ON ON Groups Control No No No No No Trend No No No No No High Alarm OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Low Alarm OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ROC Alarm OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF High Limit 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ow Limit 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ROC Level 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Deadband 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Name Phrase 0 0 0 0 0 Unit Phrase 0 0 0 0 0 11 Appendix F 8200 Sutron Standard Protocol SSP Capabilities Appendix F 8200 Sutron Standard Protocol Capabilities Introduction The 8200 has extensive support for Sutron Standard Protocol SSP SSP is a communications protocol which is similar but different in important ways from other protocols such as Xmodem In particular SSP is an exte
287. repeat it to E One draw back to smart repeating is the hop delay Each hop requires time to receive and then retransmit the message At 1200 baud it may take 10 extra seconds per hop for a long message Ack delays and response timeouts must be increased proportionally An 8200 automatically replies using whatever source the message originated from including all the repeating stations If you want the 8200 to originate an alarm message using the store and forward capabilities you must add the names of the repeating stations to the PROTOCOL SETUP MASTER ID Cross device repeating allows a message to be received on one device and repeated out another This could be from one radio to another or even from a telephone modem to a radio A radio in the first 8210 card slot would be using device AUX a radio in the second slot would use COM an external radio connected to the RS 232 port would use TERM The syntax for sending a message to site C reachable thru site B s radio in the first slot would be B_AUX C read this as to site B repeated out AUX to site C Under SSP a repeater will never attempt to retry a message it is the responsibility of either the source or the destination to attempt retries 9 Pin Interface Cable For IBM AT Type Computers 7 14 Below we have detailed the specifications necessary to build a reliable 8200 to PC interface cable for those of you who would like to do so We should note though that this type of cable is
288. resolution you will need to make the measurement as a counter and then divide by the interval Shaft Encoder Quadrature Sensors Sutron manufactures a shaft encoder with a quadrature output There are also many other manufacturers of quadrature output sensors A quadrature sensor is one that uses two signal wires to code 4 states A quadrature sensor connects to the same terminals that can be used for counter and frequency measurements When you select a quadrature sensor the 8200 reprograms its input circuitry to handle the input as a quadrature rather than a frequency When selected for an encoder you cannot use the same terminals for frequency counter inputs Quadrature sensors generally require 4 wires 12 to sensor GND signal 1 signal 2 SDI sensors SDI 12 is an interface standard for sensors The intent of the SDI standard is to minimize the difficulty of interfacing the different types of equipment available from different manufacturers to various data recorder manufacturers products SDI allows you to connect up to 10 sensors with as many as many as 9 parameters each The interface is implemented using three wires ground 12V and a bi directional data line Examples of SDI sensors are shaft encoders pressure sensors water quality monitors and analog expansion modules The list of SDI 12 sensors is growing all the time Hooking Up Sensors 6 3 RS232 sensors SDI sensors connect to the 8210 using the SDI 23 terminations G
289. ring Logging All of these status indications are considered normal and simply indicate what the 8200 is doing at the Time the status check was performed The GOES Status group contains information on the status of the GOES transmitter If no transmission is in progress the status will show as OFF If the 8200 is performing a transmission the status may appear as one of the following On Locking Carrier Xmit Timed Xmit Random Locked FwdPower All of these status indications are considered normal and simply indicate what the 8200 is doing at the Time the status check was performed If the message Fail safe Tripped appears then you must remove the 8200 from its case and perform the fail safe reset procedure or toggle recording to use the software method described under initialization at the beginning of this chapter If this message occurs frequently in the field contact customer service for advise common causes include power failure or a manual transmission within 60 seconds of a previous transmission The 8200 automatically prevents other causes including message too long greater than 3 minutes automatic transmissions too close together In addition the 8200 will not transmit if the battery voltage drops below 10 5 volts This voltage is tested 3 seconds before the scheduled transmission time The Transmit Status group contains information on what the 8200 plans to do next and what it has done The Time of the n
290. ring Data from Memory to a RAM Card If you are using a new RAM Card you may need to activate the battery Slide open the small door which covers the battery Pry out the battery and remove the plastic insulator Replace the battery and the cover The data transfer from an 8200 to a RAM Card can be done automatically or manually For automatic dumping the DUMP DATA Auto Dump field must be set to ON Make sure the display is OFF Insert a RAM Card The 8200 will detect the card and automatically dump data to the card Watch the status messages and check the final status When done remove the card For more information on Auto Dump see page 4 8 To manually dump data to a RAM Card first insert a RAM Card into the socket Select DUMP DATA from the MAIN menu The path to DUMP DATA from the top of the MAIN menu Sutron 8210 xxvv is to press the Y key until DUMP DATA is displayed Press gt to see Start mm dd yyyy the default starting date for a data dump month day year You may change the start date at this point by pressing the and using the arrow keys to change the date field NOTE The amount of data dumped depends on the setting of the Log Dump field in the EEROM Setup sub menu If DAYBIN is selected the log dump will end at the end of yesterday If ALLBIN is selected the dump will end with the last logged data After the start date is set and a RAM Card is in place press Y to see the RAM Card dump option Press the
291. rs 201 Degrees Celsius 202 Degrees Fahrenheit Menu Tree Reference 4 65 SYSTEM SETUP ALARM OPTIONS Trend 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 Feet per Hour Feet per Second Inches of Mercury Inches per Hour Inches per Second Kilometers per Hour Miles per Hour Meters per Second Milibars See the example under Prefix SYSTEM SETUP ALARM OPTIONS Trend 4 66 Trend T Trend SPEECH MODEM ONLY The Trend value is only available on units with the Speech Modem installed Trend controls whether the 8200 will check the trend of the sensor Trending determines whether the reading of a sensor is rising falling or steady Trend can have the following options OFF ON Trending information i e rising or falling is not recorded Trending information is recorded and may be reported with the data Trend is initialized to STEADY when recording is turned on The Trend check is done at the time a value is measured The check compares the current value with the value last measured The trend of a sensor will not change unless two consecutive trend checks agree on a new state The Trend will report STEADY if the change is less than the deadband for at least two samples Example The 8200 is setup to report trending on a sensor and has a deadband of 0 10 00 15 00 2 55 00 30 00 2 65 seems to be rising first time rising detected 00 45 00 2 80 yes it is rising set state to RISING 01 00 00 2 85 now it may be
292. rs must have Alarm Setup Enable RADIO SERIAL or BOTH for the TN Rate to be used SYSTEM SETUP ALARM OPTIONS Menu Tree Reference 4 55 PROTOCOL SETUP Use RS 485 PROTOCOL SETUP Use RS 485 Use RS 485 Use RS 485 w SDI 12 C Causes all SDI 12 measurements to be performed thru the RS 485 port and not the SDI 12 port RS 485 at this time is an unoffical extension to SDI 12 which can greatly increase the distance a sensor can be installed from the recorder All SDI sensors must be configured for either SDI 12 or RS 485 they cannot be mixed without a Tiny Basic program to toggle Use RS 485 on and off The default is OFF 4 56 SYSTEM SETUP SYSTEM SETUP SYSTEM SETUP S System Setup The System Setup menu provides a way to perform most of the essential functions needed to set up an 8200 The items in the menu provide a means to set up the following submenus Measurement Schedules Enable Sensors Configure Sensors ALARM OPTIONS Basic Program Change Password Init Setup Zero Counters SYSTEM SETUP ALARM OPTIONS ALARM OPTIONS ALARM OPTIONS The ALARM OPTIONS menu provides fields for defining e alarm limits e speech prefix and suffix e GOES transmission groups e data reported by SSP Current data poll Whether or not you will have the 8200 detect alarms it may still be important to enter values into some of the alarm fields Alarm conditions can be specifically defined for each enabled sensor The 8200 can che
293. rt to start this transfer Even if you are connected through a modem the data will be directed to you Use the startdate to control what data you receive Remember that the EEROMILogDump field controls the sending of partial days If you are running TS8210 the data will be dumped with a simple check at the end If you are using a modem we recommend you use a XMODEM or YMODEM transfer so the data is checked every 128 bytes 1024 bytes for YMODEM See DUMP DATA Serial Port for details If the transfer is in Binary it will be in a special LOG format This format has a header at the beginning of the file which is followed by all the data Sutrons LOGPLOT and LOGPRN programs recognize this format and are useful to display the data LOGPLOT or convert it to ASCI LOGPRN e RAM Card use the DUMP DATA RAM Card function to write the data to a RAM Card Use the Start Date field to control what data gets written to the RAM Card Remember that the EEROM LogDump field controls the sending of partial days of data Note that it may take more than one RAM Card to hold the selected data from the LOG Note You cannot wipe out or clear out the log using any of these functions The log itself is managed by the 8200 which will make room for new data at the beginning of each day or when recording is turned on RAM Cards Using The RAM Cards 9 2 All 8200 data recorders have been designed to use small RAM Cards to move data from the Log memory to o
294. s you 1010 Print 52 82 82 SetTimeout 3 K Input SetTimeout 60 90 1020 If K 1 Then L 1 Z 2 Stop Use English answer voice 1030 If K 2 Then L 2 Z 2 Stop Use French answer voice 1040 If K 7 Then L 0 Z 1 Stop Anwer in data mode 1050 L 3 Z 2 Stop Use English and then French answer voice 1200 Routine executed to handle dial in with voice 1210 S Measure Stage Measure current stage 1220 If P Then Z 0 Stop If problem then use default message 1230 If L 1 or L 3 Then Gosub 300 Speak English message 1240 If L 2 or L 3 Then Gosub 500 Speak French message 1250 If Key Then K Input If K lt gt 0 And K lt gt 27 Then Goto 1210 1260 Z 1 Stop 1400 Routine executed to handle dial in data 1410 Z 0 Stop Use default method 1600 Routine executed to handle dial out voice 1610 Z 0 Stop Use default method 1800 Routine executed to handle dial out data 1810 Z 0 Stop Use default method 60000 Goto 1000 Branch to answer phone routine 60001 Goto 1200 Branch to voice dial in message 60002 Goto 1400 Branch to data dial in message 60003 Goto 1600 Branch to voice dial out message 10 10 Custom GOES formatting with Tiny Basic 60004 Goto 1800 Branch to data dial out message Custom GOES formatting with Tiny Basic To enable Tiny Basic GOES formatting the GOES RADIO SETUP TX Mode option must be set to BASIC The operating system will vector to specific
295. s you learn how to enter or select values and move around the menu tree using the control panel keys use of the 8200 will be greatly simplified and will soon become intuitive Another more convenient way of setting up the 8200 is to use a test set which is a PC running TS8210 supplied by Sutron or almost any other communications program By using it and a PC users can view complete menus and data making it faster to operate the 8200 Both of these methods will be discussed in the following paragraphs The front panel of the 8200 data recorder is shown on the opposite page The main items identified on the front panel are The display The 6 button keypad P 9 A y Terminal Strip Removable RAM Card Socket RS 232 Serial I O port SDI 12 Auxiliary I O port Ground Lug Chassis Each item is described briefly in the paragraphs that follow The Display The dark red opaque area at the upper left of the front panel is the system display It is in this area that the 8200 displays a variety of messages which are used to set up and test the unit The display can also give prompts and messages that are generated by the TINY BASIC application program loaded into memory The display is ON generally only after the E key is pressed see below The brightness of the display can be adjusted by pressing the t key immediately after the display has been turned ON The 6 button Keypad The 6 button keypad P 9 4 y is used to control the 82
296. sers have mentioned that oxidation on the fuse holder itself is a cause of many intermittent failures Just as dirty battery terminals in your car will cause it to not start the same holds true when the 8200 tries to transmit Therefore the terminals on the battery should be cleaned in addition to the terminals in the fuse holder Maintenance and Service 11 1 Antenna and Cable In conjunction with dirty terminals causing battery related problems is the problem experienced with most batteries and their inherent designs The types of batteries that are commonly used at DCP sites are Marine deep cycle or the standard type used in most cars When the manufacturers of these batteries designed them they relied on the assumption that they would always be located in a car boat or other moving object which would be constantly vibrating somehow This constant vibration keeps particles in the electrolyte suspended not allowing them to fall to the bottom and bridge between the plates thus shorting the battery internally Therefore each time the site is visited it is good practice to pick up and shake the battery for a couple of minutes thus extending the life of it considerably To test the battery to make sure it is good you must measure the battery voltage while under a load If you have an 8200 with a GOES transmitter you can measure the voltage during a transmission For other systems you will want to at a minimum turn on the 8200 displays and set t
297. ss OK the software will prompt you for the name of the file to enter If the transfer program began automatically the proper file name extension will be included in the filename box Select a file from the list boxes or type the name of the file you want to send Then press OK and the transfer will begin Appendix E 8200 Test Set Software Select file to send File ame Nexnn123 Bas C NOS CHKLIST CPS G32 71H1 ROM C DAN G38 7 2 ROM NG SET NGFMT BAS NGAMD123 BAS NG2MD123 EXE README TOM TAT Tab between items Alt Highlight to select As in receiving files watch the message box that tracks the progress of the file transfer When the transfer is complete a complete message is displayed and the software waits for you to press OK IF the transfer fails a message will be displayed and you must press OK to proceed LOGPLOT The LOGPLOT program is used to display graphs of data in LOG files The LOG files are created by downloading the data from an 8200 The format of this file is binary To display a graph of the data in the file start the LOGPLOT program by issuing the command LOGPLOT filename where filename is the name of the file to plot If you omit the name LOGPLOT will prompt for it If the file is found and in the proper LOG format LOGPLOT will display a screen listing all the sensors found in the file Prompts at the top of the screen explain how to use the program Select the sensors you
298. t e a self powered sensor a voltage or current output Hooking Up Sensors 6 1 Analog Sensors 5 8 Examples of resistive sensors are potentiometers that are found in many wind direction gate opening position sensors Other resistive sensors compatible with the 8200 are thermistors and thermilinear sensors for temperature and some pressure sensors Sutron uses a 5V reference voltage for these resistive devices and reads the voltage on a 0 5 volt scale with a 12 bit converter The accuracy of the measurement is 5 0 4095 xx millivolts The sensor should have a resistance of at least 500 ohms and have enough change in resistance to show significant changes in the resulting output voltage Pressure sensors or strain gauge sensors have a special port on the 8200 These sensors are powered off 5 and 5 and have an output of less than 100 mv The 8200 has a special port for measuring these sensors because of the low output The accuracy of measurements made on this channel is 0 05 mv Powered sensors normally have circuits that run off 12V and have an voltage or current output Examples of these sensors are some humidity temperature water quality flow meters and pressure sensors These sensors will use the 12 from the 8200 switched or directly from the battery If the sensor has a current output such as a 4 to 20 ma sensor the output needs to pass through a resistor so a voltage can be measured An important limitation of powered sensors is
299. t Time press Y once after setting the Date or three times after the Sutron 8210 xxvv message is displayed To change Time press the key Time is displayed in the following 24 hour format Times 17255290 The seconds field will be advancing steadily as the display is viewed When J is pressed a flashing cursor will appear at the first digit of the hour field and the time will stop advancing To change the first digit in the hour field use the up and down arrow keys just as in setting the Unit ID or date To change the second digit press gt and then use 4 to select the proper digit When the hour is correct press J to lock that field and shift the cursor to the first digit of the minute field The minute and second fields are then set in exactly the same way as the hour field Setting Time is an important operation Many data collection activities depend on the accurate synchronization of times between numerous data collection devices The correct and most accurate method for setting the time in the 8200 is to select the Time display and key in a full time up to the seconds value that is one or two minutes in advance of the current time Since the 8200 senses that an operation is being performed it will not automatically shut off the display while you are waiting for the time synchronization Press only when the time on the display coincides exactly with the time on an accurate source Digital wrist watch radio time sign
300. t know which 8200 you will be using make a note to use the AmpGain recorded on the shipping documents you received 6 PROTOCOL Setup These fields are used when the 8200 needs to communicate using Sutron Standard Protocol SSP The default values will work well in most all stations Change a value only after you have a thorough understanding of the field and run extensive tests to verify the 8200 operations after the change 7 At this point if you have the basic setup for an 8200 An 8200 with this setup can have Recording turned ON and will begin to collect and log the data you desire If you have a telephone or GOES unit then some additional steps are required before the 8200 will work with the phone or transmit the data For these models consult the following sections for your appropriate model Telephone With Speech Modem 5 2 1 Alarm Setup You should set the Enable for each of the sensors to ON for all the sensors Even if you don t have any alarms this setting will make each sensor show up in the Alarm Status list and allows you to set the Prefix and Suffix numbers With ENABLE set to something other than OFF the data for the sensor will also be included in the reply to a SSP poll for current data If you want the 8200 to actually dial up someone or something on alarm set Enable to DIAL You should pick word or phrase numbers for the Prefix and Suffix so the 8200 has a way of identifying your data Refer to the table on page 4
301. ta O Oldest Data A Alarm Status Choose See separate heading VIEW DATA for complete information Menu Tree Reference 4 7 DUMP DATA DUMP DATA DUMP DATA U Upload Download Data DUMP DATA contains a sub menu with a selection of commands that can be used to initiate the uploading or downloading of data to or from a RAM Card or other device When using a test set the menu will also contain functions for transferring the setup and basic program between the test set and the 8200 see Chapter 7 page 7 12 DUMP DATAlAuto Dump Auto Dump A Auto Dump Auto Dump allows the 8210 to automatically dump data to a PCMCIA RAM Card which is inserted when the 8210 is turned on with This simplifies the process of extracting data from an 8210 to a one button operation Insert the card and press check the status and when done remove the card The status will remain on the display until the card is removed Unlike a normal dump an unformatted RAM Card will be automatically erased The following messages are possible Complete XXXK Transfer was successful K 1024 bytes data More Data XXXK Transfer complete more data available remove card insert another RAM Card and press amp again Ram Failure Could not read or write the ram card End of Data No more data to dump Change Start Date No Ram Card 8210 cannot detect the ram card Need Ram gt XXXK Ram card is not large enough to hold even one a worth of data Th
302. ted you do not need to explicitly open these devices in this case Here is a break down of what each vector does Line 60000 is branched to whenever the system needs to determine how to answer an incoming phone call The following are the return values you can place in Z and what they do Z 0 Answer with data first and then voice 7 seconds of carrier Z 1 Answer with data only Z 2 Answer with voice only Z 3 Answer with voice first please press pound and then data Line 60001 is branched to whenever the system wants to handle a dial in with voice message The following are the return values you can place in Z and what they do Z 0 Take default action speak the dial in message and hang up Z 1 Just hang up Basic program handled everything Line 60002 is branched to whenever the system wants to handle a dial in with data message The following are the return values you can place in Z and what they do Z 0 Take default action display system menus Z 1 Just hang up Basic program handled everything Line 60003 is branched to whenever the system wants to handle a dial out with voice message Following are the return values you can place in Z and what they do Z 0 Take default action speak the dial out message and hang up Z 1 Just hang up Basic program handled everything Line 60004 is branched to whenever the system wants to handle a dial out with data message The following are the return values you can place in Z and what th
303. th Right Digits set to 0 a sensor is displayed without a fractional part The maximum value is 32767 With Right Digits set to 1 the tenths digit is displayed The maximum value is reduced to 3276 7 In a similar manner for each increase in Right Digits the 8200 adjusts how data is displayed and the maximum SYSTEM SETUP CONFIG SENSORS Slope value The following chart summarizes the effect Right Digits has on the maximum value which can be logged Right Data Range Digits Min Max 0 32767 32767 1 3276 7 3276 7 2 327 67 327 67 3 32 767 32 767 4 3 2767 3 2767 Note Make sure the Right Digits setting is correct for your application A setting that is too large will result in a clipping of logged values and a loss of important data SYSTEM SETUP CONFIG SENSORS Slope Slope S Slope The 8200 uses Slope and Offset to scale a sensor s data when it is measured sampled or viewed The equation is Converted Value Raw Value Slope Offset The raw value is multiplied by the S ope and then the Offset is added Raw values will be in volts counts or hertz for the standard analog pressure counter and frequency inputs See the How To section Chapter 7 3 for help in computing the slope and offset for a sensor SYSTEM SETUP CONFIG SENSORS Value Value V Value Value represents the current reading for the sensor with the slope and offset applied On the front panel a new measurement will not be taken unless y
304. the 8200 makes a self timed transmission and the format has been set to BINARY The format of the transmission data is lt BLOCK IDENTIFIER gt lt GROUP ID gt lt OFFSET gt lt SENSOR1 DATA gt lt SENSOR2 DATA gt lt SENSOR N DATA gt lt SENSOR1 DATA gt lt SENSOR2 DATA gt lt SENSOR N DATA gt lt SENSOR1 DATA gt lt SENSOR2 DATA gt lt SENSOR N DATA gt lt BATTERY gt where BLOCK IDENTIFIE R BLOCK IDENTIFIER is always sent as B to indicate GROUP ID OFFSET SENSOR DA BATTERY EXAMP L T TA the start of a binary data group GROUP ID is always sent as 1 to indicate the self timed group After the group id the actual data from the 8200 s log are sent Each record is prefixed with an lt OFFSET gt which is a 1 byte binary encoded number indicating the number of minutes ago the most recent data was recorded ENSOR DATA contains only those sensors belonging to byte binary encoded signed numbers allowing a range f 131072 to 131071 The actual 6 bit binary ncoded format is described later The 8200 will nly transmit numbers in the range 32768 to 32767 The value transmitted is taken directly from the log of the 8200 which was scaled by Rightdigits before being placed in the log The value transmitted will be value 10 RightDigits The string will be sent if the data was never re
305. the SHEF code for the sensor Press ke when done GOES RADIO SETUP Internatl Internatl International GOES channels 1 through 99 and 101 through 199 are available for U S domestic assignment When nternatl is OFF you may select any of the available domestic channels as assigned by NOAA NESDIS International channels are assigned the numbers 1 through 33 You may select these channels by turning Internatl ON Additionally Meteosat channel assignments 1 through 33 and frequencies can be used by turing Internatl to MSAT Use the EJ key to toggle the setting Menu Tree Reference 4 25 GOES RADIO SETUP Rate ST GOES RADIO SETUP Rate ST Rate ST 3 TX Rate The Rate ST field contains the reporting interval assigned to a particular station by NOAA NESDIS This interval is normally 4 hours for US domestic stations Use the same procedure to set this Time as was used for the Time ST field GOES RADIO SETUPISatID SatiD S Satellite ID The Sat D field contains the 8 digit station ID assigned to a particular location by NOAA NESDIS The ID is keyed in two parts by pressing when SatID is in the display window Use the arrow keys to move right and left and to select appropriate letters numbers to set the first four characters of the ID Press l again and use the arrow keys to fill in the remaining four characters Press kJ a third Time to complete the SatID GOES RADIO SETUP Time ST Time ST 2 TX Time The Time ST field cont
306. the appropriate value Connecting To An External Rf Modem Even if you have used both internal communications slots an external device can still be added to the 8200 The connection for an external device is to the RS232 port used labeled RS232 Terminal on the protection termination board The following diagram lists the pinouts for the RS 232 port on the 8200 The connector is a DB9 female Pin 2 Txd Transmit data Pin 3 Rxd Receive data Pin 5 Gnd Ground Pin 4 Dsr Cts Pin 6 Dtr Rts Pin 8 Dtr Rts Pins 6 8 are used for transmitter keying When the 8200 is ready to send a message it will assert DTR When the message is completed DTR will be dropped Pin 4 is used to detect incoming messages and to prevent transmissions when another station is on the air You should normally wire pin 4 of the 8200 to the Carrier Detect CD line of the RF modem being used The RF modem must bring pin 4 high when carrier is detected Incoming messages are treated as terminal input When characters appear on the data lines they are simply ingested The 8200 will not initiate a transmission when Pin 4 is high The 8200 operates in Carrier Sense Multiple Access mode GOES Data When you have an 8200 with a GOES module the data can be transmitted over GOES on a self timed schedule random alarm schedule or both You have complete control over what data is included in each type of transmission and how much data is sent You also have partial control over the tr
307. ther computers for processing For the 8210 the RAM cards comply with PCMCIA specifications You can use cards up to 2MB in capacity For the 8200 the RAM cards are not PCMCIA and the capacity is limited to 64KB For both the 8210 and 8200 the RAM cards can hold data and setups from multiple stations The most common use of the RAM Card is to retrieve data from a station If the DUMP DATA Auto Dump field is set to ON the procedure requires a minimum of effort and expertice e Make sure the display is OFF e Insert a RAM Card into the 8200 and press check the status and when done remove the card The data from the station is added to the RAM card If DUMP DATA Auto Dump is OFF or if you want more control over dumping the data you can initiate the dump manually Turn ON 8200 display Plug a RAM Card into the 8200 Go to the DUMP DATA menu Optionally select a start date for the data dump RAM Cards e Execute command to dump to RAM Card e Remove the RAM Card Itis also easy to read the data on the RAM Card into a personal computer For an 8210 compatible PCMCIA card e Insert the card into a PCMCIA port connected to a personal computer e Execute transfer software to create data files on the PC If you have an 8200A card you will need to use the card reader available from Sutron The mechanics of transferring data from the 8200 to a RAM Card and from the RAM Card to a PC are described in the following paragraphs Transfer
308. tion can cause damage to the operation of the 8200 Supplies various information about the alarm state of a Sensor True 1 if the sensor is in alarm or False 0 if it is normal Specify HI to check for a HI LIMIT ALARM LO for a LOW LIMIT ALARM ROC for a RATE OF CHANGE ALARM INT to see if the sensor is triggering an alert transmission to the internal goes radio speech modem or LOS radio transmitter or EXT to see if the sensor is traggering an alert transmission to an external LOS radio connected to the RS 232 port Only the first letter is necessary H L R I or E Supplies various information about the alarm state of the system The ALARM option returns True 1 if the system is currently in alarm The INT option returns True 1 if the system is currently trying to send an alert to the internal goes radio speech modem or LOS radio The EXT option returns True 1 if the system is currently trying to send an alert message to an external LOS radio connected to the RS 232 port Only the first letter is necessary A I E Waits for a key and returns the ASCII code as a number Tiny Basic Function Set Function Syntax INPUT n allows a number to be read where n is the number of digits to read in or 0 to terminate on a non numeric character Characters which can make up a number include 0 9 E e and For example if the input stream was 1234567890 then INPUT S5 would read only the first 5 cha
309. tion is rarely used because it can always be selected when dumping the data The DAY option can be used to prevent overlapping data in the dump files ALLBIN is the default value of the field EEROM SETUP PowerDelay PowerDelay O Power On Delay 10 ms PowerDelay is used in conjunction with the PwrMode setting in the MEASUREMENT SCHEDULE see below page 4 76 Power Delay affects the amount of time in ms 10 that the 8200 will pause after turning switched 12V power on and before taking a reading when PwrMode is set to MEASURE Menu Tree Reference 4 17 EEROM SETUP PressDelay EEROM SETUP PressDelay PressDelay P Pressure Delay 10 ms PressDelay sets the amount of time in ms 10 that the 8200 will pause after applying power to the pressure port but before taking a measurement This time setting gives the amplifiers a chance to stabilize as well as giving the sensors time to respond to the excitation voltage The value should not be set to less than 5 50ms because of amplifier slew rates EEROM SETUP Radio Rate Radio Rate R Radio LOS Rate The Radio Rate setting determines the baud rate for the first installed internal LOS radio in the 8210 Ifa second LOS radio board is installed then its rate is determined by Com Rate EEROM SETUPISDI Rate SDI Rate S SDI 12 Baud Rate The SDI Rate sets the data baud rate for the SDI 12 interface Although by specification this rate is 1200 baud the rate may be changed to sup
310. to set the baud rate and communications port These can also be set after the program is running The format of the arguments is of the form COMx baud For example the command TS8210 COM2 4800 would start TS8210 running on COM2 at 4800 baud Communications Window When TS8210 is run it displays a communications window The window has some text at the bottom of the display and leaves the rest of the display for showing the communications and prompts from the 8200 The communications area may be blank or filled with information depending on whether the program is communicating with an 8200 The labels across the bottom appear as shown in the following example TES2d 0 F1 EXIT F2 SETUP F3 XYMODEM F10 RESET CVA SS Sutton orp TS8210 V1 0 F1 EXIT label for the F1 key Press F1 to exit the program F2 SETUP label for the F2 key Press F2 to change the port COM1 COM2 change the baud rate and change the display colors F3 XYMODEM label for the F3 key Press F3 to start an XMODEM or YMODEM transfer of setup of data This may be done only after selecting the proper menu on the 8200 F10 RESET label for the F10 key Press F10 for a RESET of communications RESET turns off the DTR DSR lines on the communications port sends a BREAK and turns them on again Use this after communications times out with the 8200 C 1995 Sutron Corp Copyright notice In addition TS8210 also supports F4 as a function key to push to DOS Even though it
311. to use and call it TEST The at the beginning of the name causes the sensor to become a sensor variable which can be set by our program When the sensor is measured or viewed it will always return the last value stored the slope and offset are ignored Enter the following program Statements 10 TEST Measure Analogl Measure Analog2 100 20 Log Time TEST TEST Line 10 measures and computes the ratio of Analog to Analog2 and multiplies by 100 to create a percentage Line 20 logs the value to make sure the most recent measurement is logged Now you can setup the 8200 to log TEST and set the Basic Run Interval and Offset In a test case like this you can set the Log Interval and the Basic Run Interval to 00 00 10 for quick response While changing the Analog and Analog2 inputs you can observe how the value of TEST is updated in either the log or live readings every 10 seconds Statements A statement in a basic program consists of a valid basic command with appropriate parameters All program statements must begin with a line number Multiple statements on a line may be separated with colons 10 A 10 The assignment statement assigns A a value of 10 20 B 20 C 30 Multiple statements are allowed when separated with colons 30 A Analogl The last measured value of sensors may be accessed by name 40 Analogl 5 The last value may also be changed 50 MySensor 1 Programmable sensors can be accessed the same
312. tomers The 8210 datalogger retains and builds on all the features and programming structure of the 8200A datalogger Users can expect the same ease of programming by front panel flexible setup and telemetry options Enhancements featured in the 8210 include Dual communications now supported in one unit PCMCIA memory card slot for data or programming storage True industry standard RS 485 port 20 Digital input output lines for SCADA or other control applications Internal auxiliary RS 232 port Dedicated SDI 12 port with three wire terminal connection Solar panel battery regulator current increased to 1 25 amps to support larger solar panels e Dedicated external RS 232 serial port for programming and data retrieval Both units 8210 and 8200A can accommodate optional telemetry modules telephone modem telephone modem with speech synthesis GOES radio transmitter radio modem with internal radio radio modem for external radio METEOSAT radio transmitter INSAT radio transmitter Introduction 1 1 Model Numbers Model Numbers The full model number for the 8200 specifies the type of 8200 ordered as well as the telemetry options selected The general format of the model number is 82X0 AB14 Y X 0 aaa 8200A x 1 a 8210 Y 1 Standard Enclosure blue metal box for 8200A fiberelass box for 8210 Y 2 Modular Mount package A telemetry option 1 B telemetry option 2 8210 only See Table below Telemetry Options 0
313. transmitted by the 8200 TRANSMISSION FORMAT Every GOES transmission consists of lt CARRIER gt lt ONE ZERO gt lt MLS gt lt ID gt lt DATA gt lt EOT gt where CARRI ransmissions nd long hort or noocttH ONE ZERO MLS ID DATA El O lt ONE ZERO gt The length of is transmissions transmissions he length of lt CARRIER gt is 0 55 seconds for short ransmissions and 4 95 seconds for long Random transmissions are always short nd international transmissions are always self timed Domestic self timed transmissions may use long carrier depending on the application 0 50 seconds for short and 2 42 seconds for long The lt MLS gt is always a 15 bit binary as 100010011010111 first Data is always sent so the lt MLS gt takes 0 15 seco The sattelite lt ID gt of the da coded address word issued as number requires 0 31 seconds to tra The actual lt DATA gt contained depends on the format being used detail later The data itse baud Synchronous the printable ASCII characte 1 Like RS232C and the parity bit last he ASCII EOT character or 0 irst For international t 31 bit sequence as follows 010000011011101110010100110 om mc A The lt ID gt is sent MSB first sequenc xpressed in most significant bit at 100 bits per second nds to send ta recorder is a BCH a 31 bit he
314. tting the communications port and baud rate you will be able to set the foreground and background colors The foreground color is the color of the highlights at the bottom of the screen The background color is the color of the screen and the text in at the bottom You can set the foreground and background color to make the screen more readable or pleasant to look at Simply use the arrow keys to move the box to select the desired color and press ENTER XYMODEM TS8210 is programmed to automatically display the Transfer Protocol menu whenever certain menus are used on the 8200 You can also display the Transfer Protocol menu by pressing F3 XYMODEM However it will not be able to make a transfer if you have not already used the proper 8200 menu to initiate the transfer Therefore under most circumstances there is no need to press the XYMODEM key The software will do it automatically whenever a transfer is initiated Appendix E 8200 Test Set Software For example if you use the 8200 Upload Download Transfer Setup command the 8200 will trigger TS8210 to display the following Select Transfer Protocol e gt eceive File download gt Select Data Direction lt gt end File lt upload gt ancel g pY Receive file accepts XMODEM XMODEM 1K and YMODEM transfer protocols If you have a choice on the sending side choose YMODEM Alt Highlighted Letter Selects Item Tab moves between items Notice that the trans
315. turn 1760 1770 1780 formatANC 1790 n readlog s WINDSPD n int n 10 0 5 1800 if null or err then goto 1850 1805 if n gt 4095 or n lt 0 then n 4095 1810 3 n 5p2 1820 n readlog s WINDDIR 1830 if null or err then n 0 1835 if n gt 4095 or n lt 0 then n 4095 1840 n p2 0 p2 1990 all done 2000 return 2010 2020 formattime 2030 O int s 86400 Sp2 int s 3600 mod 24 pl1 2040 return 60010 goto 1000 60011 z 0 stop 65110 GOES Buffer Size Buf 1 0 Stop 65111 GOES Buffer Size Buf 1 0 Stop Using MEM The MEM array is available to your programs for extra variable storage and consists of all memory allocated fo r the Basic program but not currently in use The MEM array is automatically initialized to all zeroes when the system is reset or the program is changed otherwise it retains any data stored One common use for the MEM array is to store a look up table The following program demonstrates how the MEM array can be used to implement a rating table with linear interpolation which converts a stage reading to a computed flow 10 if q 0 then gosub 1000 q 1 100 stage measure stage 110 compute the flow using table lookup 120 if stage lt mem 1 then flow mem 2 goto 200 130 for i 3 to mem 0 2 step 2 140 if stage lt mem i then goto 170 go interpolate the flow 150 next 1 160 fflow mem i 1 goto 200 stage greater th
316. u onto the PC screen If you do not see the main menu when TS8210 is started or if the display blanks press the F10 key This sends a signal to the 8200 to wake up and display the menu again If the 8200 still does not display the main menu you must use the front panel of the 8200 to verify that the EEROM setup is configured for the Serial port To do so press EJ to turn on the display and then use Y until EEROM SETUP is displayed Press gt and the display should show Serial USER If it does not press kJ repeatedly until the USER value appears Then use Y to display the User rate Baud operating speed It should show the baud rate as 9600 baud If it does not press until the baud rate is 9600 Press F10 on the PC to try again If you are still having difficulties consult the Troubleshooting chapter 10 for help Getting To Know The 8200 3 9 PC Control of the 8200 3 10 The 8200 Menu Tree Since the PC screen is obviously much larger than the small 8200 display it is able to give a full view of the menus A complete list ofthe 8200 PC menus is shown on the following pages Note that PC menus are able to show all the items of a menu grouped together Separate menus are given for each of the model 8200s however all 8200s share most of the same menus and fields If you will remember when using the front panel display to set up the 8200 you were required to push the directional arrows to move around the menu tree When usin
317. ultiple use serial port can also be configured for communication with e an external radio or telephone modem e aSutron 9000 e aprinter e RS232 RS485 sensors SDI 12 Port The SDI 12 Port provides support for a special serial digital sensor standard devised by the U S Geological Survey The SDI 12 standard allows multiple SDI devices to be connected to an 8200 with each device being able to report up to 9 different parameters The 8210 has 2 sets of SDI 12 connections on the terminal strips for connecting multiple SDI 12 devices The 8200A has a single DB9 connector for the SDI 12 connection If you have more than one SDI device to connect to the 8200A you may want to use some kind of external terminal strip instead of connecting all the sensors directly to the 9 pin connector Ground Lug A ground lug is provided on each 8200 in order to connect the 8200 to an EARTH ground at the site On the 8210 0014 1 this ground lug is on the side of the enclosure On the 8210 0014 2 the ground lug is on the protection termination board On the 82004 the lug is in the lower left front of the 8200A Normally you should run a 16 gauge wire from this lug to the site ground rod Failure to do so can render the site more susceptible to damage by lightning Front Panel Control of the 8200 Now that you have a working knowledge of the components of the front panel display it is time to learn about the 8200 s inner workings As mentioned earlier the 8200 may
318. unter They are also useful to teach you features of the 8200 Setup for a simple stream gauging station Setup for a simple stream gauging station Nothing could be simpler than the setup for a simple stream gauging station that uses a shaft encoder The following setup measures the encoder every 15 minutes and logs the data The Switch Power Option PwrMode is ON to provide 12 volts to the encoder MEASUREMENT SCHEDULE MeasInt 00 15 00 SampInt 00 00 00 MeasTim 00 00 00 SampTim 00 00 00 PwrTim 00 00 00 Samples Set 10 Measmnt Log 1 BasInt 00 00 00 BasTim 00 00 00 PwrMode on ENABLE CONFIG ALARM SENSORS Sensor XX Name Encoderl Enable on Measure on Average off Log on Intrvl 00 00 00 Slope 0 01 Offset 0 00 Elevation 0 Right Digits 2 Setup for averag ing To average data turn Measure OFF for the sensor turn Average ON and enter a sample interval and number of samples The following setup samples the encoder every 5 seconds SampInt 00 00 05 to compute an average The average is computed and logged every 15 minutes MeasInt aligned 00 00 00 MeasTim Samples to Average is 180 because the system will take 180 samples sampling 1 every 5 seconds for 15 minutes 12 min 15 minutes MEASUREMENT SCHEDULE ENABLE CONFIG ALARM SENSORS MeasInt 00 15 00 Sensor XX SamplInt 00 00 05 Name Encoderl MeasTim
319. up the display consult the Troubleshooting Guide in Chapter 12 page 1 Depending on how your particular unit has been set up the display may remain on or turn off after a brief period Unpacking and Initialization 2 3 Chapter 3 Getting To Know The 8200 This chapter describes in detail the 8200 front panel including connections controls and displays and the menus that you will use to set up and operate the 8200 Complete information is given on how to operate the 8200 from the front panel or a PC 8200 Front Panel T In gt iaa j T 0 T i Z MADE IN ISA 8210 Front Panel 1 version shown Display RAM Pack Socket gt O MODEL NO 8200 0014 O SUTRON 8200A SUTRON q ad VA 22170 DATA RECORDER TRANSMITTER Keypad 7 gt w DATA CARTRIDGE Serial I AT port PWR IN LI ee 4 Gil GG1122G 45G G 5G 5 6 7A8 G a QO SODSGSUSSHDSODO SODSOGSUGSODSEDG kad SDI 12 su pur i I O pofi SDI O 1G 1 G21 G G G 65 6 78046 G OUTPUT a TTT TIT T fine Emea AL ig ad Me anios aux sx ene S N911230 PWR IN i Ground Lug Terminal Strips 8200A for external power Battery connects to EXT BAT Solar Panel to PWR IN The Front Panel The Front Panel The front control panel provides a built in way to operate the 8200 A
320. ure Transducer Satellite Radio LOS Radio Telephone w Modem and Speech Synthesis Internal Battery 0014 and 3014 models only 6 5 aH 12V operates 8200 for 90 days at 15 minute sampling Internal charger regulator 0 75 amp max for solar panel input or DC voltage Quiescent 500 uA Typical Avg 2 mA 15 minute intervals of shaft encoder sample Software Control of switched 12VDC power see ECN 4607 Switch closure w quadrature inputs 2 max 3 wire 12V 4 wire interface to counters Input Levels 0 5V Switch closure Resolution 16 bits Max Input Frequency 32 kHz 0 1 w o rollover 1 mHz max w rollover 8 Standard Resolution 13 bits Accuracy 0 02 of full scale over temperature range Input Range 0 5V Standard DE Excitation Output 5V 12V Pwr Consumption A D 30 mW active DC Excitation 5V Interface Differential Input Range 5V to 100 mV 8200 Speech Modem Module 8200 3000 SPECIFICATIONS 8200 3000 Speech Modem Module Dimensions 5 1 2 Hx 10 1 4 W x 9 5 8 H Weight 12 lb with internal battery Operating air temp range 40 C to 60 C Storage and shipping temp range 55 C to 115 C Electronics Specifications Protected to 3000 Volt peak 500 Joule transient phone line surges from tip to ring tip to ground and ring to ground Receiver sensitivity 45dBm Receiver dynamic range 36dBm 9dBm to 45dBm Low power standby mode Standard Int
321. urred which does not exist in the program An attempt was made to access or log a sensor which is not contained in the log The sensor may be enabled for logging but may not yet be in the log if recording was never enabled This is likely to occur after downloading a new setup and program and running the program before the log has been initialized An access was made beyond the end of the MEM array Indexes to Exceeded MEM must be between zero and FREEMEM 1 Error Message Description Device Already An attempt was made to open the current device 1 e interactively Open running a program on the RS 232 port which tries open the TERM port One important debugging technique is to run your program interactively from within the Basic Interpreter itself If your program logs sensors make sure that you initialize the log first or you will get Sensor Not Logged errors as explained above Try to put your program in to as many situations as possible If you have multiple states make sure you try them all out You may not realize that your program has a syntax error or logic problem until some later time when that code actually runs which may be too late 1f that piece of code was the section which is supposed to detect a flood Once your program is installed and running as scheduled you should check the Inspect System Display Status regularly to check on the Basic Status Not only will this option report any errors which may have occurred and
322. use then the 8200 can be installed without an additional enclosure or an enclosure such as the Sutron Alternate Enclosure may be used The advantage to using an enclosure even for indoor installations is that the enclosure provides a way of organizing batteries cables and protecting them from inadvertant handling When using an enclosure it is good practice plan for the cable entrance exit in the bottom or sides of the enclosure Avoid cables entering the top of the enclosure as this promotes leaking For outdoor installations cables should enter the bottom of the enclosure Plan on using liquid tight fittings around cables to create a seal around the cable and the enclosure After determining the location of the site the actual orientation of the 8200 should be planned The 8200 LED can be difficult to read in very sunny conditions Try to locate the 8200 where direct sunlight will not shine on the display For GOES or LOS radio 8200s a gell cell type battery may be placed in the same enclosure as the 8200 This type of battery is designed to recapture the gasses that result from charging the battery Some other batteries however will release the gasses into the enclosure If the battery has a vent hole on it then this should be connected to a tube and routed outside the enclosure If the battery does not have a vent hole and is not a sealed type battery it should be placed outside the enclosure Power Budget The power budget is an ana
323. used to transport the 8200 to the site or for shipping the unit back to the factory Note If you want to return a unit to the factory first fill out the Product Return Sheet located at the back of this manual and then call the factory 703 406 2800 for an RMA number This procedure will help us to handle your equipment in the most efficient manner Initialization All units have been initialized at the factory Factory initialization consists of e installing the Lithium Battery jumper to maintain RAM and the internal clock e installing the internal battery standard and speech modem models only and e applying power to the 8200 with the 4 and P keys pressed to initiate an INITIALIZATION This last step clears out the databases and autosizes the available memory For instructions on doing this initialization yourself please refer to Chapter 11 page 11 11 Connecting the Main Battery The 8200 is designed to run using power from a main battery Some model 8200s come with a main 12VDC battery already installed These models are the basic 8200s 8200 0014 8210 0014 and 8200s with only a speech modem installed 8200 3014 8210 3014 The battery is a 12V 6 amp hour rechargeable battery mounted on the back panel All other models require an external battery 8210 The main battery connects to the protection termination board installed in the 8210 The protection termination board has several separate connections for the batt
324. val of 9 7 retrieving logged data 9 1 uploading downloading 4 3 4 8 Data interval 4 23 Data Interval RR 4 29 Data Time 4 24 Data Time RR 4 30 Date 4 2 setting the 3 8 Date Format 4 16 DateFmt 4 16 DatInRR 4 29 DatInST 4 23 DatTmRR 4 30 DatTmST 4 24 DeadBand 4 60 DeadBnd 4 60 Dial In 4 42 Dial In Message 4 42 Dial Out 4 51 4 52 Dial Out Enable 4 51 Dial Out Message 4 52 Display Brightness 3 3 Display Status 4 32 DUMP DATA 4 3 4 8 Dump Rate 4 16 E EEROM relation to setup 3 20 EEROM Setup 4 3 4 15 EEROM Setup Options 4 3 4 15 Elevation 4 69 Enable 4 60 ENABLE SENSOR 4 73 Enable Sensors 4 73 Enter Key Required 4 17 Enter Reqd 4 17 Enter SDI 12 Cmd 4 35 Index 2 Enter SDI 12 Commands 4 35 Erase Ram Card 4 8 Event Driven System 7 11 Exit 4 3 F Fields 3 7 options 3 9 selecting options and changing values 3 12 Format ST 4 25 Format ST 4 25 Front Panel 3 1 Function 3 7 G General setup sheet 3 16 GOES antenna pointing 8 6 fields needed for random transmissions 4 27 radio test 4 35 setting international channels 4 26 setting the channel ID number 4 23 setting the satellite ID 4 26 setup fields to be defined 4 4 4 21 for random transmissions 7 6 GOES Radio Random Setup Menu 4 27 GOES Radio Test 4 35 GOES SETUP 4 4 4 21 Ground lug 3 3 Groups 4 61 H H W Handshake on COM 4 55 High Alarm 4 62 7 9 High L
325. ve readings are zero then you may have a setup problem Read the next section on diagnosing setup problems Setup Problems Setup problems may also show up in several ways Some of the ways include e data is not recorded on any sensor e data is not recorded from one or two of several sensors e all recorded data is zero or some incorrect value for a sensor recording cycles are skipped If no data is recorded there are two likely setup problems First for data to be recorded logged you must have Log turned ON in the CONFIGURE SENSORS sub menu entry for the sensor Second Recording must be ON in the main menu If Recording is OFF then no data will be recorded for any sensor If Log is OFF for any sensor then that sensor will not be recorded For more CONFIG SENSORS information turn to Chapter 4 page 4 67 If recorded values for a sensor are all zero or some incorrect value even when you know the input levels are correct then you are probably misusing the SLOPE and OFFSET in the CONFIGURE SENSORS sub menu Values are Logged recorded according to the formula Recorded Value Raw Value SLOPE OFFSET When you use the LIVE READINGS sub menu you are looking at the Recorded Value from this formula If you have accidentally entered the SLOPE as zero you will get zero for all readings If you have a sensor which does not change much and you enter a negative offset equal to the mean reading you will get zero or very small ne
326. w the ALARM OPTIONS fields one at a time and set them as desired From the PC the display will show a list of sensors on the left of the screen with gt pointing to the first sensor as shown in the example below A menu of commands is also shown at the top of the screen The data shown on the right is the data for the selected sensor To select another sensor use the up and down arrow keys Note Units with speech modems will have the additional fields Trend Prefix and Suffix Units with GOES will have the additional field Groups The Groups are used to identify which sensors trigger random reports and which sensors are included in self timed and random transmissions The Enable field takes on additional values for speech modems and GOES Active Sensors gt Analog4 Pressure S e SSSR SSS SS RSS a Alarm Options A E Enable OFF f C Control OFF I 1 High Alarm OFF i 2 Low Alarm OFF f 3 ROC Alarm OFF Alarm Limits i H High Limit 0 400 f L Low Limit 0 000 R ROC Level 0 000 B DeadBand 0 000 HO 4 58 SYSTEM SETUP ALARM OPTIONS Control SYSTEM SETUP ALARM OPTIONS Control Control C Control OFF Control options are disabled ON Control options are enabled When the sensor is in alarm the switched 12V power on the terminal block will respond according to the setting of PWR Mode in the Measurement Schedule sub menu SYSTEM SETUP ALARM OPTIONS DeadBnd DeadBnd B De
327. water temperature and air temperature The trigger for group 3 is water level The trigger for group four is dissolved oxygen All five parameters are to be included in self timed transmissions group 1 e Water Level eee member of group 1 self timed Parameter 2 Enable TX Dissolved Oxygen Groups 4130 trigger and member for group 4 member of group 1 self timed and group 3 Parameter 3 Enable ON Water Temperature Lee not a trigger value member of group self timed group 3 and group 4 pes nl Y O Air Temperature Groups 0140 not a trigger value member of O cal group self timed and group 4 Mae A Wind Speed a el group 1 self timed SYSTEM SETUP ALARM OPTIONS High Alarm High Alarm 1 High Alarm High Alarm controls whether the 8200 will generate an alarm based on a comparison with the High Limit The High Alarm test compares the sensor value with HiLev plus DeadBnd If the sensor value is greater than or equal to HiLev plus DeadBnd the sensor is in High Alarm When the sensor value falls below HiLev minus DeadBnd the sensor is no longer in High Alarm This High Alarm test will be made only if High Alarm is not set to OFF High Alarm can have the following options OFF Alarm detection is not based on the HiLev ABOVE High Alarm checks will be made Transmit alarm when the sensor goes above HiLev plus DeadBnd into alarm Menu Tree Reference 4 61 SYSTEM SETUP ALARM OPTIONS MHiLev B
328. will automatically turn off when the telephone modem establishes communications with another modem or times out The speaker may be turned off during speech operations This mode is usually used only in modem only no speech applications Initialization and Resets There are several different initialization and reset functions The following table explains the function and use of each Initialization Clears out a setup and sets the EEROM to default values resizes the RAM Clears out a setup and sets the EEROM to default values resizes the RAM Password Reset Clears out the password for the setup Used when the password has been forgotten Hard Reset Causes the microprocessor to restart The 8200 will continue to use the setup in RAM if it is valid Otherwise the setup will be restored from EEROM Initialization To initialize EEROM and RAM to factory settings perform the following steps 1 Power off the 8200 2 Push in the left and right arrow keys simultaneously 3 Reconnect the battery while holding down the keys note on models with an internal battery and no switch you will need to remove the 8200 from its case to disconnect the battery Password Reset un To reset the password on a system to 1 Power off the 8200 2 Push in the down arrow key and while holding the key 3 Reconnect the battery while holding down the key perform the following steps note on models with an internal battery and no switch you
329. will be setup to store data at the specified MeasInt for all sensors with LOG ON A typical value for MeasInt is 00 15 00 to save 15 minute data from the sensors Intervals of much longer and shorter duration are also possible Menu Tree Reference 4 75 SYSTEM SETUPIMEASMNT SCHEDULE WMeasTim SYSTEM SETUPIMEASMNT SCHEDULEWMeasTim MeasTim T Measurement Time Measurement Time MeasTim is the Time in the format HH MM SS at which the 8200 will begin taking single readings from sensors with the Measure function enabled SYSTEM SETUPICONFIG SENSORS For many applications MeasTim can be left at the default value of 00 00 00 When the 8200 is done taking measurements the values are written to the log for any sensors that are enabled with LOG ON MeasTim should not be looked at as an absolute Time but as a synchronization Time A MeasTim of 00 00 00 causes measurements to be synchronized to the hour If MeasInt is 00 15 00 it would make no difference if MeasTim were 00 00 00 or 01 00 00 or 02 00 00 or 00 30 00 because they all define the same set of times 00 00 00 00 15 00 00 30 00 If the current time is 12 00pm and the MeasInt is 1 00 and the MeasTim is 17 30 the 8200 will start measuring at the next valid interval 1 30pm the 8200 will not wait until 5 30pm Example MeasTim 00 30 00 MeasInt 01 00 00 The above values cause the 8200 to Measure once an hour synchronized to the half hour e g 00 30 00 01 30 00 02 30 00
330. will need to remove the 8200 from its case to disconnect the battery Hard Reset A hard reset is a restart of the microprocessor To perform a hard reset press all four arrow keys at the same time Maintenance and Service 11 11 Chapter 12 Troubleshooting This chapter gives instructions on how to troubleshoot an 8200 You will want to review this chapter to learn better how the 8200 operates as well as service a site that may have a problem Introduction Introduction The 8200 was designed for rugged field operation in extreme conditions We have done our best to provide you with a reliable data logger In the event you have trouble with the 8200 we recommend that you first look for the cause in the most obvious of places Many common problems come from simple sources Corroded or damp connectors probably cause 95 percent of all problems followed by old failing batteries and improper setup General Troubleshooting Procedures Troubleshooting should always follow a logical progression The intent should always be to isolate the problem to a specific area and then focus on that troubled area Is it an instrument problem Is it a power problem Is the unit set up properly The following paragraphs describe how to isolate problems Display will not light The display should light when power is first applied to the 8200 or when J is pressed The exception is when TINY BASIC is in control of the display and has it turned off f
331. wo approaches e make the changes in the 8200 and download the code to the PC e make the changes in the code on the PC and upload to the 8200 We recommend that you use the second approach because it insures that your final debugged code is on the PC for future use Using the first approach you will sometimes forget to download the code to the PC and you will not have a copy of the final code Debugging Troubleshooting The following is a list of error messages you may see when running your program or when using the inspect system display status option If the command was not entered in immediate mode you will also see the line number at which the error occurred in the program Error Message Description 10 26 Syntax Error Math Error Sensor Not Found Line Number Not Found Sensor Not Logged Max MEM This is the most common error and it is issued when BASIC does not recognize or cannot execute an instruction A divide by 0 will result in a syntax error Math error is not currently used A sensor name or variable was used which does not exist Basic programs often use general purpose names for sensors for instance Stage which have no conterpart in the system setup enable sensors menu The person setting up the unit is expected to decide which physical connection the sensor is connected to and then rename it to the logical name used in the Basic program change Encoder to Stage A branch to a line number occ
332. xadecimal The lt ID gt 7 bit data with Odd parity nsmit in the transmission and is described in lf is alway sent at 100 Only rs between 32 lt SPACE gt and 26 lt gt appear in the data portion of a message the least signigicant bit is sent first or domestic transmission the lt EOT gt is the same as 0100000 in binary MSB ransmissions the lt EOT gt is 001 RANDOM BINARY DATA FORMAT This format is used when the 8200 makes a random or alarm transmission The format of the transmission data is lt GROUP ID gt lt OFFSET gt lt SENSOR1 DATA gt lt SENSOR2 DATA gt lt SENSOR N DATA gt lt SENSOR1 DATA gt lt SENSOR2 DATA gt lt SENSOR N DATA gt lt SENSOR1 DATA gt lt SENSOR2 DATA gt lt SENSOR N DATA gt lt COUNT where GROUP ID OFFS SENSOR DATA COUNTER BATT ER gt lt BATTERY gt The GROUP ID is a one byte character in the range 1 to 9 indicating the random group which caused the transmission OFFSET is a 1 byte binary encoded number indicating the number of minutes ago the most recent data was recorded E The actual SENSOR DATA contains only those sensors belonging to the random group which caused the alarm The data values are 3 byte binary encoded signed numbers allowing a range of 131072 to 131071 The actual 6 bit binary encoded format is described later The 820
333. xxmmdd PRN Reading Descriptor Reading Sensor Inf Writing Header Writing Data Date mm dd yyyy hh mm ss Complete Where xxxxmmdd is the same as the input file name and mm dd yyyy is the current date being converted The LOGPRN program allows you to choose several options in the way that data from the RAM Pack are converted The options are selected by typing LOGPRN followed by the option selector For example LOGPRN xxxmmdd X You may select more that one option at a time as long as they are not mutually exclusive The first two options X and Z control the way the conversion of null data items Null items can either be ignored or they may be zeroes The second options control time and date display in the converted data S tells the program to time tag to seconds J changes the date display from month day to the Julian numbering system The file format is designed to be spreadsheet compatible When using LOTUS 123 a PRN file is read in by using the FIN File Import Numbers command By using the FIN command the data will be imported in the correct number of columns in numeric form LOGSTAT LOGSTAT generates simple statistics from the data in a LOG file The program computes the daily min max average as well as the number of samples for each sensor in the file The output of LOGSTAT is displayed on the screen If you want to save the output in a file redirect the output using gt For example to generate statistics o
334. y High Alarm and Low Alarm Rate of Change alarms are a bit different in that ABOVE and BELOW do change the type of test that is made The rate of change alarm compares the absolute value of the current value minus a previous value with the ROCLev If ROCAlarm is set to ABOVE the sensor will be in alarm and you will be notified if the computed change is gt ROCLev If ROC Alarm is set to BELOW the sensor will be in alarm and you will be notified if the computed change is lt ROCLev Note that the test is different for ROCAlarm set to ABOVE and BELOW This is different from the situation with High Alarm and Low Alarm where ABOVE and BELOW did not change the test only the notification The previous discussion speaks of alarm notification without describing the fact that you need to set up this notification in order for 1t to happen There are several things that must be set for the notification to take place telephone Set the ALARM OPTIONS Enable to DIAL for the sensor you are testing Make sure that MODEM SETUP WDial Out Enable is ON Use the Dial Out message to control what the 8200 does Use the options in the phone number to control whether the dial out is to use the voice or modem or both Set the ALARM OPTIONS Enable to RADIO Satellite Radio Set the ALARM OPTIONS Enable to GOES for the sensor you are testing Make sure you set up GROUPS with this sensor as a trigger Make sure GOES SETUP TXMode is Random or Both The 82
335. y SSP and how they are used by the 8200 A See l F 1 Appendix F 8200 Sutron Standard Protocol Capabilities 8200 Sensor Information Each sensor in the 8200 can be accessed with SSP The sensor contains more information that just the last recorded value These values are documented below PC Base 2 values aan eT ption le Daa A Data A T EA E Slope E E fet Ss Right Digits SSA pS 2 Sensor Enable Bits low 16 bits amp Alarm Status Bits high 16 bits 6 7 Live Sensor Data a measurement is made every time this isread Se a OSOS E 9 Blevation 9 jo Sensor Enable Bits o PC Base 2 Value s differ from the actual SSP value s in that they start at 1 and two values have been swapped for better uniformity between 8200 value s and Sutron s 9000 RTU values PC Base 2 decodes just the alarm status bits of this field When the sensor is not in alarm PC Base 2 reports the string OK for this value otherwise the characters under the PC Base 2 Code column in Alarm Status Bits table are concatenated and reported F 2 Appendix F 8200 Sutron Standard Protocol Capabilities Following are tables documenting values which contain bit fields Alarm PC Base 2 FEA Bits vate a 77 LOs A H HighlimitAlarm o limit Alarm 5 a gt PA A a 8 Trendrisigs s a ple Trend falling gt PS 3 Trendwasrisimg 6 a Trend was falling 8 256 fa Analertmessagehasbeentriggered

system setup - Sutron Corporation

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents